Legi for Windows
User Guide
Copyright  1997 Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
Legitronic is a registered trademark of Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
Paradox is a registered trademark of Borland International, Inc.
Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation.
This program or documentation contains confidential information and
trade secrets of Weber Marking Systems, Inc. and its suppliers.
Reverse engineering of object code prohibited.
Version 2.2.0
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
711 W. Algonquin Road
Arlington Heights, IL 60005-4457
Phone: 847-364-8500 Fax: 847-364-8575
www.webermarking.com
MK1420 01/99
P/N 38292
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
Conten
ts
Contents ____________________________________________ 2
Introduction_________________________________________1-1
Understanding Legi ........................................................................................................... 3
Customer Support ............................................................................................................. 4
Conventions Used in This Manual .................................................................................... 5
Getting Started______________________________________2-1
Minimum System Requirements ....................................................................................... 1
Installing Legi for Windows ............................................................................................... 2
Navigating Legi ................................................................................................................. 4
Using the Keyboard ................................................................................................ 4
Using the Mouse ..................................................................................................... 4
Using the Online Help Feature .......................................................................................... 5
Signing On and Off ............................................................................................................ 6
Signing On .............................................................................................................. 6
Signing Off .............................................................................................................. 6
Closing Legi ............................................................................................................ 7
Using the Main Menu ........................................................................................................ 8
Using the Legi for Windows Toolbar ................................................................................. 9
Using the Database Maintenance Module________________3-1
Understanding Database Tables....................................................................................... 3
Terms ...................................................................................................................... 3
Table Limits............................................................................................................. 3
Key Fields/Keyed Tables ........................................................................................ 4
Using the Database Maintenance Window ....................................................................... 5
Creating Database Tables ................................................................................................ 6
Importing Data ................................................................................................................... 8
Selecting the Import File ......................................................................................... 8
Importing Into a Selected Table .............................................................................. 9
Importing Into an Answer Table .............................................................................. 10
Importing Using an Existing Table Structure .......................................................... 11
Editing a Database Table .................................................................................................. 12
Opening a Database Table ..................................................................................... 12
Modifying Field Data ............................................................................................... 12
Inserting a Record .................................................................................................. 13
Deleting a Record ................................................................................................... 13
Weber Marking Systems
G-2
Index
Cutting and Pasting a Record ................................................................................. 13
Copying and Pasting a Record ............................................................................... 14
Searching for a Field Value .................................................................................... 14
Clearing All Records ............................................................................................... 15
Restructuring Tables ......................................................................................................... 16
Selecting the Table to Restructure ......................................................................... 16
Inserting a Field ...................................................................................................... 17
Deleting a Field ....................................................................................................... 17
Moving a Field ........................................................................................................ 17
Changing a Field Name .......................................................................................... 18
Changing the Field Type......................................................................................... 18
Designating a Key Field ............................................................................... 18
Designating a Different Field Type or Length............................................... 19
Creating the Restructured Table............................................................................. 19
Sizing Table Columns Widths ........................................................................................... 19
Sizing Columns Manually ....................................................................................... 20
Automatically Sizing Column Widths ...................................................................... 20
Deleting a Database Table ................................................................................................ 21
Exporting Data................................................................................................................... 22
Sorting a Table .................................................................................................................. 23
Merging Two Tables .......................................................................................................... 24
Performing Queries ........................................................................................................... 26
Setting Numeric Precision ................................................................................................. 28
Showing Valid Field Types ................................................................................................ 29
Using the Table Menu ....................................................................................................... 30
Creating a Language Table .................................................................................... 30
Viewing the Language Table .................................................................................. 30
Printing Database Tables .................................................................................................. 31
Setting up a Printer ................................................................................................. 31
Printing a Table ....................................................................................................... 32
Printing Labels______________________________________4-1
Network Printing ................................................................................................................ 2
Windows NT............................................................................................................ 2
Novell ...................................................................................................................... 2
Understanding the Print Labels Window ........................................................................... 3
Creating a Print Job .......................................................................................................... 5
Loading an Existing Print Job............................................................................................ 8
Selecting the Remote Input Port ....................................................................................... 9
Setting Up DDE Links ....................................................................................................... 10
Entering Supplied Data Fields........................................................................................... 11
Entering Keyboard Data ......................................................................................... 13
Entering Remote Input Data ................................................................................... 13
Entering DDE Data ................................................................................................. 14
Selecting Table Lookup Data ................................................................................. 14
Saving a Print Job ............................................................................................................. 16
Submitting a Print Job ....................................................................................................... 17
Test Printing a Label ......................................................................................................... 17
Printing to a File ................................................................................................................ 18
Performing a Queried Label Print...................................................................................... 19
Performing an AS/400 Queried Label Print ....................................................................... 21
Performing an AS/400 Keyed Queried Label Print ........................................................... 22
Performing an ODBC Queried Label Print ........................................................................ 24
Setting Printer Options ...................................................................................................... 26
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
Index
Previewing the Label ......................................................................................................... 27
Using Print Manager ......................................................................................................... 29
Understanding the Queue Window ......................................................................... 30
Starting Print Manager ............................................................................................ 31
Pausing and Resuming Queues and Print Jobs ..................................................... 31
Suspending/Unsuspending Print Jobs .................................................................... 32
Moving a Print Job .................................................................................................. 32
Deleting a Print Job ................................................................................................ 32
Resetting a Print Job .............................................................................................. 33
Flushing the Queue ................................................................................................ 33
Saving the Queue ................................................................................................... 34
Designing Labels____________________________________5-1
Using the Label Design Window ....................................................................................... 3
Using the Keyboard in Label Design ................................................................................. 4
Using the Tools ................................................................................................................. 5
Creating Label Formats ..................................................................................................... 7
Setting the Label Default Colors ............................................................................. 9
Setting the Label Options ....................................................................................... 10
Using a Label Print Log ..................................................................................................... 12
Specifying the Label Print Log ................................................................................ 12
Creating the Label Print Log ................................................................................... 12
Configuring the Label Print Log Option .................................................................. 13
Viewing the Label Print Log .................................................................................... 13
Saving a Label Format ...................................................................................................... 14
Saving an Existing Format ...................................................................................... 14
Saving a New Format or a Format with a New Name ............................................ 14
Setting Printer Options ...................................................................................................... 14
Opening a Label Format ................................................................................................... 15
Deleting Label Formats ..................................................................................................... 16
Changing Label Settings ................................................................................................... 17
Adding Text ....................................................................................................................... 18
Setting the Font for a Text Field ............................................................................. 21
Viewing and Updating the Fonts for a Text Field.................................................... 23
Adding Barcodes ............................................................................................................... 25
Adding Graphics ................................................................................................................ 28
Adding Lines...................................................................................................................... 31
Editing Lines ........................................................................................................... 31
Adding Boxes .................................................................................................................... 33
Editing Boxes .......................................................................................................... 33
Adding Raw Fields ............................................................................................................ 35
Adding the Data Expression.............................................................................................. 37
Adding Constant Data ............................................................................................. 37
Adding Reference Fields ........................................................................................ 39
Adding Database Table Data ................................................................................. 41
Entering a Queried Database Field ........................................................................ 43
Adding a Text File ................................................................................................... 45
Including the Date or Time...................................................................................... 46
Manually Building a Data Expression ..................................................................... 47
Adding a Serial Number Field ........................................................................................... 50
Using a Constant Starting Value ............................................................................ 50
Referencing Another Field Value ............................................................................ 51
Selecting from a Database ..................................................................................... 51
Indicating the Number of Times to Increment the Serial Number .......................... 52
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
Index
Adding a Tracking Serial Number Field ............................................................................ 53
Entering the Constant Serial Number Name .......................................................... 53
Referencing Another Field Value ............................................................................ 54
Selecting from a Database ..................................................................................... 55
Indicating the Number of Times to Increment the Serial Number .......................... 55
Printing Identical Labels .................................................................................................... 57
Using Constant Data ............................................................................................... 57
Referencing Another Field Value ............................................................................ 57
Selecting from a Database ..................................................................................... 58
Adding Supplied Input Fields ............................................................................................ 59
Setting the Colors for a Field............................................................................................. 63
Setting the Position/Size for a Field .................................................................................. 64
Sizing Fields with a Mouse ................................................................................................ 65
Editing Labels .................................................................................................................... 66
Selecting/Deselecting Fields................................................................................... 66
Undoing/Redoing Edits ........................................................................................... 68
Cutting and Pasting Fields ...................................................................................... 68
Copying and Pasting Fields .................................................................................... 69
Changing a Label Field ........................................................................................... 69
Moving Label Fields ................................................................................................ 70
Aligning Label Fields ............................................................................................... 72
Deleting Label Fields .............................................................................................. 73
Viewing Labels .................................................................................................................. 74
Zooming In .............................................................................................................. 74
Zooming Out ........................................................................................................... 74
Zooming Out - Full Screen Window ........................................................................ 75
Displaying the Cursor Position .......................................................................................... 76
Displaying the Ruler .......................................................................................................... 76
Displaying the Font Information Window .......................................................................... 77
Using the Grid ................................................................................................................... 78
Changing the Default Line Thickness ............................................................................... 80
Printing a Label Report ..................................................................................................... 81
Setting up the Label Report Printer ........................................................................ 81
Printing the Label Report ........................................................................................ 82
Test Printing a Label ......................................................................................................... 83
Setting up Security___________________________________6-1
Accessing the Security Module ......................................................................................... 3
Maintaining Data Security ................................................................................................. 4
Creating Directories ................................................................................................ 4
Assigning Directory Access .................................................................................... 5
Entering Group Security .................................................................................................... 6
Adding a Group ....................................................................................................... 6
Changing a Group's Name ..................................................................................... 7
Viewing the Users in a Group ................................................................................. 8
Deleting a Group ..................................................................................................... 8
Defining Function Security for a Group .................................................................. 9
Database Security ........................................................................................ 11
Label Design Security .................................................................................. 12
Graphics Security ......................................................................................... 13
Audit Trail Security ....................................................................................... 13
Print Labels Security .................................................................................... 14
Serial Number Tracking Security ................................................................. 15
Entering User Security ...................................................................................................... 16
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
Index
Adding a User ......................................................................................................... 17
Changing an Existing User's Information ............................................................... 17
Assigning a User to Groups .................................................................................... 18
Removing a User from a Group .............................................................................. 19
Removing a User from the System ......................................................................... 19
Selecting Security Options ................................................................................................ 20
Using the Graphics Module____________________________7-1
Using the Graphics Module ............................................................................................... 7-2
Selecting a Graphic To View ............................................................................................. 7-3
Displaying the Next Graphic in the List ................................................................... 7-3
Displaying the Previous Graphic in the List ............................................................ 7-3
Viewing a Graphic's Information ....................................................................................... 7-4
Deleting a Graphic ............................................................................................................ 7-5
Printing .............................................................................................................................. 7-6
Configuring a Printer ............................................................................................... 7-6
Setting Printer Options ............................................................................................ 7-7
Printing the Displayed Graphic ............................................................................... 7-7
Printing Multiple Graphics ....................................................................................... 7-7
Using Serial Number Tracking__________________________8-1
Adding Tracking Serial Numbers ...................................................................................... 2
Changing the Current Serial Number ................................................................................ 3
Using the Audit Trail__________________________________9-1
Accessing the Audit Trail Menu......................................................................................... 2
Using the Label Stock Log ................................................................................................ 3
Editing the Label Stock Log .................................................................................... 3
Viewing the Stock to Reorder ................................................................................. 4
Viewing the System Print Log ........................................................................................... 6
Creating a Label Print Log ................................................................................................ 7
Configuring Legi____________________________________10-1
Accessing the Configuration Module ................................................................................ 2
Entering the Default Directories ........................................................................................ 3
Selecting Legi Options ...................................................................................................... 4
Changing the Language Selection .................................................................................... 5
Configuring a Printer ......................................................................................................... 7
Connecting a Printer to a Port ................................................................................ 7
Changing a Port ...................................................................................................... 9
Specifying Line Settings ............................................................................... 9
Adding a Windows Printer Driver ............................................................................ 10
Installing a Weber Print Driver ................................................................................ 12
Specifying Options .................................................................................................. 13
Removing a Port ..................................................................................................... 14
Using Custom Fonts .......................................................................................................... 15
Setting Custom Font Features ................................................................................ 17
Setting Custom Font Attributes ............................................................................... 18
Custom Fonts Example .......................................................................................... 19
Using Font Cartridges ....................................................................................................... 22
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
Index
Configuring Remote Input ................................................................................................. 24
Saving Configuration Changes ......................................................................................... 26
Saving within the Configuration Option .................................................................. 26
Saving when Exiting Configuration ......................................................................... 26
Network and Turnkey Installation_______________________A-1
Network Installation ........................................................................................................... 1
Network Printing ..................................................................................................... 4
Security Module ...................................................................................................... 4
Turnkey Installation ........................................................................................................... 5
Glossary___________________________________________B-1
Data Expression Functions____________________________C-1
Printer Specific Functions_____________________________D-1
Series 20, 21, and 22 Options........................................................................................... 2
Configuration .......................................................................................................... 2
Print Labels ............................................................................................................. 3
Label Design ........................................................................................................... 4
Graphics Print and View ......................................................................................... 5
Series 23 Options .............................................................................................................. 6
Configuration .......................................................................................................... 6
Print Labels ............................................................................................................. 7
Label Design ........................................................................................................... 8
Graphics Print and View ......................................................................................... 9
Series 24 Options .............................................................................................................. 10
Configuration .......................................................................................................... 10
Print Labels ............................................................................................................. 11
Label Design ........................................................................................................... 12
Graphics Print and View ......................................................................................... 13
Printer 40 and 40S Options ............................................................................................... 14
Configuration .......................................................................................................... 14
Print Labels ............................................................................................................. 15
Label Design ........................................................................................................... 16
Graphics Print and View ......................................................................................... 16
Series 40D Options ........................................................................................................... 17
Configuration .......................................................................................................... 17
Print Labels ............................................................................................................. 18
Label Design ........................................................................................................... 19
Graphics Print and View ......................................................................................... 20
Series 40Z, 40ZL2, 40ZL3, and 40ZR3 Options ............................................................... 21
Configuration .......................................................................................................... 21
Print Labels ............................................................................................................. 22
Label Design ........................................................................................................... 23
Graphics Print and View ......................................................................................... 24
Series 41S Options ........................................................................................................... 25
Configuration .......................................................................................................... 25
Print Labels ............................................................................................................. 26
Label Design ........................................................................................................... 27
Graphics Print and View ......................................................................................... 27
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
Index
Printer 50,62-68,90 Options .............................................................................................. 28
Configuration .......................................................................................................... 28
Print Labels ............................................................................................................. 29
Series 71 Options .............................................................................................................. 30
Configuration .......................................................................................................... 30
Print Labels ............................................................................................................. 31
Label Design ........................................................................................................... 32
Graphics Print and View ......................................................................................... 33
Series 72 Options .............................................................................................................. 34
Configuration .......................................................................................................... 34
Print Labels ............................................................................................................. 35
Label Design ........................................................................................................... 36
Graphics Print and View ......................................................................................... 37
Series 73 Options .............................................................................................................. 38
Configuration .......................................................................................................... 38
Print Labels ............................................................................................................. 39
Label Design ........................................................................................................... 40
Graphics Print and View ......................................................................................... 41
Printer 74/76 Options ........................................................................................................ 42
Configuration .......................................................................................................... 42
Print Labels ............................................................................................................. 43
Label Design ........................................................................................................... 44
Graphics Print and View ......................................................................................... 45
Series 77 Options .............................................................................................................. 46
Configuration .......................................................................................................... 46
Print Labels ............................................................................................................. 47
Label Design ........................................................................................................... 48
Graphics Print and View ......................................................................................... 49
Printer 81/88 Options ........................................................................................................ 50
Configuration .......................................................................................................... 50
Print Labels ............................................................................................................. 51
Label Design ........................................................................................................... 52
Graphics Print and View ......................................................................................... 53
Printer 82 Options ............................................................................................................. 54
Configuration .......................................................................................................... 54
Print Labels ............................................................................................................. 55
Label Design ........................................................................................................... 56
Graphics Print and View ......................................................................................... 56
Printer 83/89 Options ........................................................................................................ 57
Configuration .......................................................................................................... 57
Print Labels ............................................................................................................. 58
Label Design ........................................................................................................... 59
Graphics Print and View ......................................................................................... 60
Printer 86 Options ............................................................................................................. 61
Configuration .......................................................................................................... 61
Print Labels ............................................................................................................. 62
Label Design ........................................................................................................... 63
Graphics Print and View ......................................................................................... 63
Printer 87 Options ............................................................................................................. 64
Configuration .......................................................................................................... 64
Print Labels ............................................................................................................. 65
Label Design ........................................................................................................... 66
Graphics Print and View ......................................................................................... 67
Printer 91 Options ............................................................................................................. 68
Configuration .......................................................................................................... 68
Print Labels ............................................................................................................. 69
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
Index
Label Design ........................................................................................................... 70
Graphics Print and View ......................................................................................... 71
Series 93 Options .............................................................................................................. 72
Configuration .......................................................................................................... 72
Print Labels ............................................................................................................. 73
Label Design ........................................................................................................... 74
Graphics Print and View ......................................................................................... 75
Printer 94 Options ............................................................................................................. 76
Configuration .......................................................................................................... 76
Print Labels ............................................................................................................. 77
Label Design ........................................................................................................... 78
Graphics Print and View ......................................................................................... 80
Series 96 Options .............................................................................................................. 81
Configuration .......................................................................................................... 81
Print Labels ............................................................................................................. 82
Label Design ........................................................................................................... 83
Graphics Print and View ......................................................................................... 84
International Character Support________________________E-1
Additional Notes ...................................................................................................... 2
Application Designer_________________________________F-1
Using Application Designer ............................................................................................... 1
Application Designer Syntax ................................................................................... 2
Performance Notes ................................................................................................. 2
Application Designer Syntax ............................................................................................. 3
Application Designer Commands ...................................................................................... 4
Advanced Commands ....................................................................................................... 11
Creation Commands ......................................................................................................... 17
Assignment Statement ...................................................................................................... 20
Goto and Conditional Goto Commands ............................................................................ 21
String Commands ............................................................................................................. 22
Math Commands ............................................................................................................... 23
Screen I/O Commands ...................................................................................................... 24
File I/O Commands ........................................................................................................... 29
Port I/O Commands .......................................................................................................... 31
DataBase I/O Commands ................................................................................................. 32
Misc Commands ............................................................................................................... 34
Sample File ....................................................................................................................... 35
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
Introduction
Introduction
This guide explains how to use Legi for Windows. Legi for
Windows is a label design and printing program that allows you to
create custom labels that incorporate graphics, barcodes, and
database information. The user's guide is divided into the following sections:
Overview
Chapter 1, Introduction
Covers introductory material on Legi. Read this chapter to
understand the best way to use this guide.
Chapter 2, Getting Started
Covers basic information you need to use Legi for Windows,
including hardware and software requirements and the
installation process. Explains how to navigate through the
windows and sign on and off. Read this chapter if you are new
to Legi for Windows or the Windows operating system.
Chapter 3, Using the
Database Maintenance
Module
Explains how to create new tables and modify existing tables.
Using the Database Maintenance option, you can also import
and export data so that information entered in another
application can be used with Legi.
Chapter 4, Printing Labels
Use this module to print labels and create label print jobs. Legi
allows you to set the specifications for a label print job and save
the print job, including operator data and queries.
Chapter 5, Designing
Labels
Explains how to create labels. You can add text, barcodes,
graphics, lines, and boxes to a label design, as well as link a
label field to a field in a database table.
Chapter 6, Setting up
Security
This option allows you to configure the security options and
allow or enable selected functions.
Chapter 7, Viewing and
Printing Graphics
This option allows you to view and print graphics. You can use
this option to check a graphic before printing a label.
Chapter 8, Using Serial
Number Tracking
Explains how to set up and use tracking serial numbers.
Chapter 9, Using the Audit
Trail
The Audit Trail option tracks printing information in three
database tables. This chapter explains how to use the label
stock tracking table, the system print log table, and label print
log tables.
Chapter 10, Configuring
Legi
Explains how to customize Legi options, including printer
setup, enabling audit trail options, setting default directories,
and customizing Legi through using a language table.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
1-1
Introduction
Appendices

This user guide includes the following appendices:

Appendix A explains how to perform network and turnkey
installations.

Appendix B lists a glossary of terms to aid in using this
manual.

Appendix C lists printer fonts.

Appendix D lists printer barcodes supported by Legi.

Appendix E gives brief usage examples of the data
expression functions.

Appendix F lists printer specific functions.

Appendix G describes how to use code page 850 and
international characters.

Appendix H explains how to use Batch Control.
NOTE: This guide assumes that you have a basic understanding of the Windows operating
system. If you are new to Windows, consult your Windows documentation or use the
Windows Tutorial, selected from the Windows Help menu.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
1-2
Introduction
Understanding Legi
Legi for Windows allows you to design labels on any PC running Microsoft Windows. You can
then print these labels on industrial grade printers supplied by Weber Marking Systems.
Legi for Windows includes the following features:

Flexible security allows you to select the level of security needed when using Legi for
Windows. Use the most basic user sign-on system, or incorporate passwords with the user
name. If necessary, create function and data security user groups to control which Legi
features the members of a group can access.

Configure Legi so that it can be used with other languages, and select the type of audit trail
options you will use.

Use the Database Maintenance module to create and update database tables. You can use
database tables to have variable data when printing labels.

Create label formats that incorporate a variety of barcodes, graphics, constant data, the date
and time, lines, and boxes. You can also link label fields to a database table and create
print queries that limit the labels printed to the records that match the query. You can print
label fields in four different orientations, and create reverse print fields (white letters on a
black background).

Create and save print jobs for future use.

Use Print Manager to manage print jobs that are stored in the print queue, including
changing the print order, deleting jobs, pausing jobs, and restarting jobs.

Use the Label Print Log feature to create records of print jobs that capture the data from
any of the label fields you specify.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
1-3
Introduction
Customer Support
Technical support representatives are available 8:00 AM to 4:30 PM Monday through Friday by
dialing (847) 364-8500, extension 773. If the problem is hardware related, dial (847) 364-8500,
extension 776.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
1-4
Introduction
Conventions Used in This Manual
Following is a brief list of the conventions used in this manual:

A pointing hand symbol indicates special notes and warnings:
NOTE: This is a special note.
 Keys that you must press to operate the program appear in a special boxed font:
Press (Enter) to continue.
 Procedures to follow are in bold, numbered paragraphs:
1.

To display the Database Maintenance option, select the Database icon.
Fields names appear in italics:
In the Destination Table selection display, the system displays the name of the selected
table.
Italic text is also used for special emphasis.
However, buttons that you click to perform actions, such as saving, printing, or canceling,
are in bold text:
To discard the changes, click the Cancel button.

References to other section names appear in bold text:
For more information, see Chapter 5, Designing Labels.

The procedures include instructions on using both the mouse and the keyboard. These
instructions are denoted by the following symbols:



Where you see this symbol, the instructions that follow are for the mouse.
Where you see this symbol, the instructions that follow are for the keyboard.
Messages that appears on screen appear in a bold Helvetica typeface:
If Legi does not find the field, it displays the message: Record was not found. Press
Enter or click OK to continue.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
1-5
Introduction
This page intentionally left blank.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
1-6
Getting Started
2
1Getting
Started
This chapter covers the hardware and software requirements
needed to run Legi for Windows, and explains how to install the
program. It also explains how to navigate windows, as well as how
to sign on and off the application and exit the system.
Overview
Minimum System Requirements

Intel 486-based PC or higher

10 MB of hard drive space

8 MB of RAM

VGA or higher video support

Pointing device, i.e., a mouse or trackball

Windows version 3.1 or Windows 95
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
2-1
Getting Started
Installing Legi for Windows
To install Legi for Windows, use the following procedure. For more information on installing
Legi for Windows on a network and on a turnkey installation, see Appendix A.
1.
Insert diskette 1 into the A or B drive of your PC.
2.
From the Windows Program Manager, select Run from the File Menu.
Windows displays the Run dialog box.
3.
In the Command Line text box, type a:setup (or b:setup if you are using the B drive), and
press (§Enter).
The Legi for Windows Installation program begins and displays the following message:
This program will install all Legi for Windows files on to your hard disk.
4.
To continue installing Legi, select the Continue button.
To exit, select the Exit button. For online help about the installation, select the Help
button.
After you select Continue, Legi displays the Get Paths for Installation dialog box. You
can change these defaults:
Standalone
Select standalone if you are going to use Legi on a single,
standalone computer.
Network
Select network if you plan to run Legi for Windows from a
local area network and are setting up the network server.
Workstation
Select workstation if you are planning to run from a network
and are setting up a computer that will be connected to the
network.
Executables
The path for Legi executables (program files). The default is
C:\LEGIWIN. If you change this path, you may also want to
change the System Data Path to be a subdirectory of the Legi
path you specify here.
System Data Path
The path for configuration information. Even if you are
running Legi on a network, you may want to make this path a
local path so that Legi can be configured for each individual
workstation. The default is C:\LEGIWIN\DATA.
Network Data Path
If you are running Legi on a network, this is the location for
shared network files, including audit trail files and security
files. Type the location in this text box. In a standalone
installation, this path is usually the same as the System Data
Path.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
2-2
Getting Started
Legi Workstation Directory The base directory to use for Legi data files and
subdirectories. The installation program uses this entry to
create default directories for database tables, labels and
graphics. On a standalone installation, this entry is not needed
because the install program uses the path entered for
executables. This entry also is not needed for a network
installation because the network server, not the workstation, is
being configured.
5.
Once you have entered the correct paths, select the Continue button.
The system begins copying the files.
6.
When prompted to do so, insert diskette 2 into the appropriate drive and press (§Enter).
7.
When prompted to do so, insert diskette 3 into the appropriate drive and press (§Enter).
The system finishes copying the files.
After all files have been copied, the system create a Legi for Windows program group and
installs the appropriate icons.
If the DOS program SHARE was not detected in either the AUTOEXEC.BAT or
CONFIG.SYS files, Legi displays the following message: Share.exe was added to the
config.sys file. SHARE is required for Legi. If you receive this message, before
attempting to use Legi, exit Windows and reboot your PC.
If the installation is successful, Legi then displays the following message: Installation
successful! It may also display any additional notes about the installation.
8.
To end the installation program, press (§Enter) or click OK.
9.
If Legi modified the config.sys file to add the DOS program SHARE, exit Windows and
reboot your PC before attempting to use Legi for Windows.
When signing on to Legi for the first time, the default user name is weber and the default
password is legi.

NOTE: Once you assign the correct user names and passwords, you should remove
the weber/legi user name and password for security reasons. For information on
assigning and removing user names and passwords, see Chapter 6, Setting Up
Security.
Network Consideration: To install Legi for Windows on a network, you must run setup
more than once. First, copy all necessary files to the network server by running setup and
selecting Network. Second, configure each computer connected to the server by running
Setup with Workstation selected on every computer that will be connected to the network.
Refer to Appendix A for details.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
2-3
Getting Started
Navigating Legi
This section describes how to move around the windows in Legi, both with the mouse
and the keyboard.
Using the Keyboard
This section explains how to use the keyboard to move around the windows.

To move between window elements, including fields, radio buttons, and list
windows, press (¿Tab).

To move between items in a list, use the arrow keys.

To access the pull down menu bar, press (Alt). To move between the menus, press (¡)
or (¢).
To display a pull down menu and highlight different options, press (£) or (¥). To
access a menu directly, hold (Alt) and press the underlined letter. To access a menu
item, press the underlined letter.

To select a button, press (¿Tab) to move the cursor to the button, then press the
spacebar.

List boxes have an underlined down arrow symbol. To display the list, move the
cursor to the window and press (¥):

To move directly to any element in a window, hold (Alt) and press the underlined
letter.
Using the Mouse
This section describes some quick ways to move around windows using the mouse. All
Legi options use the left mouse button.

To display a pull-down menu, click on the menu name. To select an option, click on
the option name.

To select a button, click the button.

List windows have an underlined down arrow symbol. To display the list, click the
mouse anywhere in the field.

To quickly select an item from a list and close the window, select the item and
double-click quickly with the mouse.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
2-4
Getting Started
Using the Online Help Feature
In addition to this user guide, Legi for Windows also incorporates an online help feature to help
you find the information you need. Following is a brief description of the features that the online
help incorporates.
To see an overview of the help system, from any online help window, select the Contents button.
This window lists all the major areas of the online help system, broken down into overview,
procedural, and reference information. Each area is further organized by each Legi for Windows
module.
To search for a specific topic, select the Search button. The search feature allows you to type in
a topic for which you need help, and will display a list of the related online help windows.
Text that appears underlined in green type is a link to another topic. Notice that the mouse arrow

changes to a pointing hand ( ) when you move it to the link. To display the linked help topic,
click on the text in green. To return to the original help topic, select the Back button. You can
also press (¿Tab) to move to that topic, then press (§Enter).
Text that appears in green text with dashes beneath it is a pop-up glossary entry. To display the
glossary entry, click once on the entry. The definition appears as a pop-up window. Click once
again to return to the original topic.
To scroll through one help topic, use the (PgUp) and (PgDn) keys.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
2-5
Getting Started
Signing On and Off
This section explains how to sign on and sign off of Legi and how to exit Legi.
Signing On
To sign on to Legi, complete the following procedure.
1.
From Windows, select the Legi icon.
The system displays the Legi Sign On window.
Sign On Window
2.
In the Name field, type your assigned user name and press (¿Tab).
When signing on to Legi for the first time, the default user name is weber.
3.
In the Password field, if a password has been assigned to you, type it in this field
and press (¿Tab).
When signing on to Legi for the first time, the default password is legi.
As you type, the system only displays asterisks for security reasons.
4.
Select the Sign-on button and press the spacebar or click it with the mouse.
The system displays the Main Menu.
Signing Off
To sign off from Legi, complete the following procedure.
1.
From the Main Menu, select Sign Off.
The system displays the Sign On window.
2.
To close Legi, select Exit from the File Menu.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
2-6
Getting Started
Closing Legi
To close Legi, complete the following procedure:
1.
From the Main Menu, select Exit.
The system returns to the previously active window.
If any Legi modules were active, it will close them automatically. If you have not
yet saved your work in any of the modules, it will first ask whether you want to save
the changes.
If you select Yes, the system saves the changes and closes Legi.
If you select No, the system loses the changes and closes Legi.
If you select Cancel, the system remains in Legi and displays the following error
message: Close active Legi applications before exiting.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
2-7
Getting Started
Using the Main Menu
After signing on to Legi, the system displays the Main Menu:
Main Menu
To select a module to use, click on the selected icon. The system displays the option you
selected.
To use the keyboard, press (¿Tab) to move the cursor to the selected option, then press the
spacebar.
To select a module using the menus, press (Alt)-(A). The system displays the Applications menu
options. Highlight the selected module and press (§Enter).
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
2-8
Getting Started
Using the Legi for Windows Toolbar
To use the Legi for Windows toolbar instead of the Legi for Windows main menu, use the
following procedure.
1.
From the Legi for Windows program group, double-click the Legi for Windows Toolbar
icon. The system displays the following window:
2.
In the User Name field, type your assigned user name and press (¿Tab).
When signing on to Legi for the first time, the default user name is weber.
3.
In the Password field, if a password has been assigned to you, type it in this field and press
(§Enter) or click
.
When signing on to Legi for the first time, the default password is legi.
As you type, the system only displays asterisks for security reasons.
The system displays the Main Menu.
To move to the different Legi for Windows modules, click the appropriate tabs. When you
click on each tab, the system displays the icons for the different module options. When you
move the mouse cursor over the icon, the system displays the name of the option.
Following is a brief list of the icons available:
Click to display the Legi sign-in window.
Exit Legi for Windows.
Legi Tab:
Displays the following Legi options icons:
Print Labels
Label Design
Database
Graphics
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
2-9
Getting Started
Print Manager
Security Tab:
Displays the following security options:
User Security
Group Security
Data Security
Security Options
Audit Trail Tab:
Displays the following audit trail options:
Serial Number Tracking
Label Stock
System Print Log
Label Print Log
Configuration Tab:
Displays the following configuration options:
Configure Directories
Configure Options
Configure Printers
Configure Languages
Configure Custom Fonts
Configure Font Cartridges
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
2-10
Getting Started
Configure Remote Input
Help Tab:
Displays the following help options:
Overview of Legi for Windows
Tasks within Legi for Windows
How to use Help
About box for Legi for Windows
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
2-11
Getting Started
This page intentionally left blank.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
2-12
Using the Database Maintenance Module
3
2Using the
Database
Maintenance Module
This chapter explains how to use the Database Maintenance module.
This option allows you to create and edit tables, as well as import and
export comma delimited ASCII files.
The tables in Database Maintenance are primarily used in conjunction with label design
and label printing. The fields in a table can be linked to a label, then, when the label is
printed, the data in that field will appear on the label. For more information on adding a
text field linked to a database table, see Adding Text in Chapter 5, Designing Labels.
This chapter first explains basic terms and concepts used in working with database tables
(page 3). It also covers the following topics, listed under the menu from which they are
accessed:
File Menu
Overview

Create database tables (page 6). Specify the column headings and type of data for each
column in a new table.

Delete tables (page 21). Remove selected files from the system.

Import data (page 8). Import a comma delimited ASCII file to insert into an existing table.

Export table data (page 22). Export the data in an existing table to a comma delimited
ASCII file.

Print database tables (page 31). Set print options and print database tables.
Edit Menu

Edit database tables (page 12). Insert records anywhere in the table, delete records, and
cut, copy, or paste records.

Search for the complete contents of a cell (page 14).
Options Menu

Sort tables (page 23). Change the order of the data. You can select any field column
heading to sort on.

Merge tables (page 24). Add the data in one table to another table.

Clear all the records in a table (page 15).
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
3-1
Using the Database Maintenance Module

Query tables (page 26). Set up a query for a table. For example, for a customer database,
you may only want to view records with addresses in a certain zip code range. You can
use the query option to set up this type of query.

Modify tables (page 16). Add or remove field column headings, and change the field type.

Set numeric precision (page 28). Indicate the number of decimals to round to.

Size table column widths (page 19). Size column widths manually or have the system
automatically size the columns.

Display the valid field type codes (page 29). When creating a table, this window displays
the codes for the type of data a field can contain.
Tables Menu

Create a new language table (page 30).

Display and edit the language table (page 30).

View and edit the label stock and tracking serial numbers table, and display the system
print log (covered in Chapter 9, Using the Audit Trail).
Window Menu

Arrange the windows as desired. For information on working with windows, see Chapter
2, Getting Started.
Help Menu

View the online help information. For information on working with help windows, see
Chapter 2, Getting Started.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
3-2
Using the Database Maintenance Module
Understanding Database Tables
This section briefly lists database reference information. The Legi Database Maintenance module
uses the Paradox Engine, so these terms and concepts are consistent with Paradox usage.
Terms
Following is a brief list of the terms used in this chapter and the rest of this guide.
Database
An organized list of related information.
Record
A horizontal row in a table containing data about an individual
object, such as a person (for an employee database) or a product (for
a product database). Each row is a record.
Field
A vertical column in a table is a field. A field contains one category
of information for the records in a table. For example, in a products
database, the product ID field would list the IDs for all of the
products in the table.
Field Type
When a field is defined, it is given a field type code. This code
specifies the type of data that can be entered for the field. Database
Maintenance allows the following field types:
An
Alphanumeric. The field accepts both letters and numbers.
The n indicates the field length. For example, A5 indicates
an alphanumeric field with up to five characters.
N
Numeric. The field will only accept numbers.
S
Short. The field will accept only whole numbers between
-32,767 and 32,767 (inclusive).
$
Currency. The field will accept only dollar amounts. For
example, if you type 20 in a field coded with the $ field type,
the system converts it to 20.00.
D
Dates. The field will only accept dates formatted according
to the Windows settings.
Cell
An intersection of a record and a field. A cell contains data for one
record in one category of information. A record will contain as
many cells as there are fields in the column.
Field Value
The contents of a single cell.
Table Limits
Each record can contain a maximum of 255 fields. The maximum record size in bytes is:
Keyed Table:
1350
Unkeyed Table:
4000
Maximum table size:
256 MB
Database Maintenance does not have a limit on the number of records in a table.
Key Fields/Keyed Tables
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
3-3
Using the Database Maintenance Module
An unkeyed table has no key fields. The records in an unkeyed table are listed in the order
they were entered or sorted. To find a record in this table, you would have to search
through the entire table because the records may not occur in any specific order.
A keyed table has at least one key field. A key field is a field in a table that the system
uses to automatically sort the table. You can have more than one key field, but the key
fields must occur in order in the table. Any additional fields you wish to make part of the
key must immediately follow the first field. The first keyed field must be the first field in
the table (column 1), and is considered the primary index. Because the key field is used for
sorting, individual records cannot contain duplicate key field data.
For example, suppose you have an employee database. This database lists the employees'
social security numbers, last names, job titles, and addresses. Because no employee should
have a duplicate social security number, you designate the social security number as a key
field. Designating this key field has the following consequences:

The table will be listed in order by social security number. If you add new records
to the end of the file, when you save the file, the system places the records in order
by social security number.

If you attempt to enter an identical social security number in the table, when you
save the file, the system will delete the old entry from the table and keep the new
entry. It assumes you are updating the old entry.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
3-4
Using the Database Maintenance Module
Using the Database Maintenance Window
To enter the Database Maintenance module, select the Database icon on the Legi Main
Menu. The system displays the Database Maintenance window. The following example
window shows the Database Maintenance window with a Products database table open.
The Database Maintenance window has the following elements:
Database Maintenance Window

Menu Bar
Use the Menu Bar to access the drop down menus. For example, to open a table, select the
File menu, then select Open. The system displays a list of existing database tables.

Button Bar
The Button Bar allows you to access the most commonly used menu commands with the
click of a mouse. For example, to open a database table, click the Open button.

Edit Line
When a table is open, the Edit Line displays the data in the cell currently selected. Use this
line to edit the data for a cell. To edit data, highlight the cell and press (§Enter), or click the
mouse anywhere in the Edit Line. In the above example, Diamond-filled bathtub is
displayed in the Edit Line.

Table Window
The table window displays the tables currently open. The records in the table are
numbered in the far left column. In the example window, the Products database table is
displayed in the Table window.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
3-5
Using the Database Maintenance Module
Creating Database Tables
The Create Table option allows you to specify the field headings and the type of data for each
field on the new table. To create a new database table format, use the following procedure.
1.
From the File Menu, select Create Table.
The system displays the Create Database Table window.
Create Database Table window with Valid Field Types window displayed
2.
In the Field Name column, to enter the field name, press (§Enter) or click on the Edit Line
beneath the row of buttons.
3.
Type the field name and press (Tab¿).
If you press (Tab¿), the cursor remains in the Edit Line so you can continue to enter field
names and field types. If you press (§Enter), the cursor moves back to the Create Database
Table window.
4.
In the Field Type column, enter the code for the type of data this column will accept.
This field is not case sensitive. Use the following codes:
An
Alphanumeric. The field accepts both letters and numbers. The n indicates the field
length. For example, type A5 to indicate an alphanumeric field with up to five
characters.
N
Numeric. The field will only accept numbers.
S
Short. The field will only accept numbers without decimal digits between -32,767
and 32,767 (inclusive).
$
Currency. The field will only accept dollar amounts. For example, if you type 20 in
a field coded with the $ field type, the system converts it to 20.00.
D
Dates. The field will only accept dates formatted according to the Windows
settings.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
3-6
Using the Database Maintenance Module

5.
NOTE: To view the list of valid field type codes, on the Options menu, select Show
Valid Field Types. The system displays the Valid Field Types window, listing each
field type and its definition. You can move this window to the side and continue to
display it while creating the table. To close the window, re-select Show Valid Field
Types from the Options menu.
To designate a key field, type an asterisk following the field type code.
For example, if a numeric field will be a key field, type N* in the Edit Line. For a
discussion of key fields, see Understanding Database Tables, page 3.
6.
After entering the field type, while in the Edit Line, press (Tab¿) to create the next row.
To add a row while in the Create Database Table window, press (¥). The numbers of rows
added here will be the number of columns in the table.
7.
Enter as many field names and types as necessary for the table.
8.
To create the table, select Proceed from the Options menu or click the Proceed button.
If you close the Create Database Table window without first selecting Proceed, the system
displays a warning message that you will lose all information entered.

NOTE: If any blank rows exist, the system cannot create the table. To delete a row,
move the cursor to that row and on the Edit menu, select Delete Record or press (Alt)(Delete).
The system displays the table with the headings you created.
9.
To save the table, select Save from the File Menu or click the Save button.
The system displays the Table Save As dialog box.
10.
In the Drives drop-down list box, select the drive where you want to save the file.
11.
In the Directories list box, use the scroll bar to scroll through the available directories on
the selected drive. Select the appropriate directory.
The default is the Database directory.
12.
In the Table Name text box, enter the file name and press (§Enter) or click OK.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
3-7
Using the Database Maintenance Module
Importing Data
The Import Data feature allows you to import data in a comma delimited ASCII file to a database
table. This feature allows you to perform three different types of imports:

Importing into a selected table.
The selected table's structure must match the format of the imported data. For example, if
the first field is specified as a Date field and the first field in the import file contains
alphanumeric data, then Legi cannot import into the specified table.

Importing into an answer table.
If the imported data does not have to be merged with any other data, use the answer table
option. You can then save the table under another name.

Importing using an existing table structure.
This option imports the data into an answer table, but uses the structure of the specified
table. The table whose structure is being used must match the format of the imported data.
For example, if the first field is specified as a Date field and the first field in the import file
contains alphanumeric data, then Legi cannot use the specified table structure.
To import data into Database Maintenance, use the following procedures. First, complete the
following procedure, Selecting the Import File. Then, follow one of the procedures to select the
import destination:

Importing into a Selected Table (page 9)

Importing into an Answer Table (page 10)

Importing Using an Existing Table Structure (page 11)
Selecting the Import File
To select the file to import, use the following procedure. You can only import files in a
comma delimited ASCII format.
1.
From the File Menu, select Import or click the Import button.
The system displays the File Select dialog box. Use this dialog box to select the
ASCII file to import. Only files with an extension of .CSV are shown.
2.
In the Drives drop-down list box, select the drive where the file is located.
3.
In the Directories list box, use the scroll bar to scroll through the available
directories on the selected drive. Select the appropriate directory.
4.
To select the file to import, scroll through the list of files and highlight the file to
import.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
3-8
Using the Database Maintenance Module
5.
To import the selected file, click OK or press (§Enter). To cancel the import, click
Cancel or press (Esc).
When you press (§Enter), the system displays the Import dialog box.
Import Dialog Box
From this point, you can import into one of three destinations. Complete one of the
following three procedures.
Importing Into a Selected Table
When importing into a selected table, the selected table's structure must match the format
of the imported data. For example, if the first field is specified as a Date field and the first
field in the import file contains alphanumeric data, then the system cannot import into the
specified table.
1.
In the Import Into group box, select the Selected Table option button.
2.
To select the file, select the Choose Table button.
The system displays the Table Select dialog box.
2.
In the Drives drop-down list box, select the drive where the file is located.
3.
In the Directories list box, use the scroll bar to scroll through the available
directories on the selected drive. Select the appropriate directory.
4.
To select the destination file, scroll through the list of files and highlight the
appropriate file.
The only type of file to select as the destination is a database table (.DB extension).
5.
To select the file, click OK or press (§Enter). To cancel the selection, click Cancel
or press (Esc).
When you press (§Enter), the system returns to the Import dialog box. The file name
selected is displayed in the Destination table selection display.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
3-9
Using the Database Maintenance Module
6.
7.
In the Records group box, select one of the following options to indicate how to
handle the imported data in relation to the existing data:
Add
Add the records to the end of the existing file.
Replace
For keyed tables only. The system only replaces where the
keyed data is the same for the existing table and the imported
record.
Delete when blank
For keyed tables only. If a record(s) in the file being
imported has blank fields except for the keyed field(s), and
that key data matches the key data of a record in the
destination table, the system will delete the record.
Clear table first
Use this option when selecting Add. Clears all the existing
records in the fields, then imports the selected data.
To import the table, click OK or press (Alt)-(O). To not import, click Cancel or press
(Esc).
The system automatically saves the destination table.
Importing Into an Answer Table
To import the data into an answer table, use the following procedure. Use this procedure if
you are using the structure of the imported table and are not merging it with other tables.
The resulting table will only contain fields with a Numeric type (N) and/or Alphanumeric
(A), depending on the data being imported.
1.
In the Import Into group box, select the Answer Table option button.
2.
To import the table, click OK or press (Alt)-(O). To cancel importing, click Cancel
or press (Esc).
When you press (§Enter), the system displays the Answer table with the imported data
in it.
3.
To save the imported table, select Save from the File Menu or select the Save button.
The system displays the Table Save As dialog box.
4.
In the Drives drop-down list box, select the drive where you want to save the file.
5.
In the Directories list box, use the scroll bar to scroll through the available
directories on the selected drive. Select the appropriate directory.
The default is the Database directory.
6.
In the Table Name text box, enter the file name and press (§Enter) or click OK.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
3-10
Using the Database Maintenance Module
Importing Using an Existing Table Structure
When using an existing table structure, the import process does not affect the table whose
structure is being used. This option allows you to use another table's structure so you do
not have to re-create the structure for the imported data.
The table structure specified must match the format of the imported data. For example, if
the first field is specified as a Date field and the first field in the import file contains
alphanumeric data, then the system cannot use the specified table structure.
1.
In the Import Into group box, select the Answer - Specify Table option button.
2.
To select the table whose structure you want to use, select the Choose Table button.
The system displays the Table Select dialog box.
3.
In the Drives drop-down list box, select the drive where the file is located.
4.
In the Directories list box, use the scroll bar to scroll through the available
directories on the selected drive. Select the appropriate directory.
5.
To select the table, scroll through the list of files and highlight the appropriate file.
The only type of file available to select is a database table (.DB extension).
6.
To select the file, click OK or press (§Enter). To cancel the selection, click Cancel
or press (Esc).
When you press (§Enter), the system returns to the Import dialog box. The file name
selected is displayed in the Table structure to use field.
7.
To import the table, click OK or press (Alt)-(O). To not import, click Cancel or press
(Esc).
When you press (§Enter), the system displays the Answer table with the imported data
in it.
8.
To save the imported table, select Save from the File Menu or click the Save button.
The system displays the Table Save As dialog box.
9.
In the Drives drop-down list box, select the drive where you want to save the file.
10.
In the Directories list box, use the scroll bar to scroll through the available
directories on the selected drive. Select the appropriate directory.
The default is the Database directory.
11.
In the Table Name text box, enter the file name and press (§Enter) or click OK.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
3-11
Using the Database Maintenance Module
Editing a Database Table
Once a database table is open, you can make changes to any of the records. Database
Maintenance incorporates table editing features so you can move and delete records, and search
for specific field data. This section explains how to open a table, and covers the table editing
features you can use.
Opening a Database Table
You can have multiple database tables open. To open a database table, use the following
procedure.
1.
From the File Menu, select Open or click the Open button.
The system displays the Table Open dialog box.
2.
In the Drives drop-down list box, select the drive where the file is located.
3.
In the Directories list box, use the scroll bar to scroll through the available
directories on the selected drive. Select the appropriate directory.
4.
To select the table, scroll through the list of files and highlight the appropriate file.
The only type of file you can select is a database table (.DB extension).
5.
To select the file, click OK or press (§Enter). To cancel the selection, click Cancel
or press (Esc).
The system opens the table window with the selected table displayed.
Modifying Field Data
To change the data in a cell, use the following procedure.
1.
To edit the data in a cell, use the Edit Line. As you move the cursor through the
table, the data in the current cell is displayed on the Edit Line. To move the cursor
to the Edit Line, press (§Enter) or click anywhere in the Edit Line.
If you press (§Enter), note that the field value is highlighted on the Edit Line.
2.
To delete the field value and insert new data, begin typing. If you want to edit the
data, press any of the arrow keys to remove the highlight. Make any necessary
changes to the data.
The data entered must match the field type definition for that field. For example, if
a field is coded to accept only dates, then you must enter the data in date format.
The fields types are defined when the field is created.
3.
To save the changes to the cell and return to the table window, press (§Enter). To
save changes and edit the next cell, press (Tab¿). If you click the mouse in the table
before pressing (§Enter) or (Tab¿), you will lose your changes.
If you press (Esc), you will also lose your changes.
4.
To enter a new record at the end of the table, press the down arrow key anywhere in
the final record.
The system adds a blank record to the end of the table.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
3-12
Using the Database Maintenance Module
5.
Enter data for each new record in the Edit Line, observing the field type definition
for each field.
6.
To save the changes, select Save on the File Menu or click the Save button.
Inserting a Record
To insert a record anywhere in the table, use the following procedure.
1.
In the table, move the cursor to the record above which you want to insert a new
record.
2.
From the Edit Menu, select Insert Record or press (Alt)-(Insert).
The system inserts a blank record in the table. You can now add data to this record
using the procedure described in the previous procedure, Modifying Fields.
3.
To save the changes, select Save on the File Menu or click the Save button.
Deleting a Record
To delete a record from a database table, use the following procedure.
1.
In the table, move the cursor to the record you want to delete.
2.
From the Edit Menu, select Delete Record or press (Alt)-(Delete).
The system removes the record from the table.
3.
To save the changes, select Save on the File Menu or click the Save button.
Cutting and Pasting a Record
When you cut a record, the system removes the record(s) from the table and temporarily
holds it in the Legi clipboard. You can then copy the records to another part of the table
using the paste feature.

NOTE: You can cut and paste records between tables if the tables have compatible
structures.
1.
In the table, move the cursor to the record to cut.
2.
On the Edit Menu, select Cut Record, or press (Ctrl)-(X).
The system removes the record from the table and copies it to the Legi clipboard.
3.
Move the cursor to the record above which you want to insert the cut record.
4.
On the Edit Menu, select Paste Record, or press (Ctrl)-(V).
The system inserts the record above the cursor. Repeat these steps in as many places
as the record should appear. Remember, if the table has any key fields, the key
fields cannot contain duplicate data.

NOTE: The pasting feature does not overwrite an existing record. It inserts a new
row in the table.
Copying and Pasting a Record
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
3-13
Using the Database Maintenance Module
When you copy a record, it remains in the table and the system holds it temporarily in the
Legi clipboard. You can then copy the record to another part of the table using the paste
feature.

NOTE: You can copy and paste records between tables if the tables have
compatible structures.
1.
In the table, move the cursor to the record you want to copy.
2.
On the Edit Menu, select Copy Record or press (Ctrl)-(C).
3.
Move the cursor to the record above which you want to insert the copied record.
4.
On the Edit Menu, select Paste Record, or press (Ctrl)-(V).
The system inserts the record above the cursor. Repeat these steps in as many places
as the record should appear. Remember, if the table has any key fields, the key
fields cannot contain duplicate data.

NOTE: The pasting feature does not overwrite an existing record. It inserts a new
row in the table.
Searching for a Field Value
For database tables with a large number of records, you can use the Find feature to locate a
record quickly.
1.
From the Edit Menu, select Find.
The system displays the Find dialog box.
Database Maintenance Find Dialog Box
2.
In the Search field list box, use the (£) or (¥) arrow keys to highlight the field in
which you want to search.
For example, to search for a description, select the Description field.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
3-14
Using the Database Maintenance Module
3.
In the Search text field, type the complete field value for which you are searching.
This field is case sensitive. For example, to search for a last name, type the
complete last name, not the first few letters. The system will only find the complete
contents of a cell.

4.
NOTE: If you want to perform searches using one or two letters or with
wildcards, you can perform a query, although it is slower. For information on
queries, see page 26.
Press (§Enter) or click OK.
If the system finds the field value, it moves to that section of the table and highlights
the cell. If it does not find the field value, it displays the message: Record was not
found. Press Enter or click OK to continue.
5.
To find the next match, press (F3) or select Find Next from the Edit Menu.
Clearing All Records
The following procedure describes how to delete all records from a table.
1.
From the Options Menu, select Clear All Records.
The system displays the following prompt: OK to clear name? Name is the name of
the table.
2.
To clear the records, type Y or click Yes. To cancel clearing the records, type N or
click No.
3.
To save the cleared table, select Save from the File Menu or click the Save button.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
3-15
Using the Database Maintenance Module
Restructuring Tables
Once a table is created, you can change the structure of the fields by adding, moving, and deleting
fields using the Restructure option. You can also use this feature to designate a key field, or to
change an existing key field. Because restructuring can cause loss of data, if you are unsure of
the result, it is best first to save the table under a different name as a backup.
NOTE: To display the valid field types and the type of data each accepts, on the Options
menu, select Show Valid Field Types. To close this dialog box, re-select Show Valid Field
Types.
To restructure a table, first select the table to restructure, then complete any of the following
procedures.
Selecting the Table to Restructure
To select the table to restructure, use the following procedure.
1.
From the Options Menu, select Restructure.
The system displays the Table Select dialog box. If a table is active, that table name
will be filled in by default.
2.
In the Drives drop-down list box, select the drive where the file is located.
3.
In the Directories list box, use the scroll bar to scroll through the available
directories on the selected drive. Select the appropriate directory.
4.
To select the table, scroll through the list of files and highlight the appropriate file.
The only type of file you can select is a database table (.DB extension).
5.
To select the file, click OK or press (§Enter). To cancel the selection, click Cancel
or press (Esc).
The system displays the Restructure window with the fields for the selected table.
Restructure Window
Restructure the table using any of the following procedures.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
3-16
Using the Database Maintenance Module
Inserting a Field
To insert a new field in a table, use the following procedure.
1.
To insert a blank line for a new field, move the highlight to the field above which
you want to insert a field.
2.
From the Edit Menu, select Insert Record or press (Alt)-(Insert).
The system inserts a blank line to allow you to enter a new field. For more
information on entering fields, see Creating a Database Table, page 6.
3.
To create the table, continue with Creating the Restructured Table, page 19.
Deleting a Field
To remove a field from the table, use the following procedure. When deleting a field, all
table data in that field will be deleted when the table is created.
1.
To delete a field, move the highlight to the field you want to delete.
2.
From the Edit Menu, select Delete Record or press (Alt)-(Delete).

WARNING: When deleting a field, the data in that field for all records in the
table will be removed once you proceed to restructure the table. You cannot
retrieve the data.
The system deletes the field and its field type.
3.
To create the table, continue with Creating the Restructured Table, page 19.
Moving a Field
To move a field, use the following procedure. If you move a field that is a key field
(designated by an asterisk following the field type), remember that key fields must follow
one another. If the table has only one key field, that field must be the first field in the
table.
1.
Move the highlight to the field you want to move.
2.
From the Edit Menu, select Cut Record or press (Ctrl)-(X).
The system removes the field from the table.
3.
Move the cursor to the location where you want the field to appear.
4.
From the Edit Menu, select Paste Record or press (Ctrl)-(V).
5.
To create the table, continue with Creating the Restructured Table, page 19.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
3-17
Using the Database Maintenance Module
Changing a Field Name
To change a field name, use the following procedure.
1.
Move the highlight to the field name you want to change and press (§Enter) or click
anywhere in the Edit Line.
2.
Change the field name.
3.
To save the change, press (§Enter) or (Tab¿).
Pressing (§Enter) moves the cursor back to the Restructure window. Pressing (Tab¿)
allows you to edit the field type for the field.
4.
To create the table, continue with Creating the Restructured Table, page 19.
Changing the Field Type
In the Field Type column, the system displays the type of data each field can accept. You
can change the field types by designating a key field or changing the field type code.
Designating a Key Field
If the table has more than one key field, the key fields must follow one another. The
first key field must always be in the first column.
1.
To designate a key field, move the highlight to the field type for the field and
press (§Enter) or click anywhere in the Edit Line.
2.
Type an asterisk (*) following the code.
For example, type N*.
3.
To save the entry, press (§Enter) or (Tab¿).
4.
To create the table, continue with Creating the Restructured Table, page 19.

NOTE: When you proceed with the restructure, you may lose data depending
on the key field you selected and the data in the table. For example, if the
table contains records with duplicate entries in the key fields, one of each
duplicate record will automatically be removed from the table without
warning and displayed in a Problem table.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
3-18
Using the Database Maintenance Module
Designating a Different Field Type or Length
To change the field type for a field, use the following procedure. You can also use
this procedure to change the length of an alphanumeric field. If you are working on
a table with existing data, the field type entered must match the type of data already
in the table or you will receive an error message and the table will not be
restructured.
1.
Move the highlight to the field type for the field and press (§Enter) or click
anywhere in the Edit Line.
2.
Type the new field type code using one of the following codes:
An
Alphanumeric. The field can accept both letters and numbers. The n
indicates the field length. For example, type A5 to indicate an
alphanumeric field with up to five characters. If a field is already
alphanumeric, you can change the length by changing the number
following the A code.
N
Numeric. The field will only accept numbers.
S
Short. The field will only accept numbers without decimal digits
between -32,767 and 32,767 (inclusive).
$
Currency. The field will only accept dollar amounts. For example, if
you type 20 in a field coded with the $ field type, the system converts it
to 20.00.
D
Dates. The field will only accept dates formatted according to the
Windows settings.
The N, S, and $ field types can be converted from one to another.
3.
To save the entry, press (§Enter) or (Tab¿).
4.
To create the table, continue with Creating the Restructured Table, page 19.
Creating the Restructured Table
After completing one or more of the procedures described above, you can create the
restructured table.
1.
To create the table, select Proceed on the File Menu or click the Proceed button.
The system displays the following warning: Data could be lost - continue?
This message warns you that restructuring affects the entire table. For example, if
you delete a field, the data in that field for every record will be lost. You cannot
close the table without saving after restructuring, because the table is automatically
saved during the restructure process.
2.
To proceed, press (§Enter) or click Yes. To return to the Restructure window, press
(N) or click No.
The system restructures the table and displays the results. If any errors occur, it
stops processing and returns to the Restructure window.
Sizing Table Columns Widths
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
3-19
Using the Database Maintenance Module
In order to view all of the table data, you may need to size column widths. You can size column
widths manually or allow the system to size them automatically. When you size column widths,
you are sizing them for the current session only. When the table is closed, the column widths
revert to the default width.
Sizing Columns Manually
To size columns to a selected width, use the following procedure.
1.
With the table displayed, to size each column to the width you designate, place the
cursor on the line between two columns.
The cursor arrow changes to a double-headed arrow.
2.
While holding down the left mouse button, move the double-headed arrow in the
appropriate direction to make the column wider or narrower.
Note that as you move the arrow, a dotted line appears to show you the width of the
column.
3.
When you have found the appropriate width, release the mouse button.
The system sizes the column to the selected width.
Automatically Sizing Column Widths
The system can automatically size column widths to display the most data possible. With
the table displayed, on the Options Menu, select Autosize Column Width. The system
automatically sizes each column to accommodate the field with the widest data.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
3-20
Using the Database Maintenance Module
Deleting a Database Table
If a table is no longer necessary, you can delete the database table. To delete a database table, use
the following procedure.
1.
From the File Menu, select Delete.
The system displays the File Select dialog box.
2.
In the Drives drop-down list box, select the drive where the file is located.
3.
In the Directories list box, use the scroll bar to scroll through the available directories on
the selected drive. Select the appropriate directory.
4.
To select the file to delete, scroll through the list of files and highlight the file to delete.
5.
To delete the file, click OK or press (§Enter). To cancel the delete, click Cancel or press
(Esc).
The system deletes the file.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
3-21
Using the Database Maintenance Module
Exporting Data
To export database tables to a comma delimited ASCII file, use the following procedure.
1.
From the File Menu, select Export, or click the Export button.
The system displays the Export dialog box.
Export Dialog Box
2.
To select the source database table to export, select the Choose Source button.
The system displays the Table Select dialog box.

NOTE: If a table is already open, the Source Table field defaults to the file name of
the open table, and does not display the Table Select dialog box.
3.
In the Drives drop-down list box, select the drive where the file is located.
4.
In the Directories list box, use the scroll bar to scroll through the available directories on
the selected drive. Select the appropriate directory.
The default is the Database directory.
5.
Using the Table Name list box, scroll to the database table name and select it.
The only file type available for exporting is database tables (.DB extension).
6.
After selecting the file, click OK or press (§Enter). To cancel selecting a file, click Cancel
or press (Esc).
7.
To select the destination for the exported data, select the Choose Destination button.
The system displays the File Save As dialog box.
8.
In the Drives drop-down list box, select the drive where the file is located.
9.
In the Directories list box, use the scroll bar to scroll through the available directories on
the selected drive. Select the appropriate directory.
The default is the Database directory.
10.
In the File Name field, type the file name or to overwrite an existing file, scroll to the file
name and select it.
The default extension is .CSV.
11.
After selecting the file, click OK or press (§Enter). To cancel selecting a file, click Cancel
or press (Esc).
12.
To export the selected table data to the selected destination file, click OK or press (Alt)-(O).
To cancel the export and close the Export Table dialog box, click Cancel or press (Esc).
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
3-22
Using the Database Maintenance Module
The output file will be placed in the directory and file name you selected.
Sorting a Table
You can sort a table using any field, and the sort can be performed in ascending or descending
order. Because keyed tables are automatically sorted by the system, if you sort a keyed table and
save the sorted table under the same name table name, the table will no longer have any key
fields.
1.
From the Options Menu, select Sort or click the Sort button.
The system displays the Table Select. If a table is already open, the Table Name field
defaults to the name of the open table.
2.
In the Drives drop-down list box, select the drive where the file is located.
3.
In the Directories list box, use the scroll bar to scroll through the available directories on
the selected drive. Select the appropriate directory.
4.
To select the file to sort, scroll through the list of files and highlight the file to delete.
The only file type available for sorting is database tables (.DB extension).
5.
After selecting the file, click OK or press (§Enter). To cancel selecting a file, click Cancel
or press (Esc).
After you press (§Enter), the system displays the Sort dialog box.
Sort Dialog Box
5.
In the Select field list box, highlight the field to sort on.
6.
In the Sort order group box, select the Ascending or Descending option button to indicate
how the data will be sorted.
7.
To sort the records in the table, click OK or press (Alt)-(O). To cancel the sort, click Cancel
or press (Esc).
The system displays the newly sorted table in an Answer table.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
3-23
Using the Database Maintenance Module
8.
Complete one of the following steps:
A.
To save the sorted file and overwrite the existing file, select the Save button. In the
Table Name text box, type the old file name and press (§Enter) or click OK.
B.
To save the table with a new name, select the Save button. In the Table Name text
box, type the new file name and press (§Enter) or click OK.
The default file extension is .DB.
Merging Two Tables
The Merge feature allows you to add the data in one table to another table. The tables must have
the same structure or you cannot merge them. To merge tables, use the following procedure.
1.
From the File menu, select Merge.
The system displays the Merge dialog box.
Merge Dialog Box
2.
3.
In the Records group box, select how the records in the source table will affect the records
in the destination table:
Add
Add the records to the end of the destination file.
Replace
For keyed tables only, the system replaces any records with duplicate
entries in the key fields in the destination table with the source
record.
Delete when blank
For keyed tables only, if a record(s) in the source table has blank
fields except for the keyed field(s), and that key field data matches
key field data in the destination table, the system will delete that
record.
Clear table first
Clears all the existing records in the destination table, then if Add is
also selected, adds the data from the source table.
To select the source table from which records will be imported, select the Choose Source
button.
The system displays the Table Select dialog box.
4.
In the Drives drop-down list box, select the drive where the file is located.
5.
In the Directories list box, use the scroll bar to scroll through the available directories on
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
3-24
Using the Database Maintenance Module
the selected drive. Select the appropriate directory.
6.
Using the Table Name list box, scroll to the database table name and select it.
The only file type available for merging is database tables (.DB extension).
7.
After selecting the file, click OK or press (§Enter). To cancel selecting a file, click Cancel
or press (Esc).
The system returns to the Merge dialog box with the selected file displayed in the Source
Table selection display.
8.
To select the destination table where the merged data will appear, select the Choose
Destination button.
9.
Repeat steps 4 - 7 to select the destination table.
10.
To merge the tables, click OK or press (Alt)-(O). To cancel the merge, click Cancel or press
(Esc).
The system displays the destination table with the source table data merged into it.
11.
Complete one of the following steps:
A.
To save the merged file and overwrite the existing file, select the Save button.
B.
To save the table with a new name, select Save As from the File Menu. In the Table
Name field, type the new file name.
The default file extension is .DB.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
3-25
Using the Database Maintenance Module
Performing Queries
Use queries to create a subset of the records in a table based on limits and conditions that you
specify. You create the conditions using operators. Operators are the symbols used to indicate
limits and conditions.
For example, suppose you have a customer database listing the customer ID numbers and
addresses. You need to create a subset of this general database with customer ID numbers that
are less than 500 and whose zip codes are in the 60000 range. You can create a query looking for
records that match these conditions, then save the results in a separate table.
To create a query, use the following procedure.
1.
From the Options Menu, select Query.
The system displays the Table Select dialog box.
2.
In the Drives drop-down list box, select the drive where the file is located.
3.
In the Directories list box, use the scroll bar to scroll through the available directories on
the selected drive. Select the appropriate directory.
4.
Using the Table Name list box, scroll to the database table name and select it.
The only file type available for queries is database tables (.DB extension). If a table is
open, this field defaults to the file name of the open table.
5.
After selecting the file, click OK or press (§Enter). To cancel selecting a file, click Cancel
or press (Esc).
The system displays the Query window with the field names from the selected file
displayed.
Database Maintenance with Query Window Displayed
6.
To enter queries, use the Edit Line. As you move the cursor through the Query columns,
the data in the current cell is displayed on the Edit Line. To move the cursor to the Edit
Line, press (§Enter) or click anywhere in the Edit Line.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
3-26
Using the Database Maintenance Module
In the above sample window, note that the query <500 is listed in the Edit Line. Enter the
queries using the following operators:
=
Equal to
>
Greater than
<
Less than
>=
Greater than or equal to
<=
Less than or equal to
..
Any number of characters, including blank spaces
@
Any single character
NOT
Does not match
BLANK No value
OR
Either condition can be true
,
And (both conditions must be true)

NOTE: Remember that if you enter commas between queries Legi will interpret the
commas as an AND condition.
Queries entered for different fields in the same column have an "and" relationship. Queries
entered across columns, whether for the same field or others, have an "or" relationship.
In the previous example window displayed, because the Cust ID query and the ZIP query
are in the same column, the system will only find records that meet both conditions. If one
of the queries was in the column Query 2, then Legi would find records that meet either
condition.
7.
To save the query entered in the Edit Line, press (§Enter).
If you click the mouse in the table before pressing (§Enter) or (Tab¿), the system does not
save the query.
8.
To select the fields that will be displayed in the answer, use the * column. Pressing (§Enter)
or double-clicking in this column toggles between included and not included.
An * indicates that a field will be included. The default is to include all fields.
9.
After entering the queries, select Proceed on the Options Menu or click the Proceed
button.
The system displays the results in an Answer table.
11.
To save the table, select Save from the File Menu or click the Save button.
12.
In the Table Name field, type the new file name and press (§Enter).
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
3-27
Using the Database Maintenance Module
Setting Numeric Precision
The Set Numeric Precision option allows you to specify the number of decimal places to show in
numbers. The numeric precision setting defaults to the International Setting for Numbers format
(in the Windows Control Panel). To change this setting, use the following procedure.
1.
From the Options Menu, select Set Numeric Precision.
The system displays the Set Numeric Precision dialog box.
Set Numeric Precision Dialog Box
2.
Enter the number of decimal places to show.
Enter any number from 0 to 15. The default is 2.

3.
NOTE: Although Database Maintenance can store more than 15 decimal places,
only the first 15 numbers will be considered significant digits.
To save the setting, click OK or press (§Enter). To cancel the setting, click Cancel or press
(Esc).
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
3-28
Using the Database Maintenance Module
Showing Valid Field Types
The Valid Field Types window displays the field type codes to use when creating or restructuring
a table. To display this window, use the following procedure.
1.
From the Options Menu, select Show Valid Field Types.
The system displays the Valid Field Types window.
Valid Field Types Window
2.
3.
To move the window to a convenient display area on the screen, use one of the following
steps:
A.
Click and hold the left mouse button in the window's title bar and drag the window
to the area where you want the window displayed. Release the left mouse button.
B.
Click the mouse in the Valid Field Types Window. Press (Alt), then (§Enter), then (M)
(for Move). Using the arrow keys, position the window to the area where you want
the window displayed, then press (§Enter).
To close the window, click the mouse in the Valid Field Types window and press (Alt)-(F4),
or re-select Show Valid Field Types on the Options Menu.
You can also double-click in the upper left corner of the Valid Field Types window.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
3-29
Using the Database Maintenance Module
Using the Table Menu
The Table Menu allows you to select special Legi tables to view and edit. Three of the four
special tables are covered in other chapters:

Label stock log (see Chapter 9, Using the Audit Trail)

System print log (see Chapter 9, Using the Audit Trail)

Tracking serial numbers (see Chapter 8, Using Serial Number Tracking)
Working with the language table is covered in this section.
Creating a Language Table
The language table allows you to customize Legi for use with other languages. You can
create a new language table for use with Legi.
1.
From the Tables menu, select Create New Language Table.
The system displays the Table Select window. Use this window to enter the file
name for the new table.
2.
In the Drives drop-down list box, select the drive where the file will be located.
3.
In the Directories list box, use the scroll bar to scroll through the available
directories on the selected drive. Select the appropriate directory.
4.
In the Table Name text box, type the name for the database table.
The only file type available for custom languages is database tables (.DB extension).
If you enter the name of an existing file, the system asks if you want to overwrite the
file. Do not overwrite the main language table for Legi.
5.
After typing the file name, click OK or press (§Enter). To cancel selecting a file,
click Cancel or press (Esc).
The system adds the default language table entries.
6.
You can now edit this table as you would any other table.
Viewing the Language Table
The language table allows you to customize Legi for use with other languages. To display
the Language Table window, select Language from the Tables Menu. Legi displays the
Table Open dialog box. Select the language table to display:
1.
In the Drives drop-down list box, select the drive where the file is located.
2.
In the Directories list box, use the scroll bar to scroll through the available
directories on the selected drive. Select the appropriate directory.
3.
Using the Table Name list box, scroll to the database table name and select it.
The only file type available for custom languages is database tables (.DB extension).
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
3-30
Using the Database Maintenance Module
4.
After selecting the file, click OK or press (§Enter). To cancel selecting a file, click
Cancel or press (Esc).
The system displays the language table selected.
5.
You can now edit this table as you would any other table.
Only the last field that contains the text can be edited. The other fields are special
system fields that Legi uses to locate the correct text for various dialog boxes and
menu items. Database Maintenance prevents you from changing these system fields.
Printing Database Tables
This section explains how to set up a printer, and how to print a table.
Setting up a Printer
Because printing tables does not require a label printer configured for Legi, Database
Maintenance uses the Windows printer defaults and Windows Print Manager. To change
the printer specified to use with Database Maintenance, use the following procedure.
1.
From the File Menu, select Printer Setup. If you are setting up the printer from the
Print dialog box, click the Options button.
The system displays the Print Setup dialog box.
Print Setup Dialog Box
2.
In the Printer group box, select one of the following:
Default Printer
Use the printer specified as the Windows default. Beneath
this option button the system lists the default printer name.
Specific Printer
Specify the printer to use from the list of printers installed in
Windows. To select from the list, click on the down arrow in
the list box or move the cursor to the field and press (¥).
Highlight the appropriate printer.

NOTE: Selecting another printer affects only the printer selected for
Database Maintenance. It does not affect the Print Labels or Graphics Print
and View options.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
3-31
Using the Database Maintenance Module
3.
4.
In the Orientation group box, select one of the following:
Portrait
Print the database in portrait mode.
Landscape
Print the database in landscape mode.
To set up the options for the selected printer, select the Options button.
The system displays the Options dialog box. For more information on this dialog
box, see your Windows documentation. Windows online help is also available for
this dialog box by selecting the Help button.
5.
To configure a network printer, click the Network button.
The system displays the network dialog box for the network you have installed.
Windows online help is available for this option.
6.
To save the setup and exit the dialog box, click OK or press (§Enter). To cancel
saving your changes, click Cancel or press (Esc).
Printing a Table
To print a table, use the following procedure.
1.
From the File Menu, select Print.
The system displays the Table Select dialog box. If a table is already open, the
Table Name text box defaults to the name of the open table.
2.
In the Drives drop-down list box, select the drive where the file is located.
3.
In the Directories list box, use the scroll bar to scroll through the available
directories on the selected drive.
The default is the Database directory.
4.
Using the Table Name list box, scroll to the database table name and highlight it.
The only file type available for printing is database tables (.DB extension).
5.
After selecting the file, click OK or press (§Enter). To cancel selecting a file, click
Cancel or press (Esc).
After you press (§Enter), the system displays the Print dialog box. The Printer
selection display lists the Windows printer selected for Database Maintenance.
Print Dialog Box
If you want to print a portion of the table, query the table first using the Query
option. You can then print the resulting answer table. For information performing
queries, see page 26.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
3-32
Using the Database Maintenance Module

6.
NOTE: The Print Range group box defaults to the All option button. This
setting cannot be changed.
In the Print Quality drop-down list box, select the type of printing quality for the
table. To select the print quality, complete one of the following steps:
A.
Click on the down arrow in the drop-down list box. Highlight the appropriate
entry.
B.
Press (Tab¿) to move to the field and press (¥). Highlight the appropriate entry.
7.
To print the table to a file instead of to a printer, select the Print to File check box.
8.
To set up printer options, select the Options button.
The system displays the Print Setup dialog box. For information on using this dialog
box, see the previous procedure, Setting up a Printer.
9.
To print the table, click OK or press (§Enter). To cancel printing the table, click
Cancel or press (Esc).
10.
Complete one of the following:
A.
If you are printing to a printer, the system prints the table to the printer listed
in the Printer selection display.
B.
If you are printing the table to a file, the system displays the Print to File
dialog box. In the Output File Name text box, enter the name of the file to
send the table output to and click OK or press (§Enter). To cancel printing,
click Cancel or press (Esc).
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
3-33
Using the Database Maintenance Module
This page intentionally left blank.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
3-34
Printing Labels
4
3Printing
Labels
The Print Labels module allows you to create new print jobs and submit
existing print jobs. You can only use this module with labels created
Overview
using Label Design. Print jobs hold all of the specifications for printing
a label, including the number of copies, a print query, and supplied data. This chapter explains
how to use the Print Labels module to set up and submit print jobs.
When a print job is submitted, the system checks the label you are printing to see if supplied data
fields exist. If they do, the Supplied Data window appears so you can enter the data for each field.
This chapter explains how to use supplied data (page 11) to enter data into supplied data fields.
If the label preview option was selected during Label Design, a graphical representation of the
label will appear in a window. This provides a view of what the label will look like when it prints.
This chapter explains how to use Label Preview (page 27) to view a label before printing.
Next, Legi sends the job to the Print Manager before sending it to the printer. The Print Manager
window allows you to manipulate the print jobs in a queue, as well as the queue itself. This
chapter explains how to use Print Manager (page 29) to manage your print jobs.
This chapter first covers the Print Labels window (page 3). It also covers the following
topics, listed under the menu from which they are accessed:
File Menu

Create a print job (page 5). Specify the print job parameters, including the number of
identical labels.

Load existing print jobs (page 8). Change existing print job parameters.

Save a new print job or changes to a print job (page 17).

Delete a print job.
Query Menu

Specify the print query (page 19). Specify the query to use for the label run.
Print Menu

Specify the print options to use for the printer selected (page 26).

Submit the print job (page 17). Before a print job is printed, it is first submitted to the Legi
print manager.

Test print the label (page 17).

Start the print manager (page 29).
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
4-1
Printing Labels
Help Menu

View the online help information. For information on working with help windows, see
Chapter 2, Getting Started.
Network Printing
Legi for Windows supports redirecting label print jobs to printers attached to Novell and
Windows NT networks. You must purchase a printer server device (such as the HP JetDirect EX
Plus) that attaches to the network cabling. The print server is then connected to the printer using
the printer’s parallel port and a Centronics cable.
Your network administrator must specify a print queue name that you will use when you redirect
the LPT ports to the network printer.
Printing to a network printer is very similar to printing to a printer connected to a parallel printer
port. You specify the LPT port in Printer Configuration, just as if the printer was connected to
your local computer. Because the LPT port is redirected to the network, when you print to LPT1:,
for example, the print job acutally goes to the network printer.
You can use several ways to redirect an LPT port to a network printer queue. The following
procedures use the shortest method, from the DOS command line. If you are attached to a
Windows NT network, go to the Windows NT heading. If you are attached to a Novell network,
go to the Novell heading.
Windows NT
1.
Open a DOS window. You should now be at the DOS command line.
2.
Type NET USE LPTx \\Server_Name\Queue_Name [Carriage Return]
where LPTx is LPT1 through LPT9 and \\Server_Name\Queue_Name is the name of
the printer server and queue that you want to print to.
If the network printer name and queue were correctly specified, the system displays
the message: The command completed successfully. If the command does not
complete successfully, see your network adminstrator for the correct network queue
name.
3.
If the command was successful, type NET USE. You will see a list of redirected
ports. Your print queue should be listed.
Novell
1.
Open a DOS window. You should now be at the DOS command line.
2.
Type CAPTURE Q=Queue_Name LPTx [Carriage Return]
where LPTx is LPT1 through LPT3 and Queue_Name is the name of the print queue
that you want to print to.
If the command does not complete successfully, the system will display a message
that says the print queue can not be found. See your network adminstrator for the
correct network queue name.
3.
If the command is successful, type CAPTURE /SHOW. You will see a list of
redirected ports. Your print queue should be listed.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
4-2
Printing Labels
Any printing within Windows to that printer port will now be redirected to the network
printer. In Printer Configuration, you will connect the printer to the LPT port that is
redirected. You will not see the print queue names in the Configuration port listbox - you
see only the LPT port names
Note: Windows 95 allows Novell users to redirect ports LPT4 through LPT9. However,
you may need to change a setting in the Netware Client to enable CAPTURE to recognize
LPT ports greater than 3. To change this setting:
1.
In Windows 95, bring up Control Panel. Double-click the Network icon:
2.
Highlight Novell Netware Client in the list box. Click Properties.
3.
Select the Advanced Settings tab.
4.
In the Parameter Groups list box find the Network Printers entry.
5.
In the Setting edit, control increase the number of ports up to 9.
6.
Click OK to save changes.
7.
Click OK again to exit the Network Dialog Box.
.
Understanding the Print Labels Window
To access the Print Labels window, select the Print Labels module from the Legi Main Menu.
The system displays the Print Labels window. Following is an example of the Print Labels
window with a print job loaded. The title bar of the window displays the name of the label
format.
Print Labels Window with a Print Job Loaded
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
4-3
Printing Labels
Following are brief explanations of the sections on this window.

Menu Bar
Use the Menu Bar to access the drop down menus. For example, to load a print job, select
the File menu, then choose Select job. The system displays a list of existing print jobs.

Button Bar
The Button Bar allows you to access the most commonly used menu commands with the
click of a mouse. For example, to load a print job, click the Select Job button.

Print Job Specifications
This area of the window lists all of the specific options set for the printer, including the
port and the label stock. This area is beneath the button bar and comprises the rest of the
window.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
4-4
Printing Labels
Creating a Print Job
You can create and save print jobs. Once a print job is created and saved, you can load a job
again with all of the print information saved. For jobs that are printed frequently with few
changes in print specifications, this feature saves time because you only need to enter the
information once.
1.
From the File Menu, select New job. You can also select the New Job button.
The system displays the File Select dialog box.
2.
In the Drives drop-down list box, select the drive where the file is located.
3.
In the Directories list box, use the scroll bar to scroll through the available directories on
the selected drive. Select the appropriate directory.
4.
To select the label file, scroll through the list of files in the File Name list box and
highlight the file.
You can only select label files created using Label Design. Label files have a .LBL
extension.
5.
To select the file, click OK or press (§Enter). To cancel creating a new print job, click
Cancel or press (Esc).
The system displays the print job information.
Print Labels Window with a Print Job Loaded
This window allows you to enter specific information for this print job. It also displays the
following information:
Printer name
Displays the printer selected for this print job. The printer is selected
when the label is created because each label is designed for a specific
printer. The printer cannot be changed using the Print Labels
module.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
4-5
Printing Labels
Mode
Displays the print mode selected for this print job. The print mode is
selected when the label is created because each label is designed for
a specific mode. The mode cannot be changed using the Print Labels
module.
6.
In the Print job description text box, the system displays the label description entered in
Label Design. You can edit the description displayed.
7.
In the Printer drop-down list box, select the port to use by clicking on the down arrow and
selecting the appropriate port.
The default is the port selected for the printer in Label Design.
8.
To select the remote input port, click the Remote Input button.
This button will be active only if the print job contains remote input supplied data. For
information on completing the Remote Input window, see page 9.

9.
NOTE: The COM port used for remote input must not be the same as the COM port
used for printing.
In the Label stock drop-down list box, if you are tracking label stock quantities using the
Audit Trail, select the label stock to use by clicking on the down arrow and selecting the
appropriate label stock. You can also enter the name of the label stock to use in the text
box.
The default is the label stock selected for the printer in Label Design. You may leave this
field blank.
10.
To print more than one copy of each label, enter the number of copies in the Number of
identical labels list box.
If the number of identical labels was specified in Label Design, this box will say Auto.
You can override the auto setting.
When you click on the up or down arrow or press the (£) or (¥) key, Legi increments the
displayed number by one.
If the Print Count options are not available, they may not apply to this label or you may not
have the appropriate security options for your user group to change these options.
11.
If this label includes a serial number, enter the number of labels to print for this serial run
in the Number of labels in serial run list box.
If the number of labels in the serial run was specified in Label Design, this box will say
Auto. You can override the auto setting.
When you click on the up or down arrow or press the (£) or (¥) key, Legi increments the
displayed number by one.
12.
To submit the print job with a suspended status, select the Submit job suspended check
box.
If a print job is suspended, it will not print until its status is changed to unsuspended. For
more information, see Suspending/Unsuspending Print Jobs, page 32.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
4-6
Printing Labels
13.
To clear the printer’s buffer before sending this print job, select the Clear printer buffer
check box.
If this box is checked, any jobs that are currently printing will be cleared. This option is
useful if you need to interrupt a job that is currently printing.
14.
To resubmit a job to Print Manager, select the Auto repeat check box.
If this box is selected, the print job is printed normally. However, when it is done printing,
the Print Manager will automatically restart the job. The job will be repeated in this
manner until the job is manually deleted from the Print Manager queue. Any other jobs
submitted to the queue while this job is repeating will remain in the waiting state.
You might choose this option if you were inputting data from a barcode reader and wanted
a label to print for every barcode scanned.
15.
To keep the Supplied Data window from automatically closing after all supplied data is
entered, select the Disable auto print check box.
This option applies only to print jobs that contain supplied data fields; it will be greyed if
the print job does not contain at least one supplied data field. If this box is checked, you
must press the Print button in the Supplied Data window to continue printing.
16.
To have the system re-evaluate the auto count for each record on a queried print, select the
Reevaluate auto counts on query check box.
This option is available only for a label with a query field linked to a database table.
17.
To set up DDE links to a DDE server application, click the DDE Links button.
This options allows you to make the connection between the DDE server and DDE field in
the label. This button will be active only if the print job contains DDE supplied data fields.
For more information, see Setting Up DDE Links, page 10.
18.
To save this information entered, from the File Menu, select Save job.
For information on saving, see Saving a Print Job, page 16.
19.
To submit this print job to the print manager, or to fill in any supplied data fields, select
Proceed from the Print Menu or select the Proceed button.
For information on submitting print jobs, see Submitting a Print Job, page 17. For
information on entering supplied data, see Entering Supplied Data Fields, page 11.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
4-7
Printing Labels
Loading an Existing Print Job
Once a print job has been set up and saved, you can then load that print job instead of re-entering
the print information. To create a print job for a label, see Creating a Print Job, page 5.
1.
From the File Menu, select Load job. You can also select the Load Job button.
The system displays the File Open dialog box.
2.
In the Drives drop-down list box, select the drive where the file is located.
3.
In the Directories list box, use the scroll bar to scroll through the available directories on
the selected drive. Select the appropriate directory.
4.
To select the job, scroll through the list of files and highlight the file.
You can only select job files created using Print Labels. Job files have a .JOB extension.
5.
To select the file, click OK or press (§Enter). To cancel loading the print job, click Cancel
or press (Esc).
The system displays the Print Job window with the print information for the selected job.
For more information about the Print Job window and the fields you can change, see
Creating a Print Job, page 5.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
4-8
Printing Labels
Selecting the Remote Input Port
If the label loaded has a remote input field defined, use the following procedure to select the
remote input port. If the label does not have a remote input field, the Remote Input button will
not be available.
1.
From the Print Labels window, click the Remote Input button.
The system displays the Remote Port Selection window.
Remote Port Selection Dialog Box
The groups that were selected for this label in Label Design will be available.
2.
For each available group, select the appropriate COM port.
3.
To save the selections, click OK. To cancel selecting ports, click the Cancel button.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
4-9
Printing Labels
Setting Up DDE Links
In the Print Labels module, you make the connection between the DDE server and the DDE fields
in your label. DDE servers vary in how they support DDE links. Most support a type of DDE link
called Paste Link. This type of link does not require the user to know the service, topic or item
names of the DDE link. Legi for Windows will only work with this type of DDE link. This
procedure explains how to set up the DDE links. For information on entering the DDE data, see
page 14.
1.
Start the DDE server application.
2.
Highlight the field, item, or cell that you want to send via DDE.
3.
Choose Copy from the DDE server application’s menu (usually under the Edit menu).
This transfers the DDE link information to the Windows clipboard. Print Labels will read
the clipboard data and use it to establish the DDE link.
4.
Load the label to print, then click the DDE Links button.
The system displays the DDE Links dialog box with a list of all the DDE fields in your
label. You are now ready to link the DDE server to the label field.
DDE Links Dialog Box
5.
Highlight the field in the list box for which you want to specify the DDE link, and click the
Paste Link button.
The system displays the service, topic and item names of the DDE server in the list box
next to the field name. In the DDE Data text box, the system displays the DDE data that
was sent.
6.
Repeat this process for each field to link.
Label fields do not have to be linked to the same DDE server; you can use multiple DDE
servers in one label.
7.
In the Update group box, indicate whether the data will be updated automatically or
manually.
8.
To set up a different DDE link or undo a link that was pasted, highlight the field and click
the Cancel Link button. You can now repeat the above process and set the new link.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
4-10
Printing Labels
9.
To save the DDE link information, click OK. To cancel linking, click the Cancel button.
The DDE link information will be saved if you save the label as a print job for subsequent
printing. You could then recall it by selecting the Select Job option instead of the Select
Label option in Print Labels.
Entering Supplied Data Fields
Supplied data fields allow you to enter information for designated fields at different times during
the printing process. For example, a label may be designed to be used for different products being
shipped. Each time you submit the print job, you could change the product name from the Print
Labels module to reflect the current shipment.
If a label has any supplied data fields defined within it, these field names are displayed in the
Supplied Data window. The Supplied Data window will appear whenever supplied data needs to
be provided, depending on the supplied entry time you specified when you created the field in
Label Design. You can select supplied data at four points during the printing process:
Print labels
Immediately after submitting a job from Print Labels, the Supplied Data
window will appear and any fields with this box checked will display in
a list box. You can enter data at this time.
Print start
When the print job becomes active in the print queue, any fields with this
box checked will be displayed in the Supplied Data window.
Each queried label
For every label that satisfies the print query, before the label prints, the
Supplied Data window will appear. For example, if your print query
produces seven labels, you will have seven opportunities to enter data
into the field. Before each label prints, the Supplied Data window will
appear with a list of all fields with this box checked. You can enter data
at this time.
Each serial label
For every label in a serialized label run, before each label prints, the
Supplied Data window will appear. For example, if your serial label run
consists of ten serial numbers, you will have ten opportunities to enter
data into the field. Before each label prints, the Supplied Data window
will appear with a list of all fields that have this box checked. You can
enter data at this time. This option must be used with Computer
Repetition.
Following is an example of the Supplied Data window.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
4-11
Printing Labels
Supplied Data Window
The Field Name/Field data list box contains all the supplied fields for that label and entry time.
The example label above contains, among other fields, a supplied data field for the bolt number.
This field allows you to enter a different bolt number each time the job is printed instead of
creating a new label for each bolt. For more information on supplied data fields, see Adding
Supplied Data Fields in Chapter 5, Label Design.
The status text at the bottom of the Supplied Data window indicates the source for the supplied
data. Bold text means the source is enabled and that data can be entered or retrieved using that
method. Grey text means that source cannot be used. You can supply data from four sources:
Keyboard
You can enter data from the keyboard.
Remote Input
Data can be received from the COM port.
DDE
Data can be received from a DDE server application. You can set up
DDE links in Print Labels.
Table Lookup
Data can be selected from a Paradox table field list.
Keyboard, remote input and DDE may all be active at the same time. Data can come from any of
those sources. When Table Lookup is active, no other data source can be active; data for that field
can come only from a table.
To enter the data for supplied data fields, use one or more of the following procedures. These
procedures assume that you have already loaded a print job with supplied data fields. You must
define the supplied data fields using the Label Design module.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
4-12
Printing Labels
Entering Keyboard Data
To enter keyboard data, use the following procedure.
1.
In the Field Name list box, highlight the field to select from the list in the left
column of the window.
2.
To enter data for the highlighted field, double-click the field name or press (¿Tab).
The cursor moves to the Edit text box, where the system displays the prompt entered
in the Supplied Input dialog box in Label Design. If a default value was specified in
Label Design, it will display here and in the right column of the Field names list
box.
3.
Type the data to print on the labels, and press (§Enter).
When you press (§Enter), the system remains in the Edit text box and displays the
next supplied data field value. The data entered is displayed in the right column of
the Field names list box under Field data.

NOTE: The data you enter must match the field type and maximum length
values for the field.
If this field is the last or only field in the Supplied Data window, the window
automatically closes and the print job continues.
4.
Continue entering the values for each supplied data field.
At the end of the list, entering data and pressing (§Enter) will cause the Supplied Data
window to close and the print job to continue. You can also click the Print button in
the Supplied Data window to close the window and continue printing.
If you click on the Print Job window behind the Supplied Data window, the Supplied
Data window closes and the information entered is automatically saved.
Entering Remote Input Data
To enter remote input data, use the following procedure.
1.
In the Field Name list box, highlight the field to select from the list in the left
column of the window.
2.
Input the data from the COM port designated as the Remote Input port.
The data entered is displayed in the Field data column of the Field names list box.
The Remote Input data received is displayed in the Field data column of the Field
names list box. The cursor remains in the Edit text box and displays the next
supplied data field value.
If this is the last or only field in the Supplied Data window, the window
automatically closes and the print job continues.
The exact manner used to enter a Remote input field will depend on the device you
are using. Some typical devices are bar code readers and scales. However, they all
must connect to one of the COM ports on the computer. Be sure that you have
correctly set up the COM port line settings in Remote Input Configuration and
assigned to the desired remote groups when defining the field in Label Design.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
4-13
Printing Labels
3.
Continue entering the values for each supplied data field.
If you click on the Print Job window behind the Supplied Data window, the Supplied
Data window closes and the information entered is automatically saved.
Entering DDE Data
To enter DDE data, use the following procedure.
1.
Select one of the following options:
A.
For a DDE Automatic Link, start your DDE server application or switch to it
if it is already running. Highlight the data that is your DDE link data.
DDE server applications differ in their DDE implementations. Some send the
data as soon as it is selected. Others require that the data be changed before it
is sent. Experiment with the application you have selected for your DDE
server (or consult the manual) to find out when it will send DDE data.
B.
2.
For a DDE Manual Link, start your DDE server application if it is not already
running. Highlight the field to select in the Field name list box and press the
Table Lookup button.
If you are not at the Supplied Data window, switch to it now.
The DDE data received is displayed in the Field data column of the Field names list
box. The system remains in the Edit text box and displays the next supplied data
field value.
If this field is the last or only field in the Supplied Data window, the window
automatically closes and the print job continues.
3.
Continue entering the values for each supplied data field.
When you are at the end of the list, entering data and pressing (§Enter) will cause the
Supplied Data window to close and the print job to continue.
If at any time you click on the Print Job window behind the Supplied Data window,
the system Supplied Data window closes and the information entered is
automatically saved.
Selecting Table Lookup Data
To select table lookup data, use the following procedure.
1.
In the Field Name list box, highlight the field to select from the list in the left
column of the window.
2.
To display the Table Lookup dialog box, double-click the field name or press the
Table Lookup button.
A dialog box displays with a list of available data for that field.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
4-14
Printing Labels
Table Field Selection Dialog Box
3.
Select the data item from the Data list box, and click OK or double-click the
highlighted field.
The data will be listed in the order it appears in the table.
The description field contains the table field selected to use as the prompt in the
label. If you did not select a field in Label Design Supplied Input to use as a
prompt, only the Data list box will be displayed.
The dialog box closes and the data selected is displayed in the right column of the
Field names list box under Field data of the Supplied Data window. The system
displays the next supplied data field value.
If this is the last or only field in the Supplied Data window, the window
automatically closes and the print job continues.
4.
Continue entering the values for each supplied data field.
5.
To save the information selected and continue, click the OK button.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
4-15
Printing Labels
Saving a Print Job
To save time when printing labels, you can enter the printing information for a print job, then
save the print job with all of the specifications. When you need to print the job again, select the
correct print job, make any needed changes, and submit the job.
1.
To save a print job, from the File Menu, select Save.
The system displays the File Save As dialog box.
2.
In the Drives drop-down list box, to save the print job to a different drive, select the new
drive by clicking on the down arrow or press (¥).
The system displays the available drives.
3.
In the Directories list box, use the scroll bar to scroll through the available directories on
the selected drive. To select a directory, double-click the directory name or highlight the
directory and press (§Enter).
The files in the File Name list box change to display the files in the selected directory.
4.
In the File Name text box, type the file name. To save the print job to an existing file
name, click the file name or highlight the file name in the list box.
5.
To save the file, click OK or press (§Enter). To cancel saving the file, click Cancel or press
(Esc).
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
4-16
Printing Labels
Submitting a Print Job
Once a print job has been set up, you can submit it to the printer. To submit a job to the printer,
select Proceed from the Print Menu or select the Print button.
When you submit a job, the system sends it to the Print Manager. Depending on the job status
and printer status, it will either be sent to the printer directly or it may be suspended. For more
information on suspended jobs, see Suspending/Unsuspending Print Jobs, page 32.
Test Printing a Label
A test print allows you to check the placement of fields on the label by printing the job just as it
would normally print without including graphics or performing a queried label print, if one is
specified. This feature helps you to line up the label text on the label stock and check the printing
placement.
To perform a test print, load a job in Print Labels and select the Test Print button. You can also
select Test print from the Print Menu. The job is then submitted to print manager. For
information on using print manager, see Using Print Manager, page 29.
Only one label will be printed, or if using label stock with multiple labels horizontally, one row is
printed. Identical count and serial count fields are ignored.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
4-17
Printing Labels
Printing to a File
Instead of selecting a port to print to, you can also select a file. To print a job to a file, use the
following procedure. This procedure assumes that you have already loaded a job and made any
necessary changes.
Before printing a job to a file, you must first configure Legi to allow print jobs for this printer
type to be sent to a file. To connect the printer to the FILE option, see Connecting a Printer to a
Port in Chapter 10, Configuring Legi.
1.
In the Port drop-down list box, click on the down arrow to display the list of available
ports. Select FILE.
2.
Select Print from the Print Menu. You can also select the Print button.
The system displays the File Saveas dialog box. This dialog box allows you to specify the
file name for the output.
3.
In the Drives drop-down list box, to save the print file to a different drive, select the new
drive.
4.
In the Directories list box, use the scroll bar to scroll through the available directories on
the selected drive. Select the appropriate directory.
5.
In the File Name text box, type the file name.
The default extension is .OUT.
6.
To save the file, click OK or press (§Enter). To cancel saving the file, click Cancel or press
(Esc).
The system creates the output file.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
4-18
Printing Labels
Performing a Queried Label Print
The Label Design and Print Labels functions incorporate a query option. To create a queried
label print, the label format must include a data expression field linked to a table field. When you
create a print job for the label, you can select the database table to link to the label field, enter the
query, and the system will only print records from the selected table that meet the query
conditions.
This option allows you to query a selected table for a selected field, which limits the labels
printed to the records that match the query.
For example, you may require a label with customer addresses in a certain zip code range. You
can select to query the customer database and limit the records found to those whose zip codes
begin with 3. When the labels print, it will only print labels for those customers whose zip codes
begin with 3.
You can only perform a query for one field in the selected table. If you have a more complicated
query to perform, use the Database Maintenance Query module and create a subset of the table.
For more information, see Performing Queries in Chapter 3, Database Maintenance.
To set up a queried label print, use the following procedure.
1.
From the Query Menu, select Specify query.
The system displays the Queried Label Print dialog box. If you have already set up a query
for this print job, the fields are already completed. You can enter new information.
Queried Label Print Dialog Box
To clear an existing query, select the New Query button.
2.
To select the database table to use, select the Choose Table button.
3.
To choose the table, use the following procedure:
A.
In the Drives drop-down list box, select the drive where the table is located.
B.
In the Directories list box, use the scroll bar to scroll through the available
directories on the selected drive. Select the appropriate directory.
C.
In the File Name list box, use the scroll bar to scroll through the available files.
Highlight the appropriate file.
You can only select database table files with a .DB extension.
D.
To select the file, click OK or press (§Enter). To cancel selecting the file, click
Cancel or press (Esc).
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
4-19
Printing Labels
The system displays the name of the table selected in the Database table selection display.
4.
To select the field used for the query, click on the down arrow in the Field used for query
drop-down list box. You can also move the cursor to that field and press (¥).
The system displays the available fields from the table selected. Select the field to use for
the query.
5.
In the Query expression text box, enter the query to perform using the following operators:
=
Equal to
>
Greater than
<
Less than
>=
Greater than or equal to
<=
Less than or equal to
..
Any number of characters, including blank spaces
@
Any single character
NOT
Does not match
BLANK No value
OR
,

Either condition can be true
And (both conditions must be true)
NOTE: Remember that if you enter commas between queries Legi will interpret the
commas as an AND condition.
For example, if the field used for the query is Zip Code and the labels should only include
records with a zip code beginning with 3, enter 3.. for the query.
You can only enter a query for one database field. If you require a more complex query,
use the Database Maintenance module.
6.
To save the query, click OK or press (Alt)-(O). To lose the changes, click Cancel or press
(Alt)-(C).
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
4-20
Printing Labels
Performing an AS/400 Queried Label Print
The Label Design and Print Labels functions incorporate a query option using AS/400 data
expressions. The AS/400 data expressions allow you to read data from an AS/400 database
instead of Paradox, which is the standard format support by Legi for Windows.
To create an AS/400 queried label print, the label format must include an AS/400_pfQuery data
expression field. When you create a print job for the label, you can select the AS/400 file and
library to link to the label field, enter the query, and the system will only print records from the
selected file and library that meet the query conditions.
This option allows you to query a selected table for a selected field, which limits the labels
printed to the records that match the query.
Before using the AS/400 data expressions, either PC Support/400 or Client Access/400 must be
installed and started.
You can perform a query for only one field in the selected table.
To set up a queried label print, use the following procedure.
1.
From the Query Menu, select Specify query.
The system displays the AS/400 Queried Print dialog box.
2.
In the System field, type the AS/400 system name you are using.
3.
In the File/library field, type the name of the AS/400 file/library you are using.
4.
To create a simple select query, complete the following steps:
A.
Select the Simple select option button.
B.
In the Key field text box, select the field to use for the query. If you want every
record in the file, leave this field blank.
C.
In the Starting value and Ending value text boxes, type the range of values to use for
the query.
If the Starting value is left blank, the query will not impose a lower limit on the key
field. If the Ending value is left blank, the query will not impose an upper limit on
the key field.
You cannot use both the where clause and the simple select options.
5.
To create a where clause, complete the following steps:
A.
Select the String builder option button.
When you select this option button, the system creates a where clause using the
values entered in the fields above. However, when the String builder option button
is selected, the system will use the clause in the Where clause text box and will
ignore any information in the other text boxes.
B.
In the Where clause text box, type the where clause to use for the query.
For more information on the where clause syntax, see the AS/400 documentation.
6.
To save the query, click OK or press (Alt)-(O). To lose the changes, click Cancel or press
(Alt)-(C).
Performing an AS/400 Keyed Queried Label Print
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
4-21
Printing Labels
This option is similar to the AS/400 Queried Print option, but it uses a keyed AS/400 table
instead. Label Design and Print Labels functions incorporate a query option using AS/400 data
expressions. The AS/400 data expressions allow you to read data from an AS/400 database
instead of Paradox, which is the standard format support by Legi for Windows.
To change an AS/400 keyed queried label print, the label format must include an
AS/400_keyQuery data expression field. When you create a print job for the label, you can select
the system and AS/400 file and library to link to the label field, enter the query, and the system
will only print records from the selected file and library that meet the query conditions. The
records will be printed in keyed order.
This option allows you to query a selected table for a selected field, which limits the labels
printed to the records that match the query.
Before using the AS/400 data expressions, either PC Support/400 or Client Access/400 must be
installed and started.
You can perform a query for only one field in the selected table.
To set up a queried label print, use the following procedure.
1.
From the Query Menu, select Specify query.
The system displays the AS/400 Keyed Queried Print dialog box.
AS/400 Keyed Queried Print Dialog Box
2.
In the System text box, type the AS/400 system name you are using.
3.
In the File/library text box, type the name of the table you are using.
4.
In the Starting key values and Ending key values list boxes, click on the key field that you
want to use to retrieve records.
You will then be prompted to type a value for that key field in the edit box on the bottom
of the dialog box. Type a starting or ending value.
If a starting value for a field is not specified, the search will start with the lowest value
possible for that field. If an ending value for a field is not specified, the search will end
with the highest value possible for that field.
5.
To save the query, click OK or press (Alt)-(O). To lose the changes, click Cancel or press
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
4-22
Printing Labels
(Alt)-(C).
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
4-23
Printing Labels
Performing an ODBC Queried Label Print
The Label Design and Print Labels functions incorporate a query option using ODBC data
expressions. The ODBC data expressions allow you to read data from database formats other
than Paradox, which is the standard format supported by Legi for Windows.
To create an ODBC queried label print, the label format must include an ODBC_query data
expression field. When you create a print job for the label, you can select the database table to
link to the label field, enter the query, and the system will only print records from the selected
table that meet the query conditions.
This option allows you to query a selected table for a selected field, which limits the labels
printed to the records that match the query.
For example, you may require a label with customer addresses in a certain zip code range. You
can select to query the customer database and limit the records found to those whose zip codes
begin with 3. When the labels print, it will only print labels for those customers whose zip codes
begin with 3.
Before using the ODBC data expressions, you must first install the ODBC Windows drivers, then
configure the ODBC drivers for your system. To configure ODBC, double-click the ODBC icon
in the Legi for Windows program group. Windows online help is available for this option.
You can perform a query for only one field in the selected table. You may need to contact the
manufacturer of the database to which you are connecting for the appropriate ODBC drivers.
To set up a queried label print, use the following procedure.
1.
From the Query Menu, select Specify query.
The system displays the ODBC Queried Print dialog box.
ODBC Queried Print Dialog Box
2.
In the User name and User password text boxes, if the database to which you are
connecting has restricted access, type the user name and user password in these fields.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
4-24
Printing Labels
3.
In the Data source drop-down list box, select the database to which you are connecting.
The only tables listed are those that were set up using the ODBC option in the Legi for
Windows program group.
4.
In the Table name drop-down list box, select the table you are querying.
5.
In the Search field drop-down list box, select the field within the table to use for the query.
6.
In the Start value and End value text boxes, type the starting and ending values for the
query.
7.
To write your own SQL expression, select the Use SQL Expression check box.
When you select this check box, the system creates a SQL expression from the values
entered in the above fields and displays it in the SQL expression text box. You can now
edit the expression as needed. However, when the Use SQL Expression check box is
selected, the system will use the expression in the text box and will ignore any information
in the fields above.
8.
To save the query, click OK or press (Alt)-(O). To lose the changes, click Cancel or press
(Alt)-(C).
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
4-25
Printing Labels
Setting Printer Options
To set printer options, use the following procedure.
1.
From the Print menu, select Printer options. You can also select the Printer Options check
box.
The system displays the Print Options dialog box. If an option is shaded out, it is not
available for the printer or it has not been configured for a printer. For example, in the
following dialog box, Cut during print is shaded out because the selected printer does not
have a cutter installed.
Print Options Dialog Box
The options available on this dialog box will vary depending on the printer selected. For
information on the print options for the printer you are using, see Appendix F, Printer
Specific Functions.
2.
Complete the available options as desired.
For information on the available options, see the reference guide for your printer.
3.
To save the changes, click OK or press (Alt)-(O). To lose the changes and close the dialog
box, click Cancel or press (Alt)-(C).
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
4-26
Printing Labels
Previewing the Label
Label Preview displays a label as it will print, allowing you to review the label before printing.
With Label Preview, you can determine if label data is correct before you print the label. You can
specify at what times during the printing process you want to review the label. See Setting the
Label Options in Chapter 5, Label Design for more information.
Label Preview is similar to a view-only version of Label Design. Label Preview does not allow
you to make changes to the label, but you can view the label and zoom in on any portion of it.
Label Preview includes a Cursor Position window and a Tools window.
Label Preview Window
Cursor Position Window
Label Preview gives you the option of displaying the cursor position measurements. To display
this dialog box, select Cursor Pos from the Options Menu. Legi displays the Position window.
The first measurement is the horizontal position. The second measurement is the vertical
position. These measurements display in the Unit of Measure selected on the Label Settings
dialog box in Label Design or the Grid Settings dialog box.
NOTE: If the Cursor Pos option is checked on the Options Menu but the Positions
window is not displaying, click the secondary mouse button. This button toggles between
displaying and hiding the Position window.
Tools Window
The Tools windows allows you to quickly select menu options by selecting a tool from the Tool
window. To display this window, select Tools from the Options Menu. Legi displays the Tools
window.
NOTE: If the Tools option is checked on the Options Menu but the Tools window is not
displaying, click the secondary mouse button. This button toggles between displaying and
hiding the Tools window.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
4-27
Printing Labels
Label Preview uses the same settings that Label Design uses. If the grid was enabled there, it will
also be enabled here. Following is a brief explanation of each tool, as well as the corresponding
menu option for each of the tools.
Continues the printing process. You would normally press select this option after
reviewing the label and determining that the label data is OK. The print tools corresponds
to the Print option on the Action menu.
Abort the print job. You might select this option after reviewing the label if you have
determined that the label data is incorrect. The abort print tools corresponds to the Abort
Print option on the Action menu.
Toggle between displaying and not displaying the rulers. The ruler tool corresponds to the
Rulers option on the Options menu.
Displays the Grid Settings dialog box. The grid tool corresponds to the Grid option on the
Options Menu.
Allows you to magnify part of the label format. The zoom tool corresponds to the Zoom In
option on the View Menu.
Allows you to view the entire label. The zoom out tool corresponds to the Zoom Out
option on the View Menu.
Once you have viewed the label, you can then decide if you want to continue with the print job.
To print, select the Print option. The Label Preview window will close and the print job will
continue. However, after reviewing the label, if you find that you do not want to print, select Print
Abort. This option will cancel the print job and remove it from the print queue.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
4-28
Printing Labels
Using Print Manager
The Print Manager is activated whenever you submit a print job or print graphics using the
Graphics Print and View module, and runs in the background. It closes automatically when you
exit Legi. To display the Print Manager window, press (Ctrl)-(Esc), and select Legi Print Manager
from the Task List window.
Print Manager Window
The Print Manager allows you to see the status of the queues and the jobs sent to them. You can
manipulate the jobs in a number of ways. Following is a brief overview of the Print Manager
window.

Menu Bar
Allows you to access the Print Manager options.

Button Bar
Gives quick access to Print Manager options. You can access all of the button functions
from the Menu Bar also.

Queue Window
Displays the status of the queue and of the print jobs sent to the queue. The title bar
displays the name of the port in the queue window. If multiple ports are being used, more
than one queue window can be open at a time.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
4-29
Printing Labels
Understanding the Queue Window
The Queue window lists the name of the port in the title bar (such as COM1, LPT1, etc.).
This window contains two types of entries, the queue and the print jobs. The first line in
the window lists the printer name and queue name followed by its status. Indented
underneath the queue name it lists any jobs sent to that queue, the label stock for that job,
the date and time it was sent, and the status of the job. Following is an example of a queue
window:
Queue Window
The line Series 81 on COM2 is the queue entry. The lines indented beneath it are the print
jobs sent to that queue.
If you are printing to more than one port, print manager displays a queue window for each
port that is receiving jobs.
If you are sending a print job to a file, print manager will also briefly display a queue for
the file.
The queue status can be one of the following:
Active
Indicates the port is open and print manager is able to send
print jobs to the printer.
Paused
Print manager cannot send print jobs to the printer until the
status is returned to active. You can pause a queue at any
time during a print job to temporarily prevent the remainder
of the print job from being sent to the printer. For example,
the label stock may need to be changed.
Stalled
Indicates a problem with the printer. A second message will
follow that further describes the problem. For example, the
printer may be out of ribbon or label stock.
Port not found
Indicates the printer port does not exist. This error can occur
if the print job was created on one computer and then copied
to another computer with a different hardware configuration
to be printed.
Memory error in open port There was not enough memory available to open a printer
port. Close some windows and try again.
Waiting for port
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
Indicates another program is currently controlling the desired
port.
4-30
Printing Labels
Communications problem
Indicates the port initialized properly but cannot
communicate with the printer. This error could be caused by
incorrect baud rate settings or by having the printer cable
come off.
Problem with port
Indicates a problem with the port that the print manager
cannot detect.
The queue can only be paused or made active again, but you can manipulate print jobs in a
number of ways. The print job status can be one of the following:
Active
The job is being sent to the printer or if the queue is paused,
it is ready to be sent to the printer.
Paused
An active job has been paused. Indicates that a job was
being sent to the printer, but has been paused and will not
finish being sent to the printer until its status is changed.
The print manager will send nothing else to the printer until
this print job is deleted or its status is changed to active.
Waiting
A job is in line in the queue, ready to be sent to the printer
when it reaches the top of the queue.
Suspended
A job with a status of waiting has been suspended. A
suspended job will continue to move up in the queue until it
is second in the queue or it is behind another suspended job.
It will then remain there until its status is changed to waiting.
A waiting job will pass over the suspended jobs and be sent
to the printer.
Starting Print Manager
When you submit a print job, it is sent to print manager. Print manager then runs in the
background. You can also start Print Manager by selecting Start print manager from the
Print Menu. To display the Print Manager window, press (Ctrl)-(Esc), and select Legi Print
Manager from the Task List window.
Pausing and Resuming Queues and Print Jobs
If a queue has an active status, you can change the status to paused. This status stops print
manager from sending any jobs to the printer.
For individual print jobs that have a status of active, you can change the status to paused.
This status will also stop print manager from sending any jobs to the printer, including
those that are waiting.
You may need to pause the printer or a print job to change label stock or to save the queue.
For more information on saving the queue, see Saving the Queue, 4-34.
To give a queue or print job a paused status, highlight the queue or print job and select
the Pause button. You can also select Pause from the Management Menu.
To resume a queue or print job and return its status to active, highlight the queue or
print job and select the Resume button. You can also select Resume from the Management
Menu.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
4-31
Printing Labels
If you pause a print job that is in the process of printing, when you resume the print job, it
will begin printing where it left off.
Suspending/Unsuspending Print Jobs
If a print job has a status of waiting, you can change its status to suspended. The
suspended status affects only the selected print job. As other print jobs are completed, it
will move up in the queue to second in line. As long as its status is suspended, it cannot be
printed.
To suspend a print job, highlight the print job and select the Suspend button. You can
also select Suspend from the Management Menu. This option changes the status to
suspended.
To suspend all print jobs, select Suspend All from the Management Menu. This option
changes the status of print jobs from waiting to suspended. It does not affect active or
paused print jobs.
To unsuspend a print job, highlight the print job with a suspended status and select the
Unsuspend button. You can also select Unsuspend from the Management Menu. This
option returns the status to waiting.
To unsuspend all print jobs, select Unsuspend All from the Management Menu. This
option changes the status of print jobs from suspended to waiting. It does not affect active
or waiting print jobs.
Moving a Print Job
To move a waiting or suspended print job one place up in the queue, highlight the print job
and select the Move up button. You can also select Move up from the Management Menu.
If the next job above the selected one has a status of active or paused, you cannot move the
job up any further.
To move a waiting or suspended print job down one place in the queue, highlight the print
job and select the Move down button. You can also select Move down from the
Management Menu.
Deleting a Print Job
To delete a print job, highlight the print job and select the Delete button. You can also
select Delete from the Management Menu.
To delete all print jobs from the queue, select the Flush queue option from the
Management Menu.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
4-32
Printing Labels
Resetting a Print Job
If a print job is active or paused and in the process of being printed, you can reset the job
so that it prints again from the beginning.
To reset a job, highlight the active or paused print job that is being printed and select Reset
Job from the Management Menu. The printer will stop printing and print manager will
send the entire print job again.
Flushing the Queue
Flushing the queue allows you to remove all print jobs from the queue, no matter their
status. If a print job is currently being printed, it will stop printing and be removed from
the queue along with all other print jobs.
To flush the queue, select Flush queue from the Management Menu.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
4-33
Printing Labels
Saving the Queue
If you attempt to exit Legi while print jobs are active, it will display the following
message: Can't exit while print jobs are active. To allow you to exit and not lose any
print jobs you may have submitted, Legi has an automatic queue save feature.
To use the queue save feature, do one of the following:

Change the queue status to paused by highlighting the queue name and selecting the
Pause button.

Suspend all print jobs by selecting Suspend All from the Management Menu. If a
print job is active, change its status to paused.
If you exit Legi and either the queue is paused or the print jobs are paused/suspended, the
system saves the print jobs in the queue. When Legi is accessed again, the system will
look for any print jobs left in any queues. It will then start print manager and the queue
exactly as it was when you exited.
If a job has been partially sent and is paused midstream, either by pausing the queue or the
job, the queue cannot be saved. You can either suspend the rest of the jobs and resume the
paused job, or reset the paused job so that it will print again from the beginning when you
restart print manager.
To print the jobs, change queue status to active and the status of any print jobs to active or
waiting.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
4-34
Designing Labels
5
4Designing
Labels
This chapter explains how to use the Label Design module to create labels.
Labels can include text, graphics, barcodes, or data linked in from a database
table. You can also add lines and boxes to the label format, as well as serial
number fields and tracking serial number fields. Other label fields can specify how many
identical labels to print and how many times to increment a serial number field on the label. If
the data for a label field will change at print time, you can create a supplied data field so you can
enter the data for the field at print time.
Overview
This chapter first explains basic terms and concepts used in working with Label Design
(beginning on page 3). It also covers the following topics, listed under the menu from
which they are accessed:
File Menu

Create a label format (page 7) and open an existing label format (15). When a label format
is created, you specify the printer and mode, as well as the label size. Once a label format
is open, you can change the default colors and display options for the label. When creating
a label, you can specify a label print log (page 12). The label print log allows you to
capture print information about a label when it is printed. You can also set up the label
print options (page 14).

Save a new or existing label format, or save an existing format under a new name (page
14).

Delete one or more label design files (page 16).

Test print a copy of the current label design (page 83).

Set up the report printer and print a label report for the current label (page 81)

The File menu also displays the last five previously opened label formats. To open one of
the last five opened, click the File menu, then click the label file name to open.
Edit Menu

Undo and redo any edits made to the label fields (page 68).

Edit the label fields, including using the cut, copy, and paste options and deleting label
fields (page 66).

Change the settings for selected label fields (page 69).

Move and align selected fields (page 70).
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
5-1
Designing Labels

Select and deselect fields (page 66). Once a field is selected, it can be sized with a mouse
(page 65).
Add Field Menu

Add a text field to the label (page 18).

Add a barcode field to the label (page 25).

Add a graphic field to the label (page 28).

Add a line to the label (page 31).

Add a box to the label (page 33).

Add printer commands to the label (page 35).

Once any of these fields have been added, you can access the following options from the
appropriate dialog box:

Create the data expression for a label field (page 37).

Add a serial number (page 50) or tracking serial number field (page 53).

Specify the number of identical labels to print (page 57).

Add supplied input fields (page 59).

Set the position/size for a field (page 64).
View Menu

Zoom in on a label (page 74). Select an area of the label to magnify for viewing.

Zoom out on a label (page 74). Display the whole label.

View the label (page 74). Display the complete label in a full screen window.
Options Menu

Display the horizontal and vertical position of the cursor (page 76).

Display the horizontal and vertical rulers (page 76).

Display the tool box (page 5).

Display the Font Information window (page 23).

Display and modifying the grid settings (page 78).
Settings Menu

Modify the label settings and colors (page 17).

Set the line thickness for lines and boxes (page 80).
Help Menu

View the online help information. For information on working with help windows, see
Chapter 2, Getting Started.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
5-2
Designing Labels
Using the Label Design Window
To display the Label Design window, select the Label Design module from the Main Menu. The
Label Design window allows you to load or create a label. The fields on the label are entered and
displayed on the body of the window. The menu bar allows you to access the editing and viewing
options for a label.
Following is an example of the Label Design window.
Label Design window with label, rulers, cursor position and tools displayed
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
5-3
Designing Labels
Using the Keyboard in Label Design
In addition to the menu options and the tools, Label Design incorporates accelerator keys that
allow you to access a menu option by pressing two keys simultaneously. Following is a list of
these key combinations and the corresponding menu option.

NOTE: In addition to the keys listed here, as with all Legi modules, a menu can be
accessed by holding down (Alt) and pressing the underlined letter in the menu name. Once
the menu is displayed, press the underlined letter for the option you want.
Edit Menu
Undo
(Alt)-(Backspace)
Redo
(Shift)-(Alt)-(Backspace)
Cut
(Shift)-(Del)
Copy
(Ctrl)-(Insert)
Paste
(Shift)-(Insert)
Change
(Ctrl)-(C)
Move
(Ctrl)-(M)
Align
(Ctrl)-(A)
Delete
(Delete)
Deselect All
(Esc)
Add Field Menu
Text
(Ctrl)-(T)
Barcode
(Ctrl)-(B)
Graphic
(Ctrl)-(G)
Line
(Ctrl)-(L)
Box
(Ctrl)-(X)
Raw
(Ctrl)-(R)
View Menu
Zoom In
(Ctrl)-(Z)
Zoom Out
(Ctrl)-(O)
View Label
(Ctrl)-(V)
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
5-4
Designing Labels
Using the Tools
The Tools feature allows you to quickly select Label Design editing and display features without
using the menus.
To display the Tools window, on the Options Menu, select Tools. When this option is checked,
the Tools window displays.
Tools Window
To not display the Tools window, select Tools again. This menu option toggles between
displaying and not displaying the window.
To temporarily hide the Tools window, click the right mouse button. Note that the Tools
window is no longer visible even though the Tools option is checked on the Options Menu. This
feature allows you to hide the window while you are checking field placement on the label. To
display the window, click the right mouse button again. This feature only works if you have first
selected Tools on the Options Menu.
To move the Tools window, click on the title bar of the Tools window. While holding the left
mouse button, drag the window to its new position. Release the mouse button when it is correctly
placed.
To use the tools, click on a tool that is not shaded out. The system accesses the corresponding
menu option. When a tool is shaded out, it is not available.
Following is a brief explanation of each tool, as well as the corresponding menu option for each
of the tools.
Add a text field. The text tool corresponds to the Text option on the Add Field Menu.
Add a barcode field. The barcode tool corresponds to the Barcode option on the Add Field
Menu.
Add a graphic field. The graphic tool corresponds to the Graphic option on the Add Field
Menu.
Add a line field. The line tool corresponds to the Line option on the Add Field Menu.
Add a box field. The box tool corresponds to the Box option on the Add Field Menu.
Available only after selecting a field. Displays the settings dialog box for the selected
field. For example, if you have selected a text field and then select the change tool, the
system displays the Text dialog box for the selected field. The change tool corresponds to
the Change option on the Edit Menu.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
5-5
Designing Labels
Available only after selecting a field. Displays the Move dialog box for the selected field
or fields. The move tool corresponds to the Move option on the Edit Menu.
Available only after selecting a field. Deletes any selected fields.
corresponds to the Delete option on the Edit Menu.
The delete tool
Available only after selecting a field. Allows you to align selected fields. The align tool
corresponds to the Align option on the Edit Menu.
Test print the label. The test print tool corresponds to the Test Print option on the File
Menu.
Available only after selecting a field. Deletes the selected field and copies it to the Legi
clipboard. The cut tool corresponds to the Cut option on the Edit Menu.
Available only after selecting a field. Copies the currently selected field to the Legi
clipboard. The copy tool corresponds to the Copy option on the Edit Menu.
Available only after cutting or copying a field. Pastes the last fields that were either cut or
copied into the upper left corner of the label. The paste tool corresponds to the Paste
option on the Edit Menu.
Available only after editing a field. Allows you to undo any edits made to the fields. For
example, if you delete a field accidentally, select Undo to undelete the field. The undo tool
corresponds to the Undo option on the Edit Menu.
Available only after selecting Undo to undo an edit to a field. This option repeats the
action that was undone. The redo tool corresponds to the Redo option on the Edit Menu.
Toggle between displaying and not displaying the rulers. The ruler tool corresponds to the
Rulers option on the Options menu.
Displays the Select Fields dialog box. The select tool corresponds to the Select Fields
option on the Edit Menu.
Displays the Grid Settings dialog box. The grid tool corresponds to the Grid option on the
Options Menu.
Allows you to magnify part of the label design. The zoom in tool corresponds to the Zoom
In option on the View Menu.
Allows you to view the entire label. The zoom out tool corresponds to the Zoom Out
option on the View Menu.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
5-6
Designing Labels
Creating Label Formats
To create a label, use the following procedure. This procedure covers how to select the initial
settings for a label. For information on adding fields to a label, see the online help window for
the specific type of field you want to create.
This dialog box allows you to set the label printing information, including the printer to use, the
label size and margin. The printer and print mode selected here cannot be changed when the label
is printed using the Print Labels module.
1.
From the File Menu, select New.
The system displays the Label Settings dialog box. When you select Open from the File
Menu, if another label was already open, Legi automatically closes that label format.
Label Settings Dialog Box
2.
In the Label Description text box, enter a description of the label.
3.
In the Label Stock text box, if you are using the label stock audit trail option, select the
label stock to use for the label. You can also enter the name of the label stock to use for
this label format in the text box.
You only need to complete this text box if you are using the label stock audit trail option.
If the label stock audit trail options are active in Configuration, when this label is
submitted to print, the system will update the label stock log and/or notify you in case of
low stock.
4.
In the Printer and Print Mode text boxes, select the printer and print mode to use when this
label is printed.
Once you select a printer and mode and begin designing the label, you should not change
these settings because the label may not print correctly. A label is designed for a specific
printer and print mode.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
5-7
Designing Labels
5.
In the Label Print Log text box, if you want to include a label log, type the name of the
label print log to use, including the path. You can also enter a label print log file name by
selecting the Label Print Log button.
This text box is optional. If you do not include a path, the system defaults to the default
database directory. For more information on selecting a label print log, see Using a Label
Print Log, page 12.
6.
In the Print Rotation text box, select the amount to rotate the label when it prints.
This setting does not affect the WYSIWYG display, which is always right side up.
7.
Under Unit of Measure, select one of the following option buttons for the unit of measure
to use for this label:
Inches
All measurements display in inches.
Centimeters
All measurements display in centimeters.
Points
All measurements display in point size.
Dots
All measurements display in printer dots.
The unit of measure selected converts all measurements displayed in Label Design. For
example, if the rulers are displayed, they will display in the unit of measure selected.
8.
In the Design Width and Design Height text boxes, enter the width and height of the label.
9.
In the Horz. Print Interval text box, enter the horizontal distance between the left edge of
one label to the left edge of the next label.
This measurement must be at least as large as the label width entered. To include a
horizontal gap between labels, enter a number slightly larger than the width. This text box
is required.
10.
In the Vert. Print Interval text box, enter the vertical distance between the top of one label
to the top of the next label.
This measurement must be at least as large as the label height entered. To include a
vertical gap between labels, enter a number slightly larger than the height. This field is
required.
11.
In the Horz. Count text box, select the number of labels that will be printed side-by-side
across the label stock.
For example, if two labels will be printed side-by-side, select 2.
12.
In the Margin text box, enter the margin along the left edge of the label where text cannot
print.
This text box is required.
13.
To select other label settings:
a.
To set the default colors, select the Colors button.
The system displays the Default Colors dialog box. For information on using this
dialog box, see Setting the Label Default Colors, page 9.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
5-8
Designing Labels
b.
To set label options, select the Options button.
The system displays the Label Options dialog box. For information on using this
dialog box, see Setting the Display Options, page 10.
c.
To select printer options, select the Printer Options button.
The system displays the Printer Options dialog box. For information on using this
dialog box, see Setting the Printer Options, page 14.
d.
To use a label print log for this label, select the Label Print Log button.
The system displays the Table Select dialog box to select a label print log to use
when the label is printed. The table selected displays in the Label Print Log text
box. For information on using this dialog box, see Using a Label Print Log, page
12.
14.
To save the settings for this label, click OK or press (§Enter). To cancel creating a new
label, click Cancel or press (Esc).
Setting the Label Default Colors
To set the default colors for the label and fields, use the following procedure. Legi defaults
to a white background and black foreground.
1.
To display the Default Colors dialog box, use one of the following methods:
A.
Select Colors from the Settings Menu.
B.
Select the Colors button from the Label Settings dialog box.
The system displays the Color Settings dialog box.
Color Settings Dialog Box
2.
For each of the options listed, select the color to use. To select the color, move the
cursor to the list box and press the (£) or (¥) key or click on the up or down arrow in
the list box.
The system will scroll through the colors available.
On-Screen Label
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
Select the color for the label as it will appear on
screen.
5-9
Designing Labels
3.
On-Screen Foreground
Select the default display color for the foreground
for fields. This setting will only affect new fields
that are added; the color of existing fields will not
change.
On-Screen Background
Select the default display color for the background
for fields. This setting will only affect new fields
that are added; the color of existing fields will not
change.
Printed Foreground
Select the printed foreground color (black or white)
for the fields on the label. The other palette colors
are for future support.
Printed Background
Select the printed color (black or white) for the field
background. The other palette colors are for future
support.
To save the colors selected for this label, click OK or press (§Enter). To lose the
selected colors for this label, click Cancel or press (Esc).
Legi returns to the Label Settings dialog box or the Label Design desktop.
4.
If you return to the Label Settings dialog box, click OK or press (§Enter) to
permanently save the colors selected. To display the colors for the current session
only, click Cancel or press (Esc).
Setting the Label Options
To select label options, use the following procedure.
1.
From the Label Settings dialog box, select the Options button.
The system displays the Label Options dialog box.
Label Options Dialog Box
2.
To display graphic fields that are part of the label, select the Display Graphic Fields
check box.
Because displaying graphics uses additional memory and affects program speed, deselect this check box for improved performance.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
5-10
Designing Labels
3.
To have fields overlap one another transparently as they would print, select the Show
Fields as Transparent check box.
If this option is selected, the fields on the label will display overlapping one another
and the fields underneath will still be visible. If this option is not selected and one
field is on top of another, the field beneath will not display where another field
overlaps it. When the label is printed, fields print transparently.
4.
To dynamically update the label screen as changes are made in the Text dialog and
Barcode Dialog, select the Dynamic Screen Updates checkbox.
When this box is selected, the label format will be redrawn on screen as changes are
made to the Text and Barcode dialog boxes. This gives you the chance to see
settings or changes before clicking OK. Because this option can adversely affect
performance, it can be turned off if needed.
5.
To preview a label format before it prints, select one or more of the Label Preview at
Print Time check boxes.
Label Preview at Print Time options allow you to preview a label format before it
prints. By selecting one of following four check boxes, the point at which the Label
Preview screen appears can be adjusted. The Label Preview screen will only appear
when you have clicked the Print button in Print Labels. The four following check
boxes control when the Label Preview screen appears.
6.
Print Labels Time
Select this box to view a preview of the label format
after pressing the Proceed button in Print Labels.
Print Start Time
Select this box to view a preview of the label format
when the print job is started.
Each Queried Label
Select this box to view a preview of the label format
before every label in the queried print run.
Each Serial Label
Select this box to view a preview of the label format
before every computer serialized label in the print
run.
To save the options for this label, click OK or press (§Enter). To cancel the colors for
this label, click Cancel or press (Esc).
Legi returns to the Label Settings dialog box.
7.
To save the options selected, click OK or press (§Enter). To lose the options selected,
click Cancel or press (Esc).
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
5-11
Designing Labels
Using a Label Print Log
The label print log feature allows you to track a label's print information. A label print log is a
database file that is linked to a label. Individual fields in the database file are then linked to fields
in the label. At print time, Legi sends the print information to the label print log, giving you a
record of the label print job.
Following are the general steps for using a label print log:
1.
In Label Design, specify a label print log to link to the label. The file you specify does not
have to exist yet.
2.
Once the label has been created, use the Database Maintenance module to create a database
file with links to the appropriate fields in the label design.
3.
In the Configuration module, select the Update label print logs option.
4.
When the label is submitted as a print job, Legi sends the appropriate information to the
label print log.
5.
View the label print log through the Database Maintenance module or the Audit Trail
module.
Use the following procedures for the specific steps to use label print logs.
Specifying the Label Print Log
To specify the label print log for a particular label, use the following procedure.
1.
In the Label Settings dialog box, in the Label Print Log text box, type the name,
including the path, of the file you will use as a label print log for this label.
If you do not enter the path, the system defaults to the default database directory.
If the file already exists, select the Label Print Log button. The system displays the
Table Select dialog box. Highlight the appropriate database file and double-click the
file name or press (§Enter).
2.
To save the label print log specified, click OK or press (§Enter). To cancel specifying
the label print log, click Cancel or press (Esc).
Creating the Label Print Log
Once the label has been created, link the label field names whose information you want to
appear in the label print log to the database file. Linking is done by naming the field in the
database table the same as the name of the label field. For example, you may have a field
on your label called partnum. If you want a record of the values printed in the partnum
label field, you could make a field in your label print log called partnum.
To create a label print log, use the following procedure. This procedure gives general
guidelines on creating a label print log. For specific information on using the Database
Maintenance module, see Chapter 3, Database Maintenance.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
5-12
Designing Labels
1.
Create a database table.
2.
When specifying the field name, enter the name of the field in the label whose
information you want to capture. Enter the field type for each field, making sure
that the field type matches the type of data that will be captured.
3.
Enter any other standard field names, including:
Stock Name
Label Name
Date
Time
User Name
Total Labels
For more information on standard field names, see Viewing the System Print Log
in Chapter 9, Using the Audit Trail.
4.
To create the table, select the Proceed button .
5.
Save the table with the name specified as the label print log in Label Design.
Configuring the Label Print Log Option
To have Legi update the label print log each time the label is printed, you must make sure
that the label print log option is turned on in Configuration using the Legi Options dialog
box. For information on using the Legi Options dialog box, see Selecting Legi Options in
Chapter 10, Configuring Legi.
Viewing the Label Print Log
After a label has been sent to the printer, Legi will update the label print log. To view the
label print log, use the Audit Trail module or Database Maintenance module.
For information on opening a table using Database Maintenance, see Opening a Database
Table in Chapter 3, Using the Database Maintenance Module. For information on
using the Audit Trail module, see Chapter 9, Using the Audit Trail.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
5-13
Designing Labels
Saving a Label Format
To save changes made to a label, you can either keep the same name and overwrite the existing
format, or select a different format name.
Saving an Existing Format
To save an existing format and overwrite the previous version, on the File Menu, select
Save. The system saves the changes.
Saving a New Format or a Format with a New Name
If you made changes to a label but want to keep the original label, you can save the
changes under a new format name using the following procedure. If you created a new
label, use the following procedure to save the format.
1.
From the File menu, select Save As.
The system displays the Save As dialog box.
2.
Select the new directory and/or drive for the format, and enter the new format name
in the File Name text box.
3.
To save the format with the new format name, click OK or press (§Enter). To cancel
the new format name, click Cancel or press (Esc).
Setting Printer Options
Use the following procedure to select label printer options.
1.
From the Label Settings dialog box, select the Printer Options button.
The system displays the Printer Options dialog box. Following is a sample of this dialog
box.
Printer Options Dialog Box
The options available vary depending on the type of printer selected. The dialog box
above displays two options that may be available. For information on the type of printer
you are using, see Appendix F, Printer Specific Functions.
2.
Select the desired printer options.
3.
To save the changes, click OK or press (§Enter). To lose the changes, click Cancel or press
(Esc).
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
5-14
Designing Labels
Opening a Label Format
To open a label format, use the following procedure.
1.
From the File Menu, select Open.
The system displays the Open dialog box.

NOTE: When you select Open from the File Menu, if another label was already
open, Legi automatically closes that label format.
2.
In the Drives drop-down list box, select the drive where the file is located.
3.
In the Directories list box, use the scroll bar to scroll through the available directories on
the selected drive. Select the appropriate directory.
4.
In the File Name list box, use the scroll bar to find the format you want to open. Highlight
the appropriate file name and click OK or press (§Enter).
The system displays the selected label.
The File menu also displays the last five previously opened label formats. To open one of the last
five opened, click the File menu, then click the label file name to open.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
5-15
Designing Labels
Deleting Label Formats
To delete one or more label formats, use the following procedure
1.
From the File Menu, select Delete.
The system displays the Delete dialog box.
2.
In the Drives drop-down list box, select the drive where the format is located.
3.
In the Directories list box, use the scroll bar to scroll through the available directories on
the selected drive. Select the appropriate directory.
4.
To select the format to delete, scroll through the list of files and highlight the file to delete.
To delete more than one format:


5.
Hold down the left mouse button and drag the pointer down the list. As you drag the
mouse, the files are highlighted. To select non-contiguous files, hold down (Ctrl),
then click the files with the mouse.
Hold down (Shift) and press the (£) or (¥) arrow key. As you press the arrow key, the
files are highlighted.
To delete the file, click OK or press (§Enter). To cancel the delete, click Cancel or press
(Esc).
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
5-16
Designing Labels
Changing Label Settings
To change the settings for a label, use the following procedure. The label settings include the
label size and printing information.
1.
From the Settings Menu, select Label. You can also display the Label Settings dialog box
by double-clicking on a part of the label that is not a field.
2.
Make the appropriate changes to any of the text boxes except the Printer and Print Mode
fields.
Once a label has been designed, you should not change the printer or print mode because a
label is designed for a specific printer and mode.
3.
To change other label settings:
a.
To set the default colors, select the Colors button.
The system displays the Default Colors dialog box. For information on setting the
default colors, see Setting the Label Default Colors, page 9.
b.
To set label options, select the Options button.
The system displays the Label Options dialog box. For information on using this
dialog box, see Setting the Display Options, page 10.
c.
To select printer options, select the Printer Options button.
The system displays the Printer Options dialog box. For information on using this
dialog box, see Setting the Printer Options, page 14.
d.
To use a label print log for this label, select the Label Print Log option.
The system displays the Table Select dialog box to select a label print log to use
when the label is printed. The table selected displays in the Label Print Log text
box. For information on using this dialog box, see Using a Label Print Log, page
12.
4.
To save the settings for this label, click OK or press (§Enter). To lose any changes made,
click Cancel or press (Esc).
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
5-17
Designing Labels
Adding Text
Use text fields to add text to a label. The type of text can range from a constant string that
appears on every label (such as the name of a company or product) to a more complex field that is
linked to a database. This procedure explains how to create the field on the label, but not how to
add the text that the field will contain. To add the text for a field, see Adding the Data
Expression, page 37 or Adding Supplied Input Fields, page 59.
To add text fields to the label, use the following procedure.
1.
Select the text tool in one of the following ways:
A.
From the Add Field Menu, select Text.
B.
Press (Ctrl)-(T).
C.
Select the
tool.
The mouse arrow becomes a crosshair.
2.
Move the crosshair to the area on the label where you want the upper left corner of the text
field to begin. Holding the left mouse button, drag the crosshair to the appropriate field
size and release the mouse button.
When you release the mouse button, the system displays the Text dialog box.
Text Dialog Box
3.
In the Field Name text box, Legi displays the default field name. You can accept this field
name or enter a new name.
The system automatically increments this field starting with 0001 for the first field. If this
field will appear on a label print log, you may want to use a descriptive field name.
In the Data Result text box, for a field that uses data expressions, the system displays the
result of the data expression. For a field that uses supplied data, the system displays the
default data entered, if any.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
5-18
Designing Labels
4.
Select one of the following option buttons to indicate the type of horizontal justification to
use:
Left justify
Align any text in the field to the left.
Right justify
Align any text in the field to the right.
Horizontal justify
Horizontally center any text in the field.
Left and right justify Align text in the field on both the left and the right.
5.
6.
Select one of the following option buttons to indicate the type of vertical justification to
use:
Top justify
Align any text to the top of the field.
Bottom justify
Align any text to the bottom of the field.
Vertical justify
Vertically center any text in the field.
To display the field on the label, select the Display field check box.
If a field is used only for calculations, you can select not to display it.
7.
To print the field on the label, select the Print field check box.
If a field is used only for calculations, you can select not to print it.
8.
9.
In the Orientation drop-down list box, select one of the following to indicate how to orient
the text within the field from the list. To display the list, click anywhere in the field or
press the (¥) key.
Left to Right
Prints the text normally, from left to right.
Top to Bottom
Prints the text sideways, with the text beginning at the top of the
field.
Right to Left
Prints the text upside down, with the text beginning at the right of the
field.
Bottom to Top
Prints the text sideways, with the text beginning at the bottom of the
field.
To have the text wrap within the field, select the Auto wrap check box.
For example, if a field is very narrow and the text would take up more space than is
available in the field, select this option to have the text wrap to fit the field size. If this
option is not selected, all of the text may not appear in the field.
10.
To have the data fit dynamically within the field size, select the Dynamic fit check box.
When this option is selected, the font size selected for the text will change depending on
the field size so the text will completely fill the field. For example, if you create a large
field with a small amount of text, the font size of the text will be large enough to fill the
field.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
5-19
Designing Labels
11.
To specify where text data will come from, complete one of the following steps:
A.
To use the Expression dialog box to specify the text, select the Expression option
button. To display the Expression dialog box, select the Expression button.
When the Expression option button is selected, the Expression button becomes
available. For more information on using the Expression dialog box, see Adding
the Data Expression, page 37.
B.
To create a supplied data field, select the Supplied Data option button. To display
the Supplied Input dialog box, select the Supplied button.
When the Supplied Data option button is selected, the Supplied button becomes
available. For more information on using the Supplied Input dialog box, see
Creating Supplied Data Fields, page 59.
Use a supplied data field to enter the information for the field at print time.
12.
To specify the default colors for the field and any new fields that will be added, select the
Colors button.
The system displays the Color Settings dialog box. For more information on using this
dialog box, see Setting the Display Colors for a Field, page 63.
13.
To specify the position or the size of the field, select the Position/Size button.
The system displays the Position/Size dialog box. For more information on setting the
position and the size, see Setting the Position/Size for a Field, page 64.
14.
To specify the font for the field, select the Font button.
The system displays the Font dialog box. For more information on setting the font, see
Setting the Font for a Text Field, page 21.
15.
To add the field and save the changes on this dialog box or any of the windows selected
using the buttons, select OK or press (Alt)-(O). To lose the settings and not create the field,
click Cancel or press (Esc).
If you have changed options on any of the dialog boxes available from the buttons on this
window, you must select OK at this window to save those changes also. If you cancel the
changes, the system loses the changes on this dialog box and any of the dialog boxes
accessed from the buttons.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
5-20
Designing Labels
Setting the Font for a Text Field
For text fields, you can select different fonts to use for the text. To select the font for a text
field, use the following procedure.
1.
From the Text dialog box, select the Font button.
The system displays the Font dialog box.
Font Dialog Box
2.
Select a font to use from one of the following list boxes:
Printer Fonts
Select the font supported by the printer to use for the label.
To display the list of available fonts, click anywhere in the
field or press the down arrow key.
Custom Fonts
Select the custom font that is available in your printer and
configured for use by Legi. To display the list of available
custom fonts, click anywhere in the field or press the down
arrow key.
True Type Fonts
Select the True Type font to use for this field. True Type
fonts use more printer memory and can slow down printing.
To display the list of available fonts, click anywhere in the
field or press the down arrow key.
As you select different fonts, the system displays a sample of the font in the Sample
box.
3.
Under Unit of Measure, select one of the following option buttons for the unit of
measure to use for entering and displaying the measurements.
Inches
Measurements display in inches.
Centimeters
Measurements display in centimeters.
Points
Measurements display in point size.
Dots
Measurements display in printer dots.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
5-21
Designing Labels
The unit of measure selected converts the measurements displayed in this dialog
box.
4.
In the Common Sizes drop-down list box, select the size to use for the font selected.
To display the list of available sizes, click anywhere in the drop-down list box or
press (¥).
The system displays a sample of the size in the Sample window.
5.
For a scalable font only, in the Text size group box, set the exact text size in the
Width and Height text boxes.
The fields default to the size selected in the Common Sizes drop-down list box. This
drop-down list box can only be changed if you have selected a scalable font.
6.
In the Magnification group box, select the magnification to use for the width and
height of the text.
Unless the width and height are the same, the text will be distorted. This group box
is not available for a scalable font.
7.
To print the text in reverse, select the Inverse check box.
If you select this check box, the foreground and background colors will switch
where the text appears. For example, if the text would normally be black with a
white background, select this check box to print the text in white with a black
background:
8.
To use an inverse overhang, enter the width and height of the overhang in the
Inverse Overhang group box.
This field is only available if the Inverse check box is selected. The inverse
overhang is the space beyond the text where the reverse continues. For example, if
you enter .1 inches for the width and height, the reverse will continue .1 inches
around the text:
9.
To change the weight, click the down arrow in the Weight list box and select from
Light, Normal, Bold, or Extra Bold. This option is available only for soft fonts.
10.
If you selected a weight, select the Accurate Sizing check box to use special
computations to accurately determine the size of certain fonts. Check this option if
any portion of the last letter in a field is cut-off, which happens most often with
italicized fonts.

11.
NOTE: Checking this box slows down the time it takes to draw the field on a
label. Use this option only when necessary.
To print the text in italics, select the Italic check box. This option is available only
for soft fonts.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
5-22
Designing Labels
12.
To print the text underlined, select the Underline check box. This option is available
only for soft fonts.
13.
To print the text with strikeouts, select the Strikeout check box. This option is
available only for soft fonts.
14.
To add the font information, click OK or press (Alt)-(O). To lose the settings and not
create the field, click Cancel or press (Esc).
The system returns to the Text dialog box.
15.

To save the font information for this field, click OK or press (Alt)-(O). To lose the
font information, click Cancel or press (Esc).
NOTE: The label is updated as you make changes in the Font and Expression dialog
boxes. This allows you to see the effect of your changes on the label format without
having to first save the changes and exit. Be sure to move the Text dialog box so the
portion of the label you are editing is visible underneath.
Viewing and Updating the Fonts for a Text Field
Use this procedure to view and update the fonts for text fields on the label.
1.
Within Label Design, click on a text field on the label.
2.
From the Options menu, select Font Info.
The system displays the Font Information window.
Font Information Window
This window displays the font information for the currently selected field.
3.
For the currently selected field, you can update the following font information. Note
that as you make changes, the text field on the label will update to show the changes.
Printer
Displays the currently selected printer. Click the down arrow
to select fonts for a different printer.
Font
Displays the currently selected font. Click the down arrow to
select another font. The system displays only the fonts for the
currently selected printer.
Size
Displays the currently selected size. Click the down arrow to
select another size.
Weight
If the weight is available for the currently selected font, this
check box will be enabled. You can then click the down
arrow to select Light, Normal, Bold, or Extra Bold.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
5-23
Designing Labels
Inverse
To print the text in reverse, select the Inverse check box.
If you select this check box, the foreground and background
colors will switch where the text appears. For example, if the
text would normally be black with a white background, select
this check box to print the text in white with a black
background:
4.
Italic
Print the text in italics. This option is only available for soft
fonts.
Underline
Print the text underlined. This option is only available for
soft fonts.
Strikeout
Print the text with strikeouts. This option is only available
for soft fonts.
Auto Wrap
To have the text wrap within the field, select the Auto wrap
check box. For example, if a field is very narrow and the text
would take up more space than is available in the field, select
this option to have the text wrap to fit the field size. If this
option is not selected, all of the text may not appear in the
field.
Dynamic Fit
To have the data fit dynamically within the field size, select
the Dynamic Fit check box. When this option is selected, the
font size selected for the text will change depending on the
field size so the text will completely fill the field. For
example, if you create a large field with a small amount of
text, the font size of the text will be large enough to fill the
field.
Width
For a scalable font only, set the exact text width in the Width
text box.
Height
For a scalable font only, set the exact text height in the Height
text box.
To close the Font Information window, from the Options menu, select the Font Info
option again so it is not checked.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
5-24
Designing Labels
Adding Barcodes
The Label Design module allows you to select the type of barcode to include on the label. For
information on the different barcode types supported by Legi, see Appendix D. This procedure
explains how to create the field on the label, but not how to add the barcode data that the field
will contain. To add the data on which the barcode will be based, see Adding the Data
Expression, page 37 or Adding Supplied Input Fields, page 59.
To add barcodes to a label, use the following procedure.
1.
Select the barcode tool in one of the following ways:
A.
From the Add Field Menu, select Barcode.
B.
Press (Ctrl)-(B).
C.
Select the
tool.
The mouse arrow becomes a crosshair.
2.
Move the crosshair to the area on the label where you want the upper left corner of the
barcode field to begin. Holding the left mouse button, drag the crosshair to the appropriate
field size and release the mouse button.
When you release the mouse button, the system displays the Barcode dialog box.
Barcode Dialog Box
3.
In the Field Name text box, Legi displays the default field name. You can accept this field
name or enter a new name.
The system automatically increments this field starting with 0001 for the first field. If this
field will appear on a label print log, you may want to use a descriptive field name.
In the Data Result text box, for a field that uses data expressions, the system displays the
result of the data expression. For a field that uses supplied data, the system displays the
default data entered, if any.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
5-25
Designing Labels
4.
Select one of the following option buttons to indicate the type of horizontal justification to
use:
Left justify
Align the barcode to the left in the field.
Right justify
Align the barcode to the right in the field.
Horizontal justify
Horizontally center the barcode in the field.

5.
NOTE: A barcode does not have vertical justification because it will be sized to the
height of the field automatically.
To display the field on the label, select the Display field check box.
If a field is used only for calculations, you can select not to display it.
6.
To print the field on the label when the label is printed, select the Print field check box.
If a field is used only for calculations, you can select not to print it.
7.
8.
In the Orientation drop-down list box, select the type of orientation to use for the barcode
within the field. To display the list, click anywhere in the drop-down list box or press (¥).
Left to Right
Prints the barcode normally, from left to right.
Top to Bottom
Prints the barcode sideways, with the barcode beginning at the top of
the field.
Right to Left
Prints the barcode upside down, with the barcode beginning at the
right.
Bottom to Top
Prints the barcode sideways, with the barcode beginning at the
bottom of the field.
In the Human readable check box, select to indicate whether the text associated with the
barcode will be displayed.
If this check box is not selected, only the barcode will be displayed.
9.
In the Barcode type drop-down list box, select the type of barcode to use. To display the
list, click anywhere in the drop-down list box or press (¥).
For information on the different types of barcodes, see Appendix D, Printer Barcodes.
10.
In the Barcode size drop-down list box, select the size for the barcode. To display the list,
click anywhere in the drop-down list box or press (¥).
The sizes available change depending on the type of barcode selected.
11.
To specify where the barcode data will come from, complete one of the following steps:
A.
To use the Expression dialog box to specify the text, select the Expression option
button. To display the Expression dialog box, select the Expression button.
When the Expression option button is selected, the Expression button becomes
available. For more information on using the Expression dialog box, see Adding
the Data Expression, page 37.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
5-26
Designing Labels
B.
To create a supplied data field, select the Supplied Data option button. To display
the Supplied Input dialog box, select the Supplied button.
When the Supplied Data option button is selected, the Supplied button becomes
available. For more information on using the Supplied Input dialog box, see Adding
Supplied Input Fields, page 59.
A supplied data field allows you to enter the information for the field at print time.
12.
To specify the default colors for the field and any new fields that will be added, select the
Colors button.
The system displays the Color Settings dialog box. For more information on using this
dialog box, see Setting the Display Colors for a Field, page 63.
13.
To specify the position or the size of the field, select the Position/Size button.
The system displays the Position/Size dialog box. For more information on setting the
position and the size, see Setting the Position/Size for a Field, page 64.
14.
To add the field and save the changes on this dialog box or any of the dialog boxes selected
using the buttons, click OK or press (Alt)-(O). To lose the settings and not create the field,
click Cancel or press (Esc).
If you have changed options on any of the dialog boxes available from the buttons on this
dialog box, you must select OK at this dialog box to save those changes also. If you
cancel the changes, the system loses the changes on this dialog box and any of the dialog
boxes accessed from the buttons.
If the barcode contains invalid data, when click OK, the system displays the message: One
of the barcodes on this label contains invalid characters. Click OK. The system does
allow you to continue. However, if the invalid characters are at the end of the expression,
the system will not display the invalid characters on the label. The invalid characters will
be displayed on the Expression window if you edit the expression.

NOTE: The label is updated as you make changes in the Barcode dialog. This
option allows you to see the effect of your changes on the label format without
having to first save the changes and exit. Be sure to move the Barcode dialog so the
portion of the label you are editing is visible underneath.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
5-27
Designing Labels
Adding Graphics
You can add graphics to the label format that are in either PCX or BMP (bitmap) format.
However, Legi does not support 24-bit true color PCX or BMP formats. To add graphics to a
label field, use the following procedure. This procedure explains how to create the field on the
label, but not how to add the graphic that the field will contain. To add the graphic file, see
Adding the Data Expression, page 37 or Adding Supplied Input Fields, page 59.
1.
Select the graphic tool in one of the following ways:
A.
From the Add Field Menu, select Graphic.
B.
Press (Ctrl)-(G).
C.
Select the
tool.
The mouse arrow becomes a crosshair.
2.
Move the crosshair to the area on the label where you want the upper left corner of the
graphic field to begin. Holding the left mouse button, drag the crosshair to the appropriate
field size and release the mouse button.
When you release the mouse button, the system displays the Graphic dialog box.
Graphic Dialog Box
3.
In the Field Name text box, Legi displays the default field name. You can accept this field
name or enter a new name.
The system automatically increments this field starting with 0001 for the first field. If this
field will appear on a label print log, you may want to enter a descriptive field name.
In the Data Result text box, for a field that uses data expressions, the system displays the
result of the data expression. For a field that uses supplied data, the system displays the
default data entered, if any.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
5-28
Designing Labels
4.
5.
6.
Select one of the following option buttons to indicate the type of horizontal justification to
use:
Left justify
Align the graphic in the field to the left.
Right justify
Align the graphic in the field to the right.
Horizontal justify
Horizontally center the graphic in the field.
Select one of the following option buttons to indicate the type of vertical justification to
use:
Top justify
Align the graphic to the top of the field.
Bottom justify
Align the graphic to the bottom of the field.
Vertical justify
Vertically center the graphic in the field.
To display the field on the label, select the Display field check box.
If you do not display the graphic, the system displays the field with the word GRAPHIC
within the field.
7.
To print the field on the label, select the Print field check box.
For example, you may not want to print a field that is used only for calculations.
8.
9.
In the Orientation drop-down list box, select how to orient the graphic within the field
from the list. To display the list, click anywhere in the drop-down list box or press (¥).
Left to Right
Prints the graphic normally, from left to right.
Top to Bottom
Prints the graphic sideways, with the graphic beginning at the top of
the field.
Right to Left
Prints the graphic upside down, with the graphic beginning at the
right of the field.
Bottom to Top
Prints the graphic sideways, with the graphic beginning at the bottom
of the field.
To fit the graphic to the field size automatically, click the Dynamic Fit check box.
Increasing or decreasing the field size will resize the graphic accordingly.
10.
If you select the dynamic fit option, click the Fixed Aspect Ratio check box to keep the
aspect ratio of the graphic constant.
When this box is checked, the width and height of the field will always be in the same
proportion to each other. For example, a circle can be resized to an oval. However, if fixed
aspect ratio is checked, the field can only be resized to boundaries that will maintain a
perfect circle shape. This option is useful when you need to change the size of a graphic,
but you want a minimum of distortion.
11.
In the Horizontal Mag. drop-down list box, select the amount to horizontally stretch the
graphic. To display the list of available magnifications, click anywhere in the drop-down
list box or press (¥).
Selecting an option greater than one will make the graphic wider. You can select a number
from 1 through 9 (inclusive). This option does not change the field size.
12.
In the Vertical Mag. drop-down list box, select the amount to vertically stretch the graphic.
To display the list of available magnifications, click anywhere in the drop-down list box or
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
5-29
Designing Labels
press (¥).
Selecting an option greater than one will make the graphic taller. You can select a number
from 1 through 9 (inclusive). This option does not change the field size.
The vertical magnification may vary depending on the type of printer you are using.
13.
To specify the graphic that will appear in the field, complete one of the following steps:
A.
To use the Expression dialog box to specify the text, select the Expression option
button. To display the Expression dialog box, select the Expression button.
When the Expression option button is selected, the Expression button becomes
available. For more information on using the Expression dialog box, see Adding
the Data Expression, page 37.
B.
To create a supplied data field, select the Supplied Data option button. To display
the Supplied Input dialog box, select the Supplied button.
When the Supplied Data option button is selected, the Supplied button becomes
available. For more information on using the Supplied Input dialog box, see Adding
Supplied Input Fields, page 59.
A supplied data field allows you to enter information for the field at print time.
14.
To specify the default colors for the field and any new fields that will be added, select the
Colors button.
The system displays the Colors Settings dialog box. For more information on using this
dialog box, see Setting the Display Colors for a Field, page 63.
15.
To specify the position or the size of the field, select the Position/Size button.
The system displays the Position/Size dialog box. For more information on setting the
position and the size, see Setting the Position/Size for a Field, page 64.
16.
To add the field and save the changes on this dialog box or any of the dialog boxes selected
using the buttons, click OK or press (Alt)-(O). To lose the settings and not create the field,
click Cancel or press (Esc).
If you have changed options on any of the dialog boxes available from the buttons on this
dialog box, you must select OK at this dialog box to save those changes also. If you cancel
the changes, the system loses the changes on this dialog box and any of the dialog boxes
accessed from the buttons.

NOTE: The label is updated as you make changes in the Graphic dialog. This
allows you to see the effect of your changes on the label format without having to
first save the changes and exit. Be sure to move the Graphic dialog so the portion of
the label you are editing is visible underneath.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
5-30
Designing Labels
Adding Lines
To add a horizontal or vertical line to the label, use the following procedure.
1.
Select the line tool in one of the following ways:
A.
From the Add Field Menu, select Line.
B.
Press (Ctrl)-(L).
C.
Select the
tool.
The mouse arrow becomes a crosshair.
2.
Move the crosshair to the area on the label where you want the upper left corner of the line
to begin. Holding the left mouse button, drag to the appropriate line length and release the
mouse button.
When you release the mouse button, the system displays the line using the default line
thickness specified.
Editing Lines
To change the settings for a line field, use the following procedure.
1.
Select the line field you want to change.
2.
Double-click on the field.
The system displays the Line dialog box.
Line Dialog Box
3.
In the Field Name text box, Legi displays the default field name. You can accept
this field name or enter a new name.
The system automatically increments this field starting with 0001 for the first field.
4.
Under Unit of Measure, select one of the following option buttons for the unit of
measure to use for entering and displaying the measurements.
Inches
Measurements display in inches.
Centimeters
Measurements display in centimeters.
Points
Measurements display in point size.
Dots
Measurements display in printer dots.
The unit of measure selected converts the measurements displayed here.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
5-31
Designing Labels
5.
In the Horizontal Position and Vertical Position text boxes, enter the position of the
upper left point of the line on the label.
The system displays the current position in these fields.
6.
In the Horizontal Size text box, enter the horizontal size of the line.
For a horizontal line, this text box indicates the length. For a vertical line, this text
box indicates the width. The system displays the current horizontal size in this text
box.
7.
In the Vertical Size text box, enter the vertical size of the line.
For a horizontal line, this text box indicates the width. For a vertical line, this text
box indicates the length. The system displays the current vertical size in this text
box.
8.
To display the field on the label, select the Display field check box.
9.
To print the field on the label, select the Print field check box.
10.
To specify the colors for the field and the default for new fields that will be added,
select the Colors button.
The system displays the Color Settings dialog box. For more information on using
this dialog box, see Setting the Display Colors for a Field, page 63.
11.
To save the settings for the line, click OK or press (Alt)-(O). To lose the settings,
click Cancel or press (Esc).
If you have changed options on the Color Settings dialog box, you must select OK at
this dialog box to save those changes also. If you cancel the changes, the system
loses the changes on this dialog box and on the Color Settings dialog box.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
5-32
Designing Labels
Adding Boxes
To add a box to a label, use the following procedure.
1.
Select the box tool in one of the following ways:
A.
From the Add Field Menu, select Box.
B.
Press (Ctrl)-(B).
C.
Select the
tool.
The mouse arrow becomes a crosshair.
2.
Move the crosshair to the area on the label where you want the upper left corner of the box
to begin. Holding the left mouse button, drag to the appropriate box length and width and
release the mouse button.
When you release the mouse button, the system displays the box using the default line
thickness specified.
Editing Boxes
The Box dialog box allows you to manually set the horizontal and vertical position of a
box, as well as the size of the box and the line thickness. To change the settings for a box
field, use the following procedure.
1.
Select the box field you want to change.
2.
Double-click on the field.
The system displays the Box dialog box.
Box Dialog Box
3.
In the Field Name text box, Legi displays the default field name. You can accept
this field name or enter a new name.
The system automatically increments this field starting with 0001 for the first field.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
5-33
Designing Labels
4.
Under Unit of Measure, select one of the following option buttons for the unit of
measure to use for entering and displaying the measurements.
Inches
Measurements display in inches.
Centimeters
Measurements display in centimeters.
Points
Measurements display in point size.
Dots
Measurements display in printer dots.
The unit of measure selected converts the measurements displayed in this dialog
box.
5.
In the Horizontal Position and Vertical Position fields, enter the position of the
upper left corner of the box on the label.
The system displays the current position in these fields.
6.
In the Horizontal Size text box, enter the width of the box.
The system displays the current width in this text box.
7.
In the Vertical Size text box, enter the length of the box.
The system displays the current length in this text box.
8.
In the Horizontal Line Thickness text box, enter the thickness of the horizontal lines
on the box.
The system displays the current thickness in this text box.
9.
In the Vertical Line Thickness text box, enter the thickness of the vertical lines on
the box.
The system displays the current thickness in this text box.
10.
To display the field on the label, select the Display field check box.
11.
To print the field on the label, select the Print field check box.
12.
To specify the colors for the field and the default for new fields that will be added,
select the Colors button.
The system displays the Color Settings dialog box. For more information on using
this dialog box, see Setting the Display Colors for a Field, page 63.
13.
To save the settings for the box, click OK or press (Alt)-(O). To lose the settings,
click Cancel or press (Esc).
If you have changed options on the Color Settings dialog box, you must select OK at
this dialog box to save those changes also. If you cancel the changes, the system
loses the changes on this dialog box and on the Color Settings dialog box.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
5-34
Designing Labels
Adding Raw Fields
The Raw dialog box allows you to include printer commands that are sent directly to the printer.
Use this feature for a printer that includes features that Legi does not support. For example, if the
printer supports a barcode that Legi does not support, use the raw command to print the barcode
on the label design. For information on the commands that your printer supports, see your
printer's reference manual.
This procedure explains how to create the field on the label, but not how to add the actual
command for the field. To add the raw command for a field, see Adding the Data Expression,
page 37 or Adding Supplied Input Fields, page 59.
1.
Create a raw field in one of the following ways:
A.
From the Add Field Menu, select Raw.
B.
Press (Ctrl)-(R).
The mouse arrow becomes a crosshair.
2.
Move the crosshair to the area on the label where you want the upper left corner of the field
to begin. Holding the left mouse button, drag to the appropriate size and release the mouse
button.
When you release the mouse button, the system displays the Raw dialog box.
Raw Dialog Box
3.
In the Field Name text box, Legi displays the default field name. You can accept this field
name or enter a new name.
The system automatically increments this field starting with 0001 for the first field. If this
field will appear on a label print log, you may want to enter a descriptive field name.
In the Data Result text box, for a field that uses data expressions, the system displays the
result of the data expression. For a field that uses supplied data, the system displays the
default data entered, if any.
4.
To display the field on the label, select the Display field check box.
For example, you may not want to display a field that is used only for calculations. If you
do not display the field, Legi displays the field with the word RAW within the field.
5.
To print the field on the label, select the Print field check box.
For example, you may not want to print a field that is used only for calculations.
6.
Select the Use field origin check box to use the starting location specified on the label for
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
5-35
Designing Labels
the raw field. You can specify a different location within the raw command.
7.
To specify the data for this field, complete one of the following steps:
A.
To use the Expression dialog box to specify the text, select the Expression option
button. To display the Expression dialog box, select the Expression button.
When the Expression option button is selected, the Expression button becomes
available. For more information on using the Expression dialog box, see Adding
the Data Expression, page 37.
B.
To create a supplied data field, select the Supplied Data option button. To display
the Supplied Input dialog box, select the Supplied button.
When the Supplied Data option button is selected, the Supplied button becomes
available. For more information on using the Supplied Input dialog box, see Adding
Supplied Input Fields, page 59.
A supplied data field allows the user to enter the information for the field at print
time.
8.
To specify the default colors for the field and any new fields that will be added, select the
Colors button.
The system displays the Color Settings dialog box. For more information on using this
dialog box, see Setting the Display Colors for a Field, page 63.
9.
To specify the position or the size of the field, select the Position/Size button.
The system displays the Position/Size dialog box. For more information on setting the
position and the size, see Setting the Position/Size for a Field, page 64.
10.
To add the field and save the changes on this dialog box or any of the windows selected
using the buttons, select OK or press (Alt)-(O). To lose the settings and not create the field,
click Cancel or press (Esc).
If you have changed options on any of the windows available from the buttons on this
dialog box, you must select OK at this dialog box to save those changes also. If you
cancel the changes, the system loses the changes on this dialog box and any of the
windows accessed from the buttons.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
5-36
Designing Labels
Adding the Data Expression
After creating a text, barcode, graphic, or raw field, you must select the type of data the field will
contain. The type of data expression can be one of the following:

Constant Data

Reference Fields

Database Data

Queried Database Data

Text File

Date or Time
These data expression controls help build the data expression, but at the lowest level all data for
the label is processed using data expressions, except for supplied data. Each of these controls
build the most common types of data expressions for you. For example, suppose you want to
include a text file as the data expression for a text field. In the Data Source dialog box, you
would select the Text File option button, then select the text file to include. These selections are
actually building a data expression that would look like this:
textfile("c:\legiwin\filename.txt")
Instead of having to type in the command textfile followed by the correct syntax for the file
name, you only have to select the correct command and file name. Other data expression
commands are available, but the option buttons cover the most commonly used commands. For
information on using other commands, see Manually Building a Data Expression, page 47.
This section explains how to add each type of data. The procedures are the same for each field
type (text, barcode, graphic, and raw).
Adding Constant Data
This procedure explains how to add constant data for a field that will remain constant every
time the label is printed. For example, the label may include a company's return address, a
product name, or a company logo graphic. Since this type of information will not change,
use a constant data field to enter this type of information.
1.
Create a text, barcode, graphic, or raw field.
2.
Select the Expression option button.
3.
Select the Expression button.
The system displays the Expression dialog box.
4.
Select the Constant option button.
The bottom half of the dialog box displays the Constant Data controls.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
5-37
Designing Labels
Constant Data Controls
5.
6.
In the Constant Data text box, type the constant data to use:

For text fields, type the data that will print on each label.

For barcode fields, type the data to translate the barcode into for each label.

For graphic fields, if you know the graphic name, type the file name here,
including the path. To select a file, see step 6. The graphic specified will
print on each label

For raw fields, type the printer commands for each label.
To pad the field data to length specified in the Length list box, select the Enable
Padding check box.
Available only for Constant, Reference Fields, Database, or Text File data sources.
This option works with the Length option when a data source is shorter than the
length specified. For example, when the Pad Right option is selected, if the data
length is 12, and the data for the field is 10 characters long, the last two places for
the data will be occupied by the fill character. When the Pad Left option is selected,
the first two characters are occupied by the fill character, and the last 10 characters
are data.
Complete the following padding information:
A.
In the Fill Character list box, select the fill character with which to pad the
field, or type a character.
This option is available only if you select the Enable Padding check box.
B.
Select either the Pad Left or the Pad Right option button.
The system will place the fill character to the left or right of the data.
7.
To limit the data length of the field, in the Length list box, select the total data
length.
This option is available only when you select the Enable Padding check box or
when the serial number option is set to Yes.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
5-38
Designing Labels
8.
For graphic fields only, to select a graphic file, select the Graphic button.
The system displays the Graphic Select dialog box. Use the following procedure to
select a file and return to the Constant Data controls:
9.
A.
In the Drives drop-down list box, select the drive where the file is located.
B.
In the Directories list box, use the scroll bar to scroll through the available
directories on the selected drive. Select the appropriate directory.
C.
In the File Name list box, scroll through the list of files and highlight the file.
To save the constant data, click OK or press (Alt)-(O). To lose the constant data, click
Cancel or press (Esc).
The system returns to the Text, Barcode, Graphic, or Raw dialog box.
10.
To save the data entered and return to the label design window, click OK or press
(Alt)-(O). To lose the constant data, click Cancel or press (Esc).
Adding Reference Fields
Reference fields allow you to reference other fields on the label. The field will combine
data from the fields being referenced in the order that they are referenced. For example,
there may be three non-printing text fields that hold the first, middle, and last name of a
client. These three fields could be combined and printed as a single reference field.
1.
Create a text, barcode, graphic, or raw field.
2.
Select the Expression option button.
3.
Select the Expression button.
The system displays the Expression dialog box.
4.
Select the Reference Fields option button.
The bottom half of the dialog box displays the Reference Fields controls.
Reference Fields Controls
The List of Fields list box on the right displays all of the field names for the field on
the label.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
5-39
Designing Labels
5.
To select a field to reference, highlight the field name in the List of Fields list box
and click the Add button.
The system adds the field name to the Referenced Fields list box.
You can reference more than one field, and you can add a field more than once.
6.
To remove a field name that you do not wish to reference, highlight the field name
in the Referenced Fields list box and click the Remove button.
7.
To pad the field data to the length specified in the Length list box, select the Enable
Padding check box.
The padding option is available for Reference Fields only when the Serial Number
option is set to Yes.
This option works with the Length option when a data source is shorter than the
length specified. For example, when the Pad Right option is selected, if the data
length is 12, and the data for the field is 10 characters long, the last two places for
the data will be occupied by the fill character. When the Pad Left option is selected,
the first two characters are occupied by the fill character, and the last 10 characters
are data.
Complete the following padding information:
A.
In the Fill Character list box, select the fill character with which to pad the
field, or type a character.
This option is available only if you select the Enable Padding check box.
B.
Select either the Pad Left or the Pad Right option button.
The system will place the fill character to the left or right of the data.
8.
To limit the data length of the reference field, in the Start list box, select the position
at which you want to begin the data. In the Length list box, select the total data
length.
The length option is available only when you select the Enable Padding check box.
For example, suppose the field you are referencing contains the following product
number: 09-1234567890-AXY. To have the middle section of the numbers print on
the label, type 4 in the Start list box and 10 in the list box field for total data length.
The field will only contain the numbers between the dashes: 1234567890.
9.
To save the data, click OK or press (Alt)-(O). To lose the data, click Cancel or press
(Esc).
The system returns to the previous dialog box. The Data Result text box displays
the result of the expression.
10.
To save the data expression, click OK or press (Alt)-(O). To lose the data expression,
click Cancel or press (Esc).
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
5-40
Designing Labels
Adding Database Table Data
The data for a field can be supplied by a selected database. To create a database data field
that is keyed to another field on the label, use the following procedure.

NOTE: Because the term field refers to fields in both a database table and a label
format, the following overview uses the term database field to indicate a field from
a database table. Label field refers to a label format field.
Following are brief examples of how database fields can be used with Label Design field
types.
Text
Print the text from a database field in a label field.
Barcode
Translate the data from a database field into a barcode field.
Graphic
Select the graphic name from a database file.
Raw
Select a raw command from a database file.
Before beginning this procedure, you should have a field on the label that contains data
that matches the key database field for the appropriate record in the table. This label field
will be keyed to the label field you are creating.
1.
Create a text, barcode, graphic, or raw field.
2.
Select the Expression option button.
3.
Select the Expression button.
The system displays the Expression dialog box.
4.
Select the Database option button.
The bottom half of the dialog box displays the Database Table controls.
Database Table Controls
5.
To select the table to use, select the Table button.
The system displays the Table Select dialog box.
6.
In the Drives drop-down list box, select the drive where the file is located.
7.
In the Directories list box, use the scroll bar to scroll through the available
directories on the selected drive. Select the appropriate directory.
8.
In the File Name list box, scroll through the list of files and highlight the file.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
5-41
Designing Labels
9.
To select the file, click OK or press (§Enter). To cancel selecting the file, click
Cancel or press (Esc).
The system displays the table name in the Database Table text box.
10.
In the Key Field in Label drop-down list box, select the label field that contains the
data used to select the database record.
For example, if the field you are referencing contains the data 133, the system will
select the table record whose key field contains 133.
11.
In the Return Field in Table drop-down list box, select the database field data that
will be used for this label field.
For example, if the system selected the record whose key database field contains
133, and the database field selected here is Product Name, then the product name
will print in this label field for the appropriate database record.
12.
To pad the field data to the length specified in the Length list box, select the Enable
Padding check box.
Available only for Constant, Reference Fields, Database, or Text File data sources.
This option works with the Length option when a data source is shorter than the
length specified. For example, when the Pad Right option is selected, if the data
length is 12, and the data for the field is 10 characters long, the last two places for
the data will be occupied by the fill character. When the Pad Left option is selected,
the first two characters are occupied by the fill character, and the last 10 characters
are data.
Complete the following padding information:
A.
In the Fill Character list box, select the fill character with which to pad the
field, or type a character.
This option is available only if you select the Enable Padding check box.
B.
Select either the Pad Left or the Pad Right option button.
The system will place the fill character to the left or right of the data.
13.
To limit the data length, in the Start list box, select the position at which you want to
begin the data. In the Length list box, select the total data length.
The length option is available only when you select the Enable Padding check box
or when the serial number option is set to Yes.
For example, if the data being returned is too long, you can limit the length. If you
type 10 in the Length list box and 1 in the Start list box and the table field contains
more than 10 characters, it will return only the first 10 characters.
14.
To save the data, click OK or press (Alt)-(O). To lose the data, click Cancel or press
(Esc).
The system returns to the previous dialog box. The Data Result text box displays
the result of the expression. For a database, it should display the data retrieved from
the database field specified.
15.
To save the data expression, click OK or press (Alt)-(O). To lose the data expression,
click Cancel or press (Esc).
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
5-42
Designing Labels
Entering a Queried Database Field
The data for a field can be supplied by a selected database. To create a database data field
that will use a query to select the data from a database table, use the following procedure.
This procedure only creates the query field. The actual query is specified at print time,
using the Print Labels module. For more information, see Performing a Queried Label
Print in Chapter 4, Printing Labels.

NOTE: Because the term field refers to fields in both a database table and a label
format, the following overview uses the term database field to indicate a field from a
database table. Label field refers to a label format field.
1.
Create a text, barcode, graphic, or raw field.
2.
Select the Expression option button.
3.
Select the Expression button.
The system displays the Expression dialog box.
4.
Select the Database option button.
The bottom half of the dialog box displays the Database Table controls.
Database Table Controls: Query
Note that when the Query check box is selected, the Key Field in Label field is no
longer available to select.
5.
To select the table to use, select the Table button.
The system displays the Table Select dialog box.
6.
In the Drives drop-down list box, select the drive where the file is located.
7.
In the Directories list box, use the scroll bar to scroll through the available
directories on the selected drive. Select the appropriate directory.
8.
In the File Name list box, scroll through the list of files and highlight the file.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
5-43
Designing Labels
9.
To select the file, click OK or press (§Enter). To cancel selecting the file, click
Cancel or press (Esc).
The system displays the table name in the Database Table controls.
10.
To create a queried database data field, select the Query check box.
11.
In the Return Field in Table drop-down list box, select the database field that holds
the data that will be used for this label field.
When the label is being printed and the query is set up, the system will print a label
for each record that matches the query. This label field will contain the data from
the database field selected here.
12.
To pad the field data to the length specified in the Length list box, select the Enable
Padding check box.
Available only for Constant, Reference Fields, Database, or Text File data sources.
This option works with the Length option when a data source is shorter than the
length specified. For example, when the Pad Right option is selected, if the data
length is 12, and the data for the field is 10 characters long, the last two places for
the data will be occupied by the fill character. When the Pad Left option is selected,
the first two characters are occupied by the fill character, and the last 10 characters
are data.
Complete the following padding information:
A.
In the Fill Character list box, select the fill character with which to pad the
field, or type a character.
This option is available only if you select the Enable Padding check box.
B.
Select either the Pad Left or the Pad Right option button.
The system will place the fill character to the left or right of the data.
13.
To limit the data length, in the Start list box, select the position at which you want to
begin the data. In the Length list box, select the total data length.
The length option is available only when you select the Enable Padding check box
or when the serial number option is set to Yes.
For example, if the data being returned is too long, you can limit the length. If you
type 10 in the Length list box and 1 in the Start list box and the table field contains
more than 10 characters, it will return only the first 10 characters.
14.
To save the data, click OK or press (Alt)-(O). To lose the data, click Cancel or press
(Esc).
The system returns to the previous dialog box. The Data Result text box displays
the result of the expression. For a queried database print field, it should display a
blank field.
15.
To save the data expression, click OK or press (Alt)-(O). To lose the data expression,
click Cancel or press (Esc).
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
5-44
Designing Labels
Adding a Text File
To retrieve the contents of a text file in a field, use the following procedure.
1.
Create a text, barcode, graphic, or raw field.
2.
Select the Expression option button.
3.
Select the Expression button.
The system displays the Expression dialog box.
4.
Select the Text File option button.
The bottom half of the dialog box displays the Text File controls.
Text File Controls
5.
To select the text file to use, select the Select button.
The system displays the File Name Select dialog box.
6.
In the Drives drop-down list box, select the drive where the file is located.
7.
In the Directories list box, use the scroll bar to scroll through the available
directories on the selected drive. Select the appropriate directory.
8.
In the File Name list box, scroll through the list of files and highlight the file.
9.
To pad the field data to the length specified in the Length list box, select the Enable
Padding check box.
Available only for Constant, Reference Fields, Database, or Text File data sources.
This option works with the Length option when a data source is shorter than the
length specified. For example, when the Pad Right option is selected, if the data
length is 12, and the data for the field is 10 characters long, the last two places for
the data will be occupied by the fill character. When the Pad Left option is selected,
the first two characters are occupied by the fill character, and the last 10 characters
are data.
Complete the following padding information:
A.
In the Fill Character list box, select the fill character with which to pad the
field, or type a character.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
5-45
Designing Labels
This option is available only if you select the Enable Padding check box.
B.
Select either the Pad Left or the Pad Right option button.
The system will place the fill character to the left or right of the data.
10.
To limit the data length, in the Start list box, select the position at which you want to
begin the data. In the Length list box, select the total data length.
The length option is available only when you select the Enable Padding check box
or when the serial number option is set to Yes.
For example, if the data being returned is too long, you can limit the length. If you
type 10 in the Length list box and 1 in the Start list box and the table field contains
more than 10 characters, it will return only the first 10 characters.
11.
To select the file, click OK or press (§Enter). To cancel selecting the file, click
Cancel or press (Esc).
The system returns to the Expression dialog box with the name of the file displayed
in the Text File controls.
12.
To save the data, click OK or press (Alt)-(O). To lose the data, click Cancel or press
(Esc).
The system returns to the previous dialog box. The Data Result text box displays
the result of the expression. For a text file, it should display the contents of the file.
13.
To save the data expression, click OK or press (Alt)-(O). To lose the data expression,
click Cancel or press (Esc).
Including the Date or Time
To have the date or time print in a field, use the following procedure.
1.
Create a text or barcode field.
2.
Select the Expression option button.
3.
Select the Expression button.
The system displays the Expression dialog box.
4.
Select the Date or Time option button.
The bottom half of the dialog box displays the Date or Time Setting list box.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
5-46
Designing Labels
Date or Time Setting List Box
5.
In the Date or Time Setting list box, select the date or time format to include on the
label when it is printed.
The job start date or time is the time that the print job actually began printing.
The job submit date or time is the time when the print job was submitted to the print
manager.
6.
To save the data, click OK or press (Alt)-(O). To lose the data, click Cancel or press
(Esc).
The system returns to the previous dialog box. The Data Result text box displays
the result of the expression. For a date or time field, it should display the current
date or time in the format selected.
7.
To save the data expression, click OK or press (Alt)-(O). To lose the data expression,
click Cancel or press (Esc).
Manually Building a Data Expression
To display the Data Expression controls, select the String Builder option button from the
Expression dialog box. The bottom half of the Expression dialog box changes to display
the Data Expression controls. The Data Expression controls displays the data expressions
you have built using the other option buttons, or you can build your own data expression to
include on the label. For a list of each function and an example of its usage, see Appendix
E, Data Expression Functions.
Note that functions are case sensitive.
1.
Create a text, barcode, graphic, or raw field.
2.
Select the Expression option button.
3.
Select the Expression button.
The system displays the Expression dialog box.
4.
Select the String builder option button.
The bottom half of the dialog box displays the Data Expression controls.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
5-47
Designing Labels
Expression Controls
5.
In the Functions list box, select from the list of functions available for the data
expression. To paste a function into the Expression text box, double-click on the
function.
The function is pasted into the Expression text box at the cursor position.
The area beneath the Functions list box displays the currently highlighted function
followed by the type of data required by the function. For example, if you highlight
the function textfile, the area beneath the list box displays textfile(file_name), to
indicate that the command textfile should be followed by the file name in
parentheses.

NOTE: Any time a data string is specified, it should appear in quotes within
the parentheses. Functions are case sensitive and should be typed as they
appear.
The Data Expression controls displays the data expression you have built by
selecting functions or you can manually type the data expression in the Data
Expression text box.
6.
The Fields list box displays the field names for all the fields in the label. To paste a
field name into the Expression text box, double-click on the field name.
The field name is pasted within quotes into the Expression text box at the cursor
position.
7.
To select a file name to include, select the File Name button.
The system displays the File Name dialog box. To select a file name, use the
following procedure:
A.
In the Drives drop-down list box, select the drive where the file is located.
B.
In the Directories list box, use the scroll bar to scroll through the available
directories on the selected drive. Select the appropriate directory.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
5-48
Designing Labels
C.
In the File Name list box, use the scroll bar to find the file you want to open.
Highlight the appropriate file name and click OK or press (§Enter).
The system returns to the Expression dialog box, with the file name pasted
into the Data Expression text box.
8.
To have the system evaluate the data expression, select the Evaluate button.
If the expression is valid, the system displays the result of the data expression
beneath the Functions list box.
9.
To save the data expression, click OK or press (Alt)-(O). To lose the data expression,
click Cancel or press (Esc).
The system returns to the previous dialog box. The system displays the result in the
Data Result text box.
10.
To save the field, click OK or press (Alt)-(O). To lose the field, click Cancel or press
(Esc).
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
5-49
Designing Labels
Adding a Serial Number Field
This procedure explains how to add a serial number field, how to specify the starting value, and
how to specify the number of times to increment the serial number. It also explains how to create
a zero-padded serial number. These two values are added as separate fields. Each procedure is
covered separately.
To add the field that will contain the serial number, use the following procedure.
1.
Create a text field.
2.
Select the Expression option button.
3.
Select the Expression button.
The system displays the Expression dialog box.
4.
In the Serial Number group box, select the Yes option button.
5.
In the Increment list box, select the number to use for incrementing the serial number.
For example, if you select 2 and the serial number begins at 12, the number will increment
by two each time (14, 16, 18, etc.).
The starting point for the serial number can be selected using any of the following four
methods:

Using a Constant Starting Value

Referencing Another Field Value

Selecting from a Database
Using a Constant Starting Value
To have the serial number begin at the same number every time the label run is printed,
complete the following procedure.
1.
Select the Constant option button.
The system displays the Constant Start Value controls.
2.
In the Constant Start Value text box, type the value at which to begin the serial
number.
3.
In the Length list box, select the length for the serial number.
4.
To save the data, click OK or press (Alt)-(O). To lose the data, click Cancel or press
(Esc).
The system returns to the previous dialog box. The Data Result text box displays
the result of the expression, which is the starting serial number.
5.
To save the data expression, click OK or press (Alt)-(O). To lose the data expression,
click Cancel or press (Esc).
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
5-50
Designing Labels
Referencing Another Field Value
To use another field value for the starting point for the serial number, use the following
procedure.
1.
Select the Reference Fields option button.
The system displays the Reference Fields controls. The List of Fields list box on the
right displays all of the field names for the fields on the label.
2.
To select a field to reference, highlight the field name in the List of Fields list box
and click the Add button.
3.
To remove a field name that you do not want to reference, highlight the field name
in the Referenced Fields list box and click the Remove button.
4.
To limit the data length, in the Start list box, select the position at which you want to
begin the data. In the Length list box, select the total data length.
For example, suppose the field you are referencing contains the following product
number: 09-1234567890-AXY. For the current field, you only need the middle
section of numbers. If you type 4 in the Start list box and 10 for total data length,
the field will only contain the numbers between the dashes: 1234567890.
5.
To save the data, click OK or press (Alt)-(O). To lose the data, click Cancel or press
(Esc).
The system returns to the previous dialog box. The Data Result text box displays
the result of the expression, which is the starting serial number.
6.
To save the data expression, click OK or press (Alt)-(O). To lose the data expression,
click Cancel or press (Esc).
Selecting from a Database
To use a database field value as the starting point for the serial number, use the following
procedure.
1.
Select the Database option button.
The system displays the Database Table controls.
2.
For information on using the Database Table controls, see Adding Database Table
Data, page 41.
3.
To save the data, click OK or press (Alt)-(O). To lose the data, click Cancel or press
(Esc).
The system returns to the previous dialog box. The Data Result text box displays
the result of the expression, which is the starting serial number.
4.
To save the data expression, click OK or press (Alt)-(O). To lose the data expression,
click Cancel or press (Esc).
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
5-51
Designing Labels
Indicating the Number of Times to Increment the Serial Number
You can indicate within the label design the number of times to increment the serial
number. However, you must create a separate field to do so. Use the following procedure
to add the field. This value can be changed at print time. It provides a default value for the
Print Labels module. For more information on setting the value at print time, see Chapter
4, Printing Labels.
1.
Create a text field.
2.
At the Text dialog box, if you do not want to display or print the field, do not select
the Display Field or Print Field check boxes.
3.
Select the Expression option button, then the Expression button to display the
Expression dialog box.
4.
Select either the Constant, Reference Fields, Database, or Text File option button.
5.
Select the Auto Serial check box.
6.
Depending on the option button selected in step 4, see one of the following sections:
7.

Entering Constant Data for a Field (page 37)

Using Reference Fields (page 39)

Entering Database Data Fields (page 41)

Selecting a Text File for a Field (page 45)
To save the data expression, click OK or press (Alt)-(O). To lose the data expression,
click Cancel or press (Esc).
The system returns to the previous dialog box.
8.
To save the field, click OK or press (Alt)-(O). To lose the field, click Cancel or press
(Esc).

NOTE: The increment value does not have to be a constant. This value could
alternately come from a database, a text file, or a referenced field. Similarly,
the value could be calculated from a data expression.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
5-52
Designing Labels
Adding a Tracking Serial Number Field
A tracking serial number is one for which the system keeps track of the last number used for that
serial number. When the serial number is used in a label, it automatically increments the serial
number based on the last number used. To select a serial number name to use, use the following
procedure.
1.
Create a text or barcode field.
2.
Select the Expression option button.
3.
Select the Expression button.
The system displays the Expression dialog box.
4.
In the Serial Number group box, select the Tracking option button.
5.
In the Increment list box, select the number to use for incrementing the serial number.
For example, if you select 2 and the serial number begins at 12, the number will increment
by two each time (14, 16, 18, etc.).
Select the serial number name using any of the following three methods:

Entering the Constant Serial Number Name

Referencing Another Field Value

Selecting from a Database
Entering the Constant Serial Number Name
To have the serial number use the same tracking serial number every time the label is
printed, complete the following procedure.
1.
Select the Constant option button.
The system displays the Constant Serial Number Name text box.
2.
In the Constant Serial Number Name text box, type the serial number name to use.
The serial number names and their current starting point can be viewed using the
Serial Number Tracking module. For more information, see Chapter 8, Using
Serial Number Tracking.
3.
In the Length list box, select the length for the serial number.
4.
To pad the serial number to the length specified in the Length list box, select the
Enable Padding check box.
Available only for Constant, Reference Fields, Database, or Text File data sources.
This option works with the Length option when the serial number is shorter than the
length specified. For example, when the Pad Right option is selected, if the data
length is 12, and the data for the field is 10 characters long, the last two places for
the data will be occupied by the fill character. When the Pad Left option is selected,
the first two characters are occupied by the fill character, and the last 10 characters
are data.
Complete the following padding information:
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
5-53
Designing Labels
A.
In the Fill Character list box, select the fill character with which to pad the
field, or type a character.
This option is available only if you select the Enable Padding check box.
B.
Select either the Pad Left or the Pad Right option button.
The system will place the fill character to the left or right of the data.
5.
In the Expression dialog box, to save the data, click OK or press (Alt)-(O). To lose
the data, click Cancel or press (Esc).
The system returns to the previous dialog box. The Data Result text box displays
the result of the expression, which is the starting serial number.
6.
To save the data expression, click OK or press (Alt)-(O). To lose the data expression,
click Cancel or press (Esc).
Referencing Another Field Value
To use another field value to indicate the serial number name, use the following procedure.
1.
Select the Reference Fields option button.
The system displays the Reference Fields controls. The List of Fields list box on the
right displays all of the field names for the field on the label.
2.
To select a field to reference, highlight the field name in the List of Fields list box
and click the Add button.
3.
To remove a field name that you do not want to reference, highlight the field name
in the Referenced Fields list box and click the Remove button.
4.
To pad the serial number to the length specified in the Length list box, select the
Enable Padding check box.
Available only for Constant, Reference Fields, Database, or Text File data sources.
This option works with the Length option when the serial number is shorter than the
length specified. For example, when the Pad Right option is selected, if the data
length is 12, and the data for the field is 10 characters long, the last two places for
the data will be occupied by the fill character. When the Pad Left option is selected,
the first two characters are occupied by the fill character, and the last 10 characters
are data.
Complete the following padding information:
A.
In the Fill Character list box, select the fill character with which to pad the
field, or type a character.
This option is available only if you select the Enable Padding check box.
B.
Select either the Pad Left or the Pad Right option button.
The system will place the fill character to the left or right of the data.
5.
To limit the data length, in the Start list box, select the position at which you want to
begin the data. In the Length list box, select the total data length.
The length option is available only when you select the Enable Padding check box
or when the serial number option is set to Yes.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
5-54
Designing Labels
For example, if the data being returned is too long, you can limit the length. If you
type 10 in the Length list box and 1 in the Start list box and the table field contains
more than 10 characters, it will only return the first 10 characters.
6.
In the Expression dialog box, to save the data, click OK or press (Alt)-(O). To lose
the data, click Cancel or press (Esc).
The system returns to the previous dialog box. The Data Result text box displays
the result of the expression, which is the starting serial number.
7.
To save the data expression, click OK or press (Alt)-(O). To lose the data expression,
click Cancel or press (Esc).
Selecting from a Database
To use a database field value to indicate the serial number name, use the following
procedure.
1.
Select the Database option button.
The system displays the Database Table controls.
2.
For information on using the Database Table controls, see Entering Database Data
Fields, page 51.
3.
In the Expression dialog box, to save the data, click OK or press (Alt)-(O). To lose
the data, click Cancel or press (Esc).
The system returns to the previous dialog box. The Data Result text box displays
the result of the expression, which is the starting serial number.
4.
To save the data expression, click OK or press (Alt)-(O). To lose the data expression,
click Cancel or press (Esc).
Indicating the Number of Times to Increment the Serial Number
You can indicate within the label design the number of times to increment the serial
number. However, you must create a separate field to do so. Use the following procedure
to add the field.
1.
Create a text field.
2.
At the Text dialog box, if you do not want to display or print the field, do not select
the Display Field or Print Field check boxes.
3.
Select the Expression option button, then the Expression button to display the
Expression dialog box.
4.
Select either the Constant, Reference Fields, Database, or Text File option button.
5.
Select the Auto Serial check box.
6.
Depending on the option button selected in step 4, see one of the following sections:

Entering Constant Data for a Field (page 37)

Using Reference Fields (page 39)

Entering Database Data Fields (page 41)

Selecting a Text File for a Field (page 45)
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
5-55
Designing Labels
7.
To save the data expression, click OK or press (Alt)-(O). To lose the data expression,
click Cancel or press (Esc).
The system returns to the Text dialog box.
8.
To save the field, click OK or press (Alt)-(O). To lose the field, click Cancel or press
(Esc).

NOTE: The increment value does not have to be a constant. This value could
alternately come from a database, a text file, or a referenced field. Similarly,
the value could be calculated from a data expression.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
5-56
Designing Labels
Printing Identical Labels
You can indicate within the label design the number of identical labels to print. When the label is
submitted as a print job and printed, it will print the number of identical labels specified within
the label format. You can indicate the number of identical labels to print using constant data, a
reference field, or a database field.
1.
Create a text field.
The system displays the Text dialog box.
2.
At the Text dialog box, if you do not want to display or print the field, do not select the
Display Field or Print Field check boxes.
3.
Select the Expression option button, then the Expression button to display the Expression
dialog box.
4.
Select the Auto Identical check box.
Complete one of the following procedures to indicate the number of identical labels to
print.
Using Constant Data
Use the following procedure to indicate the number of identical labels to print using
constant data.
1.
Select the Constant option button.
The system displays the Constant Data controls.
2.
In the Constant Data text box, type the number of identical labels to print.
3.
To save the data expression, click OK or press (Alt)-(O). To lose the data expression,
click Cancel or press (Esc).
The system returns to the Text dialog box.
4.
To save the field, click OK or press (Alt)-(O). To lose the field, click Cancel or press
(Esc).
Referencing Another Field Value
Use the following procedure to indicate the number of identical labels to print.
1.
Select the Reference Fields option button.
The system displays the Reference Fields controls. The List of Fields list box on the
right displays all of the field names for the field on the label.
2.
To select a field to reference, highlight the field name in the List of Fields list box
and click the Add button.
3.
To remove a field name that you do not want to reference, highlight the field name
in the Referenced Fields list box and click the Remove button.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
5-57
Designing Labels
4.
To limit the data length, in the Start list box, select the position at which you want to
begin the data. In the Length list box, select the total data length.
For example, if the data being returned is too long, you can limit the length. If you
type 10 in the Length list box and 1 in the Start list box and the table field contains
more than 10 characters, it will only return the first 10 characters.
5.
To save the data expression, click OK or press (Alt)-(O). To lose the data expression,
click Cancel or press (Esc).
The system returns to the Text dialog box.
6.
To save the field, click OK or press (Alt)-(O). To lose the field, click Cancel or press
(Esc).
Selecting from a Database
To use a database field value to indicate the number of identical labels to print, use the
following procedure.
1.
Select the Database option button.
The system displays the Database Table controls.
2.
For information on using the Database Table controls, see Entering Database Data
Fields, page 41.
3.
To save the data expression, click OK or press (Alt)-(O). To lose the data expression,
click Cancel or press (Esc).
The system returns to the Text dialog box.
4.
To save the field, click OK or press (Alt)-(O). To lose the field, click Cancel or press
(Esc).
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
5-58
Designing Labels
Adding Supplied Input Fields
Label Design allows you to specify supplied data fields that will accept supplied input. Supplied
data fields allow you to create a field on a label for which the data can be changed by the user at
print time from the Print Job window. You can create supplied data fields for the following field
types:

For a text field, at print time the user can enter the text that should appear.

For a bar code field, at print time the user can enter the barcode value.

For a graphic field, at print time the user can specify the graphic file to print.

For a raw field, at print time the user can specify the printer command to send.
To create a supplied data field, use the following procedure.
1.
Create a text, bar code, graphic, or raw field.
2.
Select the Supplied Data option button.
3.
Select the Supplied button.
The system displays the Supplied Input dialog box.
Supplied Input Dialog Box
4.
Check one or more items in the Data Source group box.
A supplied data field can get its data from a variety of sources. The following list details
these sources.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
5-59
Designing Labels
5.
Keyboard
Designates the keyboard as a source for data input. If this box is
checked, data can be entered from the keyboard for this field at
supplied data time.
Remote Input
Designates a COM port as the source for data input. If this box is
checked, characters available from the COM port will be used as
input for this field.
DDE
Designates a DDE server application as the source for data input. If
this box is checked, data from a DDE server will be used as input for
this field. The actual server name and link information are set up in
Print Labels by pressing the DDE Links button.
Table Lookup
Designates a Paradox table as the source for data input. Use the
Table button and Table Field list box to select the table and field to
used. At supplied data time, a list box will display containing the
selected fields data for every record in the table and a table field to
use as a prompt, if selected. This option is useful for presenting a list
of predefined choices for a field.
In the Remote Groups group box, indicate which remote groups will be used for this field.
Remote groups allow different users to use different ports for the same label. For example,
the user who creates the label may receive remote input from COM1:. The user who prints
the label may receive remote input from COM3:. The label field will only reference
Remote Group 1, which each user defined for the appropriate port using the Configuration
option.
6.
In the Options group box, select Must enter data if data entry is required for this field.
If you select this option, this field cannot be left blank.
7.
8.
In the Data Type group box, choose the type of data that can be entered in this field.
Alphanumeric
Data can consist of any printable character.
Alpha
Data must be a letter, either upper or lowercase. Spaces are not
permitted.
Numeric
Data must be a number from 0-9.
Custom filter
A custom filter consists of a series of special characters called
tokens. Tokens control the kind of characters that can be entered into
the edit box. Data must fit the Custom Filter specified in the Custom
Filter edit box.
In the Supplied Entry Time group box, check all the items that apply.
Supplied data can be entered at several points during the printing process. The following
list explains what these times are called and when they can occur.
Print labels
Immediately after submitting a job from Print Labels, the Supplied
Data window will appear and any fields with this box checked will
display in a list box. You can enter data at this time.
Print start
When the print job becomes active in the print queue, any fields with
this box checked will be displayed in the Supplied Data window.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
5-60
Designing Labels
Each queried label
For every label that satisfies the print query, before the label prints,
the Supplied Data window will appear. For example, if your print
query produces seven labels, you will have seven opportunities to
enter data into the field. Before each label prints, the Supplied Data
window will appear with a list of all fields with this box checked.
You can enter data at this time.
Each serial label
For every label in a serialized label run, before each label prints, the
Supplied Data window will appear. For example, if your serial label
run consists of ten serial numbers, you will have ten opportunities to
enter data into the field. Before each label prints, the Supplied Data
window will appear with a list of all fields that have this box
checked. You can enter data at this time. This option must be used
with Computer Repetition.
You will be prompted for data entry at those times that you have selected.
9.
In the Operator Prompt text box, enter the prompt that will appear to the user in the
Supplied Data window.
The prompt should be descriptive so the user knows the type of data to enter. For example,
if you type Enter lot number, that text will appear to prompt the user to enter the lot
number for the current label run.
10.
In the Default Data text box, enter the default data for the field.
For example, for a graphic field, a certain graphic may be used more than any other. You
can enter the file name here and the user would then have the option to change it in the
Supplied Data window. This text box is optional.
11.
In the Input Length text boxes, enter the minimum and maximum number of characters that
will be accepted in the Supplied Data window.
This text box is required for all data types except Custom filter.
12.
If you selected Custom filter as the data type, in the Custom Filter text box, enter the
custom filter characters.
You can enter the following filter characters:
#
Any numeric digit (0-9)
@
Any alphabetic character (a-z, A-Z)
!
Any punctuation character
*
Any single printable character
\
Causes next character to be treated literally (not as a token)
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
5-61
Designing Labels
Following are a few examples of custom filters:
Custom filter
Formatted data
Actual Data
###-##-####
012-34-5678
012345678
(###)###-####
(312)555-1212
3125551212
@@@@@-####
Model-9995
Model9995
Characters such as dashes and parentheses are never included in the final data. They exist
to make the data more readable and to help describe the way it should be entered.
Note that when the numeric token (#) is used, the edit box will display underline characters
as placeholders. If you specify the filter ###### and enter one digit, the line will look like
this: 2
. The underlines are not part of the data and will not display when the field is
printed. They only indicate that more data must be entered to complete the field.
13.
If Table Lookup is the data source for this field, specify the Paradox table to use using one
of the following steps:
A.
In the Table Lookup text box, type the file name.
Use this method if you are sure of the table name and location or if the table has not
yet been created. If you do not supply the complete path, the default database path
you set up in the Default Directories option in the Configuration module will be
used.
B.
Click the Table button.
This option displays a file selection dialog box with full browse capability. Use this
method if you are not sure of the table name or where it is located.
14.
After selecting the Paradox table to use, select the field within that table whose data will be
used for Table Lookup. Using the Table Field list box, press the down arrow and select a
field from the list. You can also type the name of the field if the table does not yet exist.
15.
To select a table field to use as a prompt for the data, select a field in the Table field to use
as prompt list box.
16.
To save all of the above Supplied Data settings you have entered, click OK or press
(Alt)-(O). To lose the data entered, click Cancel or press (Esc). Legi returns to the previous
dialog box.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
5-62
Designing Labels
Setting the Colors for a Field
Use the Color Settings dialog box to specify the colors for a selected field on the label and the
default colors for any new fields that will be created. Because Legi does not currently support
color label printers, the colors selected here are for display only.
To set the default colors for a selected field and any new fields that will be added, use the
following procedure.
1.
From the Text dialog box, the Barcode dialog box, the Graphics dialog box, the Line
dialog box, the Box dialog box, or the Raw dialog box, select the Colors button.
The system displays the Color Settings dialog box.
Color Settings Dialog Box
2.
For each of the options listed, select the color to use. To select the color, move the cursor
to the field and press the (£) or (¥) keys or click on the up or down arrow in the field. The
system will scroll through the colors available.
Legi defaults to a white background and black foreground.
3.
On-Screen Foreground
Select the display color for the foreground for the selected
field.
On-Screen Background
Select the display color for the background for the selected
field.
Printed Foreground
Select the printed foreground color (black or white) for the
selected field on the label. This setting will affect only the
current field and new fields that are added. The other palette
colors are for future support.
Printed Background
Select the printed background color (black or white) for the
selected field. This setting will affect only the current field
and new fields that are added. The other palette colors are
for future support. This field does not appear for Line fields
or Box fields.
To save the colors selected for this field and any new fields that will be created, click OK
or press (Alt)-(O). To lose the selected colors, click Cancel or press (Esc).
Legi returns to the previous dialog box.
4.
To save the colors selected, click OK or press (Alt)-(O). To lose the colors, click Cancel or
press (Esc).
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
5-63
Designing Labels
Setting the Position/Size for a Field
When you create a field, the system sets the position and size to the area in which you initially
draw the selection box. However, you can manually set the exact position and size for a text,
barcode, graphic, or raw field.
1.
From the Text dialog box, the Barcode dialog box, the Graphics dialog box, or the Raw
dialog box, select the Position/Size button.
The system displays the Position/Size dialog box.
Position/Size Dialog Box
2.
Under Unit of Measure, select one of the following option buttons for the unit of measure
to use for entering and displaying the measurements.
Inches
Measurements display in inches.
Centimeters
Measurements display in centimeters.
Points
Measurements display in point size.
Dots
Measurements display in printer dots.
The unit of measure selected converts the measurements displayed in this dialog box.
3.
In the Horizontal Position and Vertical Position text boxes, enter the position for the upper
left corner of the field on the label.
The system displays the current position in these fields.
4.
In the Horizontal Size text box, enter the horizontal length of the field.
The system displays the current size in this field.
5.
In the Vertical Size text box, enter the vertical length of the field.
The system displays the current size in this field.
6.
To save the settings for the field, click OK or press (Alt)-(O). To lose the settings, click
Cancel or press (Esc).
Legi returns to the previous dialog box.
7.
To save the settings selected, click OK or press (Alt)-(O). To lose the settings, click Cancel
or press (Esc).
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
5-64
Designing Labels
Sizing Fields with a Mouse
To size a field with a mouse, first select the field or fields that you want to size. Note that the
selection box that is drawn around selected fields has a broken line on both sides of each corner.
To make the field wider or narrower, place the mouse arrow on the left or right side of the
selection box, between the broken lines. Note that the mouse arrow becomes a double-arrow.
Holding the left mouse button, drag the arrow to the left or right to size the field accordingly.
Release the mouse button when the field is the correct size.
To make the field longer or shorter, place the mouse arrow on the top or bottom of the
selection box, between the broken lines. Note that the mouse arrow becomes a double-arrow.
Holding the left mouse button, drag the arrow up or down to size the field accordingly. Release
the mouse button when the field size is correct.
To size the height and width of a field at the same time, move the mouse arrow to a corner of
the selection box, between the broken lines. Note that the mouse arrow becomes a double-arrow.
Holding the left mouse button, drag the arrow in any direction to size the field. Release the
mouse button when the field size is correct.
Notes:
When sizing a text or graphic field, the data (font or graphic) within the fields does not change
font size; only the size of the field changes.
When sizing a barcode, the barcode will become taller, but it will only become as wide as the
type of barcode allows.
Lines and boxes will be the same size as the field.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
5-65
Designing Labels
Editing Labels
Label Design incorporates a number of label field editing features. This section briefly covers the
editing features.
Selecting/Deselecting Fields
In order to move, size, or change the settings for a field, you must select the field to edit.
You can select fields in several ways.
Selecting a Field
To select a field, click the mouse pointer on the field to select. The system inserts a black
box around the field, referred to as the selection box.
Selecting Several Fields
You can select multiple fields in three ways.
A.
Using the drag method, hold down the left mouse button. Notice that the mouse
pointer turns into a crosshair. Holding down the mouse button, drag the crosshair
across the screen. As you drag the crosshair, Legi draws a box. All fields within the
box will be selected. When you have surrounded the appropriate fields, release the
mouse button. The system draws a selection box around the selected fields.
B.
Hold down (Shift), and click on the fields with the mouse. When you release (Shift)
and the mouse, Legi draws a selection box around the selected fields.
C.
To select fields using the Select Fields dialog box, first display the dialog box using
one of the following methods:
/ 

From the Edit Menu, select Select Fields.
Click on the
tool.
The system displays the Select Fields dialog box, with a list of the fields on the
label.
Select Fields Dialog Box
Click on the fields to select, and press (§Enter) or click OK.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
5-66
Designing Labels
Selecting Non-Display Fields
When a field is created, you can select not to display it in Label Design. Non-display
fields cannot be selected using the mouse. To select non-display fields, use the Select
Fields dialog box. First display the dialog box using one of the following methods:
/ From the Edit Menu, select Select Fields.
 Click on the tool.
The system displays the Select Fields dialog box, with a list of the fields on the label. Any
fields that are non-display have a *N* notation next to the field name. Click on the fields to
select, and click OK or press (§Enter).
Selecting All Fields
To select all fields on the label, first display the Select Fields dialog box using one of the
following methods:
/ From the Edit Menu, select Select Fields.
 Click on the tool.
The system displays the Select Fields dialog box, with a list of the fields on the label.
Choose the Select All button, and click OK or press (§Enter).
Selecting Overlapping Fields
If one field entirely overlaps another, you can use the mouse to select the underlying field.
Holding down (Ctrl), click the mouse button on the upper field. Instead of selecting the
field on top, Legi draws a selection box around the field underneath.
Deselecting Fields
You can deselect fields in one of four ways:

Click the mouse pointer on an area of the label that has no fields.
If multiple fields are selected, to deselect one of those fields, hold down (Shift)
and select the field with the mouse.

Press (Esc).
To deselect all fields using the Select Fields dialog box, first display the dialog box using
one of the following methods:
/ From the Edit Menu, select Select Fields.
 Click on the tool.
The system displays the Select Fields dialog box, with a list of the fields on the label.
Select the Deselect All button and click OK or press (§Enter).
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
5-67
Designing Labels
Undoing/Redoing Edits
While making edits to a field, until you save the changes, you can undo any of those
changes. If you undo an edit and you decide you need to retain that edit, you can redo any
edit you undo.
To undo an edit, do any of the following:
/ From the Edit menu, select Undo.
 Press (Alt)-(Backspace).
 Select the tool.
To redo an edit, you can do any of the following:
/ From the Edit menu, select Redo.
 Press (Shift)-(Alt)-(Backspace).
 Select the tool.
The Undo/Redo tools hold all the changes in memory until you save the label design. For
example, suppose you make a series of edits to the label design. When you select Undo,
Legi reverses the last edit made. If you select Undo a number of times, Legi reverses all of
the previous edits, beginning with the most recent.
After selecting Undo, to redo any of the edits, select Redo. When you select Redo, Legi
reverses the most recent edit that was un-done. If you select Redo a number of times, Legi
reverses all of the previous Undo commands, beginning with the most recent.
Once you save a label design, you cannot undo or redo any edits made before saving.
If you have un-done and/or re-done as many edits were made, the Undo and Redo options
will not be available.
Cutting and Pasting Fields
This section explains how to cut and paste fields on the label. Cutting removes the selected
fields from the label, and stores them in the Legi clipboard. You can cut a field from one
label, open a new label, and paste the field from the previous label onto the new label.
1.
Select the field or fields to cut and paste.
2.
Remove the selected fields from the label design and copy them to the Legi
clipboard. You can cut fields in any of the following ways:
/ 


From the Edit Menu, select Cut.
Press (Shift)-(Del).
Select the
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
tool.
5-68
Designing Labels
3.
Paste the selected fields back into the label using one of the following methods:
/ 


From the Edit Menu, select Paste.
On the keyboard, press (Shift)-(Ins).
Select the
tool.
You can paste the cut field or fields into the label as many times as necessary. The
fields are pasted into the upper left corner of the label. Move the fields to the
desired location and click the mouse on an empty part of the label to deselect the
field.
Copying and Pasting Fields
This section explains how to copy and paste fields on the label. Copying keeps the
selected fields on the label, and stores them in the Legi clipboard. You can copy a field
from one label, open a new label, and paste the field from the previous label onto the new
label.
1.
Select the field or fields to copy and paste.
2.
Copy the selected fields to the Legi clipboard. You can copy fields in any of the
following ways:
/ 


3.
From the Edit Menu, select Copy.
Press (Ctrl)-(Ins).
Select the
tool.
Paste the selected fields back into the label using one of the following methods:
/ 


From the Edit Menu, select Paste.
On the keyboard, press (Shift)-(Ins).
Select the
tool.
You can paste the field or fields into the label as many times as necessary.
Changing a Label Field
Once a field has been added, you can change the field settings. For example, you can
select a different barcode or enter different text. To change field settings, use the following
procedure.
1.
Select the field you want to change.
2.
Display the settings dialog box using one of the following methods:
A.
Double-click on the field.
B.
Select the
C.
From the Edit Menu, select Change or press (Ctrl)-(C).
tool.
The system displays one of the following dialog boxes:
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
5-69
Designing Labels
 Text dialog box
 Barcode dialog box
 Graphic dialog box
 Line dialog box
 Box dialog box
 Raw dialog box
3.
Make any necessary changes.
4.
To save the changes, click OK or press (Alt)-(O). To lose the changes, click Cancel
or press (Esc).
Moving Label Fields
Once a field is positioned on the label, you can move it in several ways, using both the
mouse and keyboard.

Moving a Field Using the Move Dialog Box
Using the Move dialog box allows you to specify the exact position of a field on the label.
1.
Select the field or fields to move.
2.
Select the Move option using one of the following methods:
/ 


From the Edit Menu, select Move.
Press (Ctrl)-(M).
Click on the
tool.
The system displays the Move dialog box.
Move Dialog Box
Under Original Position, the system displays the current horizontal and vertical
position of the upper left corner of the selected fields.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
5-70
Designing Labels
3.
4.
Select one of the following option buttons to indicate the type of move you will
perform:
Absolute Move
Moves the selected fields in relation to the label.
For example, if you select this option button and
enter 1 inch vertical and .5 inch horizontal, the
system will move this field so that the upper left
corner of the field will be 1 inch down the page and
.5 inch to the right, no matter what the current
position is.
Relative Move
Moves the selected fields in relation to current
position. For example, if you select this option
button and enter 1 inch vertical and .5 inch
horizontal, the fields will move down 1 inch and to
the right .5 inch from the current position.
Under Unit of Measure, select one of the following option buttons for the unit of
measure to use for entering and displaying the measurements.
Inches
Measurements display in inches.
Centimeters
Measurements display in centimeters.
Points
Measurements display in point size.
Dots
Measurements display in printer dots.
The unit of measure selected converts the measurements displayed in this dialog
box.
5.
In the New Position Horizontal field, enter the new horizontal position for the upper
left corner of the selected field.
If more than one field is selected, enter the horizontal position for the field in the
upper left corner of the selection box.
6.
In the New Position Vertical field, enter the new vertical position for the upper left
corner of the selected field.
If more than one field is selected, enter the vertical position for the field in the upper
left corner of the selection box.
7.

To move the fields, click OK or press (§Enter). To cancel moving the fields, click
Cancel or press (Esc).
Moving a Field Using the Mouse
1.
Select the field or fields to move.
2.
Move the mouse pointer within the selection box.
3.
Holding down the left mouse button, drag the field(s) to its new position.
4.
When the field(s) is correctly placed, release the mouse button.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
5-71
Designing Labels
Aligning Label Fields
Once you have several fields positioned on the label, you can use the Align feature to line
up the fields, either top or left, to a specified point on the label design.
1.
Select the field or fields to align.
2.
Select the Align option using one of the following methods:
/ 


From the Edit Menu, select Align.
Press (Ctrl)-(A).
Click on the
tool.
The cursor changes into a crosshair.
3.
Move the crosshair to the area on the label where you want to align the fields and
click once with the left mouse button.
If you select a field at this point, the alignment will be based on the position of the
field selected.
The system displays the Align Orientation dialog box.
Align Orientation Dialog Box
4.
5.
Select one of the following option buttons to indicate the type of orientation to use:
Left Align
The system lines up the left edge of all the selected
fields so they are even. It does not change their
vertical position on the label.
Top Align
The system lines up the top edge of all the selected
fields so they are even. It does not change their
horizontal position on the label.
Click OK or press (§Enter). To cancel aligning the fields, click Cancel or press (Esc).
The system aligns the fields as selected.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
5-72
Designing Labels
Deleting Label Fields
To delete a field from the label, use the following procedure.
1.
Select the field or fields to delete.
2.
Delete the selected fields in any of the following ways:
/ 


From the Edit Menu, select Delete.
On the keyboard, press (Del).
Select the
tool.
The system deletes the selected fields.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
5-73
Designing Labels
Viewing Labels
You can select how to view the label. You can zoom in on a selected area of the label, display a
full screen window, or display all fields on the label within the current window size.
Zooming In
To view part of a label close-up, Label Design uses the Zoom In feature. To use the Zoom
In feature, use the following procedure.
1.
Select the Zoom In option using one of the following methods:
/ 


From the View Menu, select Zoom In.
Press (Ctrl)-(Z).
Select the
tool.
Note that the cursor changes into the
tool.
2.
Holding the left mouse button down, drag the tool across the area you want to view.
3.
Release the mouse button.
Zooming in to display a text or graphic field that has a magnification greater than
one may affect program performance.
Legi displays only the area you selected.
Zoomed In Window
Zooming Out
To view all the fields on the label to help you determine label placement, use one of the
following methods:
/ From the View Menu, select Zoom Out.
 Press (Ctrl)-(O).
 Select the tool.
The system displays the all of the fields on the label.
Zooming Out - Full Screen Window
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
5-74
Designing Labels
To view all the fields on the label to help you determine label placement, use one of the
following methods:
/ From the View Menu, select View Label.
 Press (Ctrl)-(V).
The system displays all of the fields on the label in a full screen window.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
5-75
Designing Labels
Displaying the Cursor Position
The Cursor Position feature in Label Design allows you to view the exact horizontal and vertical
position of the cursor on the label:
Cursor Position Window
The first measurement is the horizontal position. The second measurement is the vertical
position. These measurements display in the Unit of Measure selected on the Label Settings
dialog box or the Grid Settings dialog box.
To display the cursor position, on the Options Menu, select Cursor Pos. When this option is
checked, the Position window displays. To not display the Position window, select Cursor Pos
again. This menu option toggles between displaying and not displaying the window.
To temporarily hide the Position window, click the right mouse button. Note that the Position
window is no longer visible even though the Cursor Pos option is still checked on the Options
Menu. This feature allows you to hide the window while you are checking field placement on the
label. To display the window, click the right mouse button again. This feature only works if you
have first selected Cursor Pos on the Options Menu.
To move the Position window, click on the title bar of the window. While holding the left
mouse button, drag the window to its new position. Release the mouse button when it is correctly
placed.
Displaying the Ruler
The Ruler option allows you to view the label size for correct field placement. To display the
ruler, use one of the following methods:
/ 

From the Options Menu, select Rulers.
Select the
tool.
Legi displays the rulers in the unit of measure selected on the Label Settings dialog box or the
Grid Settings dialog box.
If you select either the
tool or the Rulers option again, the system will toggle between
displaying and not displaying the rulers.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
5-76
Designing Labels
Displaying the Font Information Window
The Font Information window in Label Design allows you to view and change the fonts used for
a Text field. To display this window, from the Options menu, select Font Info. The system
displays the Font Information window.
Font Information Window
From this window, you can view and update the font information. For information on using this
option, see Viewing and Updating the Fonts for a Text Field, page 23.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
5-77
Designing Labels
Using the Grid
The Grid option in Label Design can be used to help place fields on the label. This option allows
you to determine the size of the grid, whether to display it, as well as whether to snap fields to the
grid. The following procedure explains how to use this feature.
1.
To display the Grid Settings dialog box, do one of the following:
/ From the Options Menu, select Grid.
 Select the tool.
The system displays the Grid Settings dialog box.
Grid Settings Dialog Box
2.
Under Unit of Measure, select one of the following option buttons for the unit of measure
to use for this label:
Inches
All measurements display in inches.
Centimeters
All measurements display in centimeters.
Points
All measurements display in point size.
Dots
All measurements display in printer dots.
The unit of measure selected converts all measurements displayed in Label Design. For
example, if the rulers are displayed, they will display in the unit of measure selected.
3.
In the Horizontal field, enter the horizontal width between grid lines.
4.
In the Vertical field, enter the vertical width between grid lines.
5.
To have fields that are moved, sized, or added snap to these grid measurements, select the
Snap to grid check box.
If any existing fields are moved or sized, they will snap to the grid.
6.
To display the grid on screen, select the Show grid check box.
7.
To use these grid settings, click OK or press (§Enter). To cancel saving the grid settings,
click Cancel or press (Esc).
Following is an example of a window using the grid settings shown in the previous
example.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
5-78
Designing Labels
Label Design Window using a grid
Note that in the above window, the fields have been aligned with the grid using the snap to
grid feature.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
5-79
Designing Labels
Changing the Default Line Thickness
Label Design allows you to preset the line width to use for lines and boxes that will be added to
the label. To set the default width, use the following procedure. This procedure will only change
the default line thickness for new lines and boxes that are added. It will not affect existing lines
and boxes.
1.
From the Settings Menu, select Line Thickness.
The system displays the Default Line Thickness dialog box.
Default Line Thickness Dialog Box
2.
Under Unit of Measure, select one of the following option buttons for the unit of measure:
Inches
Measurements display in inches.
Centimeters
Measurements display in centimeters.
Points
Measurements display in point size.
Dots
Measurements display in printer dots.
3.
In the Horizontal Line Thickness field, enter the thickness of the horizontal lines for new
lines and boxes on the label.
4.
In the Vertical Line Thickness field, enter the thickness of the vertical lines for new lines
and boxes on the label.
5.
To save the default settings, click OK or press (Alt)-(O). To lose the default settings, click
Cancel or press (Esc).
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
5-80
Designing Labels
Printing a Label Report
Label Design includes a label report feature. The label report lists general information about the
label settings as well as selected fields. This section explains how to set up the label report
printer, how to print the report, and a brief explanation of the label report.
Setting up the Label Report Printer
When you print a label report, Legi uses the Windows printer because the report does not
require a label printer. This procedure explains how to set up the printer to use for printing
the label report.
1.
To display the Print Setup dialog box, from the File Menu, select Printer Setup. To
set up the printer from the Print dialog box, click the Options button.
Legi displays the Print Setup dialog box.
Print Setup Dialog Box
2.
To select the printer to use, select one of the following option buttons from the
Printer group box:
Default Printer
Use the default printer specified in the Printers option for the
Windows Control Panel.
Specific Printer
Instead of the default, select a printer to use. To select a
printer, use the Specific Printer list box. This list box only
lists printers installed in Windows.

3.
NOTE: Selecting another printer affects only the printer selected in Label
Design.
In the Orientation group box, select one of the following option buttons to determine
the orientation of the paper when printing a label report:
Portrait
Print the report vertically down the page.
Landscape
Print the report horizontally across the page.
4.
In the Size drop-down list box, select the paper size to use for the report from the
sizes listed.
5.
In the Source drop-down list box, select the sheet feeder or paper bin you are using
on the selected printer from the options listed.
If you are using different size paper, such as Legal Size, you may need to specify an
alternate paper source.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
5-81
Designing Labels
6.
To set up the options for the selected printer, select the Options button.
The system displays the Print Options dialog box. The Print Options dialog box is a
universal Windows function, and accesses the Windows help.
7.
To save the setup and exit the dialog box, click OK or press (§Enter). To cancel
saving your changes, click Cancel or press (Esc).
Printing the Label Report
The system allows you to print a label report. The label report prints summary information
for the label and for the fields on a label. To print a label report, use the following
procedure.
1.
From the File Menu, select Print Label Report.
The system displays the Print dialog box.
Print Dialog Box
2.
In the Print Range group box, to print a report for all fields on the label, select the
All option button. To print a report only for the fields you have selected, select the
Selected option button.
3.
In the Print Quality field, press the (¥) key or click anywhere in the field to display
the print quality settings available for this printer. Highlight the print quality setting
to use.
4.
To print the report to a file instead of to a printer, select the Print to File check box.
5.
In the Printer selection display, the system displays the name of the printer to which
the report will print. To change the printer or the setup, click the Options button.
The system displays the Print Setup dialog box. For information on using this dialog
box, see Setting up the Label Report Printer, page 81.
6.
To print the report, click OK or press (§Enter). To cancel printing the report, click
Cancel or press (Esc).
The system prints the report to the printer listed in the Printer field.
If you are printing the report to a file, Legi displays the Print To File dialog box. In
the Output File Name field, enter the name of the file to send the table output to,
including the path, and click OK or press (§Enter). To cancel printing, click Cancel
or press (Esc). Legi automatically saves the file in the last accessed directory in
Label Design. This directory may be the default directory. You should enter the
path in the output file name. The file saved is not an ASCII displayable file. It may
contain printer control codes.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
5-82
Designing Labels
Test Printing a Label
The Label Design module includes two test print features so that you can preview how the label
format will appear on the label printer. This feature does not print any graphics that may be
included on the label.
1.
From the File Menu, select Test Print or Test Print to Windows Printer.
The system displays the Test Print dialog box.
2.
In the Port list box, highlight the port to print to.
3.
To print the label, click OK or press (§Enter). To cancel the test print, click Cancel or press
(Esc).
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
5-83
Designing Labels
This page intentionally left blank.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
5-84
Setting up Security
6
5Setting up
Security
Overview
The Security module allows you to set up the security features for Legi.
Legi has a flexible system that allows you to specify the level of security
required. Legi incorporates four types of security:

User name (required)

User password (optional)

Function security (optional)

Data security (optional)
The first level is the user name. If a user attempts to sign on and does not enter a user name in
the system, that user will be unable to sign on to Legi. This level is required. The second level is
the password option. If you assign passwords to users, then a user must enter the password
linked with the user name when signing on. Passwords are optional. Both of these security
options are assigned using the Users option.
The third level is function security. Function security allows you to select which Legi functions
can be accessed by users. Because it would be time consuming to select function security for
each user, this level of security is assigned at the group level. To assign function security you
must first create groups based on the level of security each group should have. Assign the
appropriate function security to each group, then assign users to the appropriate groups. Function
security is optional.
The final type of security to implement is data security. This feature allows you to restrict access
to certain directories. Usually you would implement this feature if certain directories contain
sensitive or important data. Data security is also assigned at the group level, and is optional.
Function security and data security are advanced options that will only be needed by certain users
to satisfy security requirements. Decide if user names and passwords provide sufficient security
in your particular setup. If they do, the function and data security sections may be skipped.
This chapter covers the following topics, listed under the menu option from which each is
accessed:
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
6-1
Setting up Security
Setup Menu

Add and remove users from the system, and assign and remove users from groups (page
16).

Add and remove groups from the system and configure the level of security for each group
(page 6).

Limit access to selected directories through using data security (page 4).

Set the types of security to implement for Legi (page 20).
Help Menu

View online help information.
Chapter 2, Getting Started.
For information on working with help windows, see
Icons
Each of the icons can be accessed from the Setup Menu.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
6-2
Setting up Security
Accessing the Security Module
When you select Security from the Main Menu, the system displays the Security Menu:
Security Menu
You can access the following options from this menu:
Users
Add and remove users from the system, and specify the password and
group assignments for users.
Groups
Set up and remove groups from the system, and specify the data security
and function security for a selected group.
Data Security
Set up data security for directories with restricted access.
Options
Select whether to implement data security and/or function security.
You can access these options by clicking an icon or by selecting the appropriate option from the
Setup Menu.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
6-3
Setting up Security
Maintaining Data Security
The Data Security option allows you to assign the privileges available for a directory to various
groups. The default for all directories is no access restrictions. You should use this option only
for those directories that you want to restrict. This option does not affect function security, but
rather those directories that contain sensitive or important data. This option restricts privileges,
whereas function security grants privileges.
To display the Data Security dialog box, select the Data Security option on the Security Menu.
Following is an example of the Data Security dialog box.
Data Security Dialog Box
From this dialog box, you can select the directories which should have restricted access and
assign the appropriate access for each group. You can also create directories from this option.
Creating Directories
While setting up data security, you may need to create directories. For example, you may
need to set up directories for groups and then give them exclusive access to that directory.
The Data Security option incorporates a Create Directory feature to streamline the process
of setting up data security. This option allows you to create a directory from within the
Data Security dialog box.
1.
From the Data Security dialog box, in the Directories list box, select the directory
under which you want to create a directory. Select the directory by double-clicking
on the directory or highlighting it and pressing (§Enter).
The selected directory name appears under the Current directory is: prompt.
2.
Select the Create Directory button.
The system displays the Create Directory dialog box.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
6-4
Setting up Security
Create Directory Dialog Box
3.
Type the name of the directory to create and click OK or press (Alt)-(O). To close the
dialog box and lose any changes made, click Cancel or press (Alt)-(C).
Assigning Directory Access
Use the following procedure to assign directory access to selected groups.

1.
NOTE: The changes entered do not take effect until you log out of the system and
log back in.
From the Security Menu, select Data Security.
The system displays the Data Security dialog box.
2.
In the Drives drop-down list box, select the drive where the directory to restrict is
located.
3.
In the Directories list box, select the directory to which you want to restrict access.
Select the directory by double-clicking on the directory or highlighting it and
pressing (§Enter).
The selected directory name appears under the Current directory is: prompt.
If you only highlight the directory and do not double-click or press (§Enter), the
previously selected directory will still be selected.
4.
In the Groups list box, scroll through the list of groups to find the appropriate group
and click the group name once.
You can also highlight the group name and press (§Enter). The group name you
selected appears under the Setting access for group: prompt.
5.
Next to the Read, Write, and Delete check boxes, select the type of access to the
selected directory that the group should have.
The default is all boxes checked, which indicates unrestricted access.
6.
To save the changes, click OK or press (§Enter). To lose the changes, click Cancel
or press (Esc).
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
6-5
Setting up Security
Entering Group Security
The Groups option allows you to create groups to which you can assign users. In Legi, groups
are used to implement function security and data security. If you will be using either function or
data security, you must create groups. For information on assigning data security to groups, see
Maintaining Data Security, page 4.
You can use the Groups option to:

Add a group to the system (see page 6)

Change a group's name (see page 7)

Remove a group from the system (see page 8)

View the users assigned to a group (see page 8)

Select which Legi functions the members of a group can access (see page 9)
To display the Groups dialog box, select Groups from the Security Menu.
Groups Dialog Box
Adding a Group
To add groups and set up different function security for each group, use the following
procedure.
1.
From the Group dialog box, select the Add button.
The system displays the Add Group dialog box.
Add Group Dialog Box
2.
In the Name text box, type the name for the group.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
6-6
Setting up Security
3.
To add the group to the system, click OK or press (§Enter). To cancel adding a
group, click Cancel or press (Esc).
The system returns to the Groups dialog box.
Changing a Group's Name
To change an existing group's name, use the following procedure.
1.
From the Group dialog box, highlight the group to change from the list of groups in
the system.
2.
Select the Change button.
The system displays the Change Group Name dialog box.
Change Group Name Dialog Box
3.
Edit the group name as necessary.
Because the name is highlighted, to delete the name entirely and type a new name,
begin typing. To edit the existing name, press any arrow key to remove the
highlight, then edit the name.
4.
To save the changes, click OK or press (§Enter). To lose any changes, click Cancel
or press (Esc).
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
6-7
Setting up Security
Viewing the Users in a Group
To view the users assigned to a group, use the following procedure.

1.
NOTE: The Groups option does not allow you to remove or add users to a group.
To change the users assigned to a group, see Assigning a User to Groups, page 18.
From the Group dialog box, highlight the group whose users you want to view.
The system displays the User List dialog box.
User List Dialog Box
2.
To return to the Groups dialog box, click OK or press (§Enter).
Deleting a Group
To remove a group from Legi, use the following procedure.

1.
NOTE: When you delete a group, if any users are assigned to the group, Legi
automatically removes that assignment from the users' profiles.
From the Group dialog box, highlight the group you want to remove.
The system displays the following message: OK to delete name? Name is the
name of the group.
2.
To delete the group, click Yes or press (§Enter). To keep the group, click No or press
(N).
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
6-8
Setting up Security
Defining Function Security for a Group
The Function Security option allows you to choose the Legi modules from the Main Menu
that a selected group will be able to access. For some menu modules, you can also control
the individual functions within the modules the group can access. For example, in the
Database module, you can specify whether a group can create tables. This level of security
is known as function security.
Function security will only be applicable if it is enabled on the Options dialog box. For
information on setting security options, see Selecting Security Options, page 20.

1.
NOTE: The changes entered do not take effect until you log out of the system and
log back in.
From the Group dialog box, highlight the group whose security you want to change
and select the Function Security button.
The system displays the Function Security dialog box.
Function Security Dialog Box
The group name selected is displayed in the title bar of the dialog box.
The options that the group cannot access are shaded out. Note that for the above
dialog box, the Accounting group can only access the Audit Trail and Serial Number
Tracking modules.
2.
To enable access to a module, in the Functions group box, select the checkbox for
the appropriate function. To select a checkbox, click the box or press (Tab¿) to move
the cursor to the box and press the spacebar.
When access is enabled, an X appears in the checkbox and the icon is not shaded
out. In the above dialog box, Audit Trail and Serial Number Tracking are both
selected.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
6-9
Setting up Security
3.
For the following modules, click the appropriate icon to enable specific functions
within the selected option:
Database
Displays the Database tables dialog box. For information on
specifying these options, see page 11.
Label Design
Displays the Label Design dialog box. For information on
specifying these options, see page 12.
Graphics
Displays the Graphics dialog box. For information on
specifying these options, see page 12.
Audit Trail
Displays the Audit Trail dialog box. For information on
specifying these options, see page 13.
Print Labels
Display the Print Labels dialog box. For information on
specifying these options, see page 14.
Security
The Security option does not have individual functions to
specify. A group is permitted access to all security functions
or no security functions. Select the Security check box to
grant permission.
SN Tracking
Displays the SN Tracking dialog box. For information on
specifying these options, see page 15.
Configuration
The Configuration option does not have individual functions
to specify. A group is permitted access to all configuration
functions or no configuration functions. Select the
Configuration check box to grant permission.

4.
NOTE: For the above modules, unless specific functions are enabled for
each module, the users in the selected group will only be able to access the
module and view files.
For each module, select the check boxes for each function that you want the group
members access.
The Access to Windows check box allows members of the group to have access to
Program Manager to run other Windows applications.
5.
To save the settings selected, click OK or press (§Enter). To lose the changes, click
Cancel or press (Esc).
The system returns to the Function Security dialog box.
6.
To save the function security options selected, click OK or press (§Enter). To lose
the changes, click Cancel or press (Esc).
The system returns to the Groups dialog box.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
6-10
Setting up Security
Database Security
To select the type of database functions the selected group can perform, use the
following procedure.
1.
Click the Database icon on the Function Security dialog box or move the
cursor to the icon and press the spacebar.
The system displays the Database Files dialog box.
Database Files Dialog Box
2.
Select any of the following options to enable access. To select an option,
click the box or press (Tab¿) to move the cursor to the box and press the
spacebar.
Create files
Allow the group to create tables. If you select this
option, you must also select the Add, change, delete
records option. Otherwise, the users in the group are
unable to enter the information that describes the new
table.
Delete files
Allow the group to delete database tables.
Print files
Allow the group to print database tables.
Clear files
Allow the group to clear all the records in a table. If
you select this option, you must also select the Add,
change, delete records option. Otherwise, the users
in the group would be unable to save the table they
cleared.
Import/export files
Allow the group to import and export database tables.
Add, change, delete
records
Allow the group to edit the records in a table,
including adding and deleting records and changing
existing records. This option also allows members of
the group to use the Table Save menu item. When
any users attempt to save a table, if this option is not
checked, Legi will not allow them to save.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
6-11
Setting up Security
Edit language files

3.
Allow the group to change the language table. If you
select this option, you must also select the Add,
change, delete records option. Otherwise, the users
in the group would be unable to save the language
file edits they made.
NOTE: If no checkboxes are selected but a user is given Database
Maintenance access, a user can access Database Maintenance and view or
query tables only.
To save the options selected, click OK or press (§Enter). To lose the changes,
click Cancel or press (Esc).
The system returns to the Function Security dialog box.
Label Design Security
The Label Design dialog box allows you to select the type of label design functions
the selected group can perform.
1.
Click the Label Design icon on the Function Security dialog box or move the
cursor to the icon and press the spacebar.
The system displays the Label Design dialog box.
Label Design Dialog Box
2.

3.
Select any of the following options to enable access. To select an option,
click the box or press (Tab¿) to move the cursor to the box and press the
spacebar.
Create, edit, test print
labels, print label
reports
Allow the group to create and change labels as
well as test print labels and print label reports.
Delete labels
Allow the group to delete label files.
NOTE: If no checkboxes are selected but a user is given Label Design access,
a user can access Label Design and view and modify labels only, but cannot
save any changes.
To save the options selected, click OK or press (§Enter). To lose the changes,
click Cancel or press (Esc).
The system returns to the Function Security dialog box.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
6-12
Setting up Security
Graphics Security
The Graphics dialog box allows you to select the type of Graphics functions the
selected group can perform.
1.
Click the Graphics icon on the Function Security dialog box or move the
cursor to the icon and press the spacebar.
The system displays the Graphics dialog box.
Graphics Dialog Box
2.

3.
Select any of the following options to enable access. To select an option,
click the box or press (Tab¿) to move the cursor to the box and press the
spacebar.
Print graphics
Allow the group to print graphics.
Delete graphics
Allow the group to delete graphic files.
NOTE: If no checkboxes are selected but a user is given Graphics access, a
user can access Graphics and view a file only.
To save the options selected, click OK or press (§Enter). To lose the changes,
click Cancel or press (Esc).
The system returns to the Function Security dialog box.
Audit Trail Security
The Audit Trail dialog box allows you to select the type of Audit Trail functions the
selected group can perform.
1.
Click the Audit Trail icon on the Function Security dialog box or move the
cursor to the icon and press the spacebar.
The system displays the Audit Trail dialog box.
Audit Trail Dialog Box
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
6-13
Setting up Security
2.


3.
Select any of the following options to enable access. To select an option,
click the box or press (Tab¿) to move the cursor to the box and press the
spacebar.
Add, delete, adjust
label stock records
Allow the group to add, delete, or change the records
in the label stock database table.
Print label stock
table
Allow the group to print the label stock database table.
Add, delete, adjust
system print log
records
Allow the group to add, delete, or change the records
in the system print log database table.
Print system print log
Allow the group to print the system print log database
table.
Clear system print
log
Allow the group to clear all records in the system print
log database table.
NOTE: If no checkboxes are selected but a user is given Audit Trail access, a
user can access the audit trail files and view a file only.
NOTE: Because the audit trail logs are stored in database tables, you must
also enable the Add, change, delete records option in Database function
security to be able to add and or change these tables where applicable.
To save the options selected, click OK or press (§Enter). To lose the changes,
click Cancel or press (Esc).
The system returns to the Function Security dialog box.
Print Labels Security
To display the Print Labels dialog box, select the Print Labels icon on the Function
Security dialog box. This dialog box allows you to select the type of printing
functions the selected group can perform.
1.
Click the Print Labels icon on the Function Security dialog box or move the
cursor to the icon and press the spacebar.
The system displays the Print Labels dialog box.
Print Labels Dialog Box
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
6-14
Setting up Security
2.
3.
Select any of the following options to enable access. To select an option,
click the box or press (Tab¿) to move the cursor to the box and press the
spacebar.
Delete print jobs
Allow the group to delete print jobs.
Change print counts
Allow the group to change the print count options
on the Print Job window.
To save the options selected, click OK or press (§Enter). To lose the changes,
click Cancel or press (Esc).
The system returns to the Function Security dialog box.
Serial Number Tracking Security
The SN Tracking dialog box allows you to select the type of SN Tracking functions
the selected group can perform.
1.
Click the SN Tracking icon on the Function Security dialog box or move the
cursor to the icon and press the spacebar.
The system displays the Serial Numbers dialog box.
Serial Numbers Dialog Box
2.
Select any of the following options to enable access. To select an option,
click the box or press (Tab¿) to move the cursor to the box and press the
spacebar.
Add or change serial
numbers


3.
Allow the group to add or change the records in the
Tracking Serial Numbers database table.
NOTE: If no checkboxes are selected but a user is given Serial Number
Tracking access, a user can access the serial number tracking file and view a
file only.
NOTE: Because tracking serial numbers are stored in a database table, you
must also enable the Add, change, delete records option in Database function
security to be able to add and or change tracking serial numbers.
To save the options selected, click OK or press (§Enter). To lose the changes,
click Cancel or press (Esc).
The system returns to the Function Security dialog box.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
6-15
Setting up Security
Entering User Security
If you are using groups as part of Legi security, once the groups have been added, you can add
users to the system and assign them to groups. If you do not assign a user to any groups and you
are using group level security, then that user will be unable to access any Legi options.
If you have not enabled function level or data level security using the Options selection, then you
do not need to add the user to any groups.
After selecting Users from the Security Menu, Legi displays the Users dialog box. This dialog
box displays the list of users in the system. From this dialog box, you have access to:

Adding new users

Changing the profile for existing users

Assigning users to selected groups

Removing users from a group

Removing users from the system
A user's profile includes the password (if any) specified for the user and the user's group
assignments (if any).
Users Dialog Box
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
6-16
Setting up Security
Adding a User
To add a user to the system, use the following procedure.
1.
From the Users dialog box, select the Add button.
The system displays the Add User dialog box.
Add User Dialog Box
2.
In the User Name text box, type the user's name.
The name entered here is the name the user will enter to sign in. When signing in,
the system is case sensitive. This text box is required.
3.
In the User Password text box, if you are using passwords, type the user's password.
When logging in with the password, the system is case sensitive. This text box is
optional.
4.
To assign the user to groups, select the Assign To button.
The system displays the Groups dialog box. For a step by step procedure on using
this dialog box, see Assigning a User to Groups, page 18.
5.
To save the user information entered, select the OK button.
Changing an Existing User's Information
Once a user has been added, you can change the user's password and other information.

1.
NOTE: The changes entered do not take effect until you log out of the system and
log back in.
From the Users dialog box, highlight the user whose information you want to
change.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
6-17
Setting up Security
2.
Select the Change button.
The system displays the Change User dialog box. This dialog box is the same as the
Add User dialog box, only it already displays the user's information.
3.
Change the User Name or User Password text boxes.
4.
To change the groups to which the user is assigned, select the Assign To button.
The system displays the Groups dialog box. For a step by step procedure on using
this dialog box, see Assigning a User to Groups, page 18.
6.
To save the changes, click OK or press (Alt)-(O). To lose the changes and close the
dialog box, click Cancel or press (Esc).
Assigning a User to Groups
Function level security and data security are assigned at the group level. If these levels of
security are implemented, then the options a user can access is based upon group
membership. For example, if function security is implemented and a user is not assigned
to any groups, the user will be unable to access any of the Legi options.
Use the following procedure to assign the user to groups.

NOTE: The changes entered do not take effect until you log out of the system and
log back in.
1.
From the Users dialog box, highlight the user you want to assign to a group.
2.
Select the Change button.
The system displays the Change User dialog box.
3.
From the Change User dialog box, in the Group Assignments group box, select the
Assign To button.
The system displays the Groups dialog box, listing all of the groups in the system to
which the user does not belong.
Groups Dialog Box
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
6-18
Setting up Security
4.
To add the user to a group, highlight the appropriate group and select the Add
button. To select more than one group, click each group name with the mouse
pointer, then select the Add button.
The system returns to the Add/Change User dialog box with the group just selected
displayed in the Group Assignments dialog box.
5.
To save your changes, click OK or press (Alt)-(O). To lose the changes and close the
dialog box, click Cancel or press (Esc).
Removing a User from a Group
Use the following procedure to remove a user from a group assignment.

NOTE: The changes entered do not take effect until you log out of the system and
log back in.
1.
From the Users dialog box, highlight the user you want to change.
2.
Select the Change button.
The system displays the Change User dialog box.
3.
In the Group Assignments group box, highlight the group and select the Remove
From button.
4.
To save your changes, click OK or press (Alt)-(O). To lose the changes and close the
dialog box, click Cancel or press (Esc).
Removing a User from the System
To remove a user from the system, use the following procedure.

NOTE: The changes entered do not take effect until you log out of the system and
log back in.
1.
From the Users dialog box, highlight the user you want to delete.
2.
Select the Delete button.
Legi removes the user name from the list of users.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
6-19
Setting up Security
Selecting Security Options
Legi incorporates two types of security: function security and data security. Function security
allows you to select which Legi functions can be accessed by users. Because it would be time
consuming to select function security for each user, this level of security is assigned at the group
level.
Data security allows you to restrict access to certain directories. Usually you would implement
this feature if certain directories contain sensitive or important data. Data security is also
assigned at the group level.
This option allows you to indicate which security options you will be using. If an option is not
selected, it cannot be implemented.

1.
NOTE: The changes you enter do not take effect until you log out of the system and log
back in.
From the Security Menu, select Options.
Legi displays the Options dialog box.
Options Dialog Box
2.
If you will be implementing function security, select the Enable function security check
box.
If function security is enabled, this box is already checked.
3.
If you will be implementing data security, select the Enable data security check box.
If data security is enabled, this box is already checked.
4.
To save the changes, click OK or press (§Enter). To lose the changes and close the dialog
box, click Cancel or press (Esc).
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
6-20
Using the Graphics Module
7
6Using the Graphics
Module
The Graphics Print and View module allows you to view and print
graphics. Because this option prints to a label printer, you can use it to
check print quality and label placement. You can view graphics that are
in bitmap format (.BMP extension) or PCX format (.PCX extension).
Overview
This chapter covers the following topics, listed under the menu from which each is accessed.
File Menu

Delete graphics files (page 5).
View Menu

Select a graphic or graphics to view (page 3).

View the exact height and width of the displayed graphic in the unit of measure specified
(page 4).
Print Menu

Configure a printer to use with the graphics module. This step must be completed before
you can use this module (page 6).

Set printer options (page 7).

Print the displayed graphic (page 7) or multiple graphic files (page 7).
Help Menu

View online help information.
Chapter 2, Getting Started.
For information on working with help windows, see
7-1
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
Using the Graphics Module
Using the Graphics Module
After you select the Graphics icon on the Main Menu, the system displays the Configuration
window. You cannot display a graphic until you first configure Graphics Print and View for use
with a printer. For information on configuring a printer, see page 6. After configuring a printer,
the system displays the Graphics Print and View window.
Graphics Print and View Window
The body of the window is the graphics view area. The above sample shows a graphic loaded.
The menu bar allows you to select the viewing and printing options.

NOTE: You cannot edit graphics using this option.
7-2
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
Using the Graphics Module
Selecting a Graphic To View
To select a graphic to view, use the following procedure.

1.
NOTE: Unless Graphics Print and View has been configured for a printer, you cannot
view any graphics.
From the View menu, choose the Select option.
The system displays the File Select dialog box.
2.
In the Drives drop-down list box, select the drive where the file is located.
3.
In the Directories list box, use the scroll bar to scroll through the available directories on
the selected drive. Select the appropriate directory.
4.
To select the graphics file, scroll through the list of files and highlight the file. To select
more than one file, complete one of the following steps:


/
5.
Hold the left mouse button and drag the pointer down the list. As you drag the
mouse, the files are highlighted.
Hold (Shift) and press (£) or (¥). As you press the arrow key, the files are
highlighted.
To select non-contiguous files, hold (Ctrl) and click the desired files with the
mouse pointer. The selected files are highlighted.
To display the graphic, click OK or press (§Enter). To cancel displaying a graphic, click
Cancel or press (Esc).
Displaying the Next Graphic in the List
If you selected more than one graphic to display, you can display the next graphic in the
list by selecting Next from the View Menu. You can also press (Ctrl)-(N).
Displaying the Previous Graphic in the List
If you selected more than one graphic to display, you can display the previous graphic in
the list by selecting Previous from the View Menu. You can also press (Ctrl)-(P).
7-3
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
Using the Graphics Module
Viewing a Graphic's Information
To view information about a graphic, use the following procedure. Use this dialog box to view
the exact width and height of the graphic to help determine its placement on a label.
1.
With a graphic already displayed, select Info from the View menu.
The system displays the Information window.
Information Window
2.
Select the appropriate Unit of Measure option button.
The Height and Width text boxes change to correspond to the unit of measure chosen.
3.
To return to the graphic window, select the Exit button.
7-4
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
Using the Graphics Module
Deleting a Graphic
To delete a graphic file, use the following procedure.
1.
From the File Menu, select Delete.
The system displays the File Delete dialog box.
2.
In the Drives drop-down list box, select the drive where the file is located.
3.
In the Directories list box, use the scroll bar to scroll through the available directories on
the selected drive. Select the appropriate directory.
4.
To select the file to delete, scroll through the list of files and highlight the file to delete.
5.
To delete the file, click OK or press (§Enter). To cancel deleting the file, click Cancel or
press (Esc).
7-5
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
Using the Graphics Module
Printing
This section explains how to configure Graphics Print and View for a printer and how to print
selected graphics.
Configuring a Printer
To configure the Graphics option for use with a printer, use the following procedure.
1.
From the Print menu, select Configuration.
The system displays the Configuration dialog box.
Configuration Dialog Box
2.
In the Printer Name drop-down list box, select the printer to use.
To display the printers available for the application, click anywhere in the field.
Highlight the appropriate printer and double-click with the mouse or press (§Enter).
3.
In the Label Stock drop-down list box, select the label stock to print on or type the
name of the label stock to use.
To display the stock available for the application, click anywhere in the field.
Highlight the appropriate stock and double-click with the mouse or press (§Enter).
4.
In the Mode drop-down list box, select the printer mode to use.
To display the modes available for the selected printer, click anywhere in the field.
Highlight the appropriate mode and double-click with the mouse or press (§Enter).
5.
In the Port drop-down list box, select the port to use with the selected printer.
This drop-down list box is required.
To display the ports available for the selected printer, click anywhere in the field.
Highlight the appropriate port and double-click with the mouse or press (§Enter).
6.
In the Label height and Label width text boxes, enter in inches the size of the label
you are using.
If you are test printing this graphic for a particular label design, enter the size of that
label.
7.
In the Identical copies text box, enter the number of copies to print.
7-6
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
Using the Graphics Module
8.
To set options for the printer, click the Options button.
For more information on using this option, see the following section, Setting
Printer Options.
9.
To save the changes, click OK or press (Alt)-(O). To lose the changes and close the
dialog box, click Cancel or press (Alt)-(C).
Setting Printer Options
To set options specific to the selected printer, use the following procedure.
1.
From the Print Menu, select Printer Options.
The system displays the Print Options dialog box. If an option is shaded out, it is
not available for the printer or it has not been configured for a printer. For example,
in the following dialog box, Cut during print is shaded out because the selected
printer does not have a cutter installed.
The Print Options dialog box will vary depending on the type of printer selected.
Following is an example of the type of dialog box you may see.
Printer Options dialog box
2.
Select the appropriate options.
For detailed information on the available options, see Appendix F, Printer Specific
Functions.
3.
To save the changes, click OK or press (Alt)-(O). To lose the changes and close the
dialog box, click Cancel or press (Alt)-(C).
Printing the Displayed Graphic
To print the displayed graphic, from the Print Menu, select Print viewed graphic. The
system prints the graphic using the configuration options selected.
Printing Multiple Graphics
To print multiple graphics, use the following procedure:
1.
From the Print menu, select Print multiple graphics.
The system displays the File Select dialog box.
2.
In the Drives drop-down list box, select the drive where the files are located.
3.
In the Directories list box, use the scroll bar to scroll through the available
directories on the selected drive. Select the appropriate directory.
4.
To select the files to print, complete one of the following steps:
7-7
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
Using the Graphics Module


/
5.
Hold the left mouse button and drag the pointer down the list. As you
drag the mouse, the files are highlighted.
Hold (Shift) and press (£) or (¥). As you press the arrow key, the files are
highlighted.
To select non-contiguous files, hold (Ctrl) and click the desired files with
the mouse pointer. The selected files are highlighted.
To print the files, click OK or press (§Enter). To cancel printing the files, click
Cancel or press (Esc).
7-8
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
Using Serial Number Tracking
8
7Using Serial
Number Tracking
Tracking serial numbers are serial numbers that are given a name and
tracked by the system. If a label includes a tracking serial number field,
when that label prints, the initial value of that field is taken from the tracking
serial number table. When the print job is submitted, the current serial number is updated in the
tracking serial number table to reflect the last serial number that the print job will use.
Overview
For a label that includes a regular serial number field, the system does not keep track of the last
number used. Each time the label is printed, the serial number will begin at the specified start
point.
The Tracking Serial Numbers table displays when you select Serial Number Tracking from the
Main Menu.
Tracking Serial Numbers Table
This table contains the following headings:
Serial Number Name
Displays the names of any serial numbers currently in the system.
Current Serial Number Displays the serial number that will be used next.
The Tracking Serial Numbers table is a database table and can be maintained using the Database
Maintenance option. You can add tracking serial numbers and change the number for a tracking
serial number. Because this table is a special table maintained by the system, all Database
Maintenance options are not available.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
8-1
Using Serial Number Tracking
Adding Tracking Serial Numbers
The Tracking Serial Numbers table is a database table and can be maintained using the Database
Maintenance option. You can add tracking serial numbers and change the number for a tracking
serial number. Because this table is a special table maintained by the system, all Database
Maintenance options are not available.
Use the following procedure to add a tracking serial number to the table.
1.
From the Main Menu, select Serial Number Tracking.
The system displays the Tracking Serial Numbers table within the Database Maintenance
module. Because this table is a special table maintained by the system, all Database
Maintenance functions are not available.
2.
To add a record, move to the last record in the table and press (¥).
The system adds a blank record.
3.
Move to the Serial Number Name field and press (§Enter).
4.
Type the name of the serial number to use.
This name must be unique, and can be no longer than 25 characters.
5.
Press (¿Tab).
6.
In the Current Serial Number field, type the value at which this serial number will begin,
and press (§Enter).
This number must be a whole number. It cannot include decimals.
7.
From the File Menu, select Save to save the changes.
8.
To return to the previous window, select Exit from the File Menu.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
8-2
Using Serial Number Tracking
Changing the Current Serial Number
To change the next serial number that will be used for a tracking serial number, use the following
procedure.

1.
WARNING: Changing an existing serial number name may affect whether the serial
number is used properly. If you change a serial number name and it has already been
specified in a label format as a tracking serial number field, you must change the name in
the label format to reflect the new name.
From the Main Menu, select Serial Number Tracking.
The system displays the Tracking Serial Numbers table within the Database Maintenance
option.
2.
Move to the Current Serial Number field and press (§Enter).
3.
Type the number at which this serial number will begin, and press (§Enter).
This number must be a whole number. It cannot include decimals.
4.
To save the changes, select Save from the File Menu.
5.
To return to the previous window, select Exit from the File Menu.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
8-3
Using Serial Number Tracking
This page intentionally left blank
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
8-4
Using the Audit Trail
9
8Using the Audit Trail
Overview
The Audit Trail module tracks printing information in three database tables.
Each of the three options can be enabled or disabled using the Configuration
module. The Audit Trail module tracks the following information:
Label stock
Tracks the label stock levels for selected label stock. You can add label
stock names to this table and update the quantities as necessary.
System print log
Keeps track of all print jobs. Every time a print job is submitted, the
system captures the print run information.
Label print logs
Label print logs are user-defined database tables that maintain print job
information for selected labels. For example, a sample label print log
may contain the stock name, the label name, the date and time the label
was printed, and the name of any label fields.
This chapter covers the following options, listed under menu from which each is accessed.
Select Menu

Display and edit the label stock table (page 3).

Display the system print log table (page 6).

Create, display, and edit label print logs (page 7).
Help Menu

View online help information.
Chapter 2, Getting Started.
For information on working with help windows, see
Icons
Each of the icons are duplicated on the Select Menu.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
9-1
Using the Audit Trail
Accessing the Audit Trail Menu
To display the Audit Trail Menu, select the Audit Trail module from the Main Menu. The system
displays the Audit Trail menu.
Audit Trail Menu
This module allows you to view the audit trail tables that the system maintains. All of the audit
trail tables are displayed in the Database Maintenance module.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
9-2
Using the Audit Trail
Using the Label Stock Log
The label stock log is a database table maintained by the system and displayed within the
Database Maintenance module. The system tracks the label stock quantities for selected label
stock and stores the information in the database table. The system updates this database table
after every successful print job, including print jobs printed to a file. You can add label stock
names to this table and update the quantities as necessary. You can also use this log to view the
label stock to reorder.
This section explains each option.
Editing the Label Stock Log
To view and edit the label stock log, use the following procedure.

1.
NOTE: Unless you have enabled the label stock log option in Legi configuration,
the system will not update the label stock log.
From the Audit Trail Menu, select Label stock log.
The system displays the label stock log table within the Database Maintenance
module. Because this table is considered a special table maintained by the system,
all Database Maintenance options are not available.
Label Stock Log
2.
To add a label stock to the system, move to the last record in the table and press (¥).
If no label stock entries exist, press (¥) to add the first entry.
The system adds a blank record.
3.
Enter the appropriate information for the following fields.
For information on using the Database Maintenance module to edit a table, see
Using the Database Maintenance Module.
Stock Name
The name of the stock. Any stock names added in this
column will appear as label stock selections elsewhere in
Legi.
Start Date
Enter the start date for this label stock. You can use the start
date as the date new label stock was received or ordered, or
for any other bookkeeping purposes. The system does not
update the start date.
Current Quantity
The number of labels currently in stock.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
9-3
Using the Audit Trail
Reorder Quantity
The stock point at which the labels should be reordered.
If you do not want to track reorder quantity for a particular
label stock, enter 0 in this field.
Comments
Any comments about the label stock, such as the type of print
job it is used for.
The system updates the following fields:
Current Quantity
If the Reorder Quantity field is not set to 0, the system
updates the current quantity.
Labels Printed
The total number of labels printed to date using the label
stock. The system updates this field at the start of each print
job.
Reorder Now
Legi compares the reorder quantity amount to the current
quantity amount. When the current quantity is less than or
equal to the reorder quantity, Legi places an asterisk (*) in the
Reorder Now field. If the option Notify low stock at print
time is selected in the Legi Options dialog box, when this
label stock is selected, Legi will check to see if an asterisk is
in this field. If this field contains an asterisk, when you print
using this label stock, Legi displays the message: Stock
reorder quantity reached! Continue? You then have the
option of continuing or stopping the print job to select
different label stock.
4.
To save the changes, select Save from the File Menu.
5.
To return to the previous window, select Exit from the File Menu.
Viewing the Stock to Reorder
The label stock log tracks the label stock levels for selected label stock. You can use this
table to track when to reorder the label stock.

NOTE: Unless you have enabled the label stock log option in Legi configuration,
the system will not update the label stock log.
The system compares the reorder quantity amount to the current quantity amount. When
the current quantity is less than or equal to the reorder quantity, Legi places an asterisk (*)
in the Reorder Now field. If the option Notify low stock at print time is selected in the Legi
Options dialog box, when this label stock is selected, Legi will check to see if an asterisk is
in this field. If this field contains an asterisk, when you print using this label stock, Legi
displays the message: Stock reorder quantity reached! Continue? You then have the
option of continuing or stopping the print job to select different label stock.
To create a table to display only the label stock that needs to be reordered, use the
following procedure.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
9-4
Using the Audit Trail
1.
From the Audit Trail Menu, select Label stock log.
The system displays the label stock log table within the Database Maintenance
module. Because this table is considered a special table maintained by the system,
all Database Maintenance options are not available.
2.
Create a query that specifies that the Reorder Now field equals *.
For more information on creating queries, see Performing Queries in Chapter 3,
Using the Database Maintenance Module.
3.
Select the Proceed push button.
The system displays only those label stock records that need to be reordered in the
answer table.
4.
To save the answer table under a new name, select Save from the File Menu.
5.
Enter the appropriate file name and click OK or press (§Enter).
The system displays the table saved under the selected file name.
6.
To return to the previous window, select Exit from the File Menu.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
9-5
Using the Audit Trail
Viewing the System Print Log
The system print log keeps track of all print jobs. Every time a print job is submitted, the system
captures the print run information. The system print log is a database table maintained by the
system and displayed within the Database Maintenance module. Because this table is considered
a special table maintained by the system, not all of the Database Maintenance options are
available.

1.
NOTE: Unless you have enabled the system print log option in Configuration, the system
will not update the system print log.
From the Audit Trail Menu, select the System print log option.
The system displays the system print log table within the Database Maintenance module.
System Print Log
The system print log captures the following information for each print job.
2.
Stock Name
If the print job had a label stock selected, displays the name of the
stock.
Label Name
If the label had a name, displays the name of the label used in the
print job.
Date
The date the print job was submitted.
Time
The time the print job was submitted.
User Name
The name of the user who submitted the print job.
Total Labels
The number of labels printed in the label run.
Job Aborted
If the print job was aborted, an asterisk (*) displays in this field. If
an asterisk appears in this field, the Total Labels field may not
indicate the correct number of labels printed.
To delete old print records, move the highlight to the record to delete and press (Alt)-(Delete).
To delete all the records, select Clear All Records from the Options Menu.
For example, at the end of every month, you may want to save the system print log under a
different name to save the month's log of print jobs. You can then open the system print
log and clear all records, allowing you to start the log over at the beginning of every
month.
3.
To save the changes, select Save from the File Menu.
4.
To return to the previous window, select Exit from the File Menu.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
9-6
Using the Audit Trail
Creating a Label Print Log
Label print logs are user-defined database tables that maintain print job information for selected
labels. For example, a sample label print log may contain the stock name, the label name, the
date and time the label was printed, and the name of any label fields.
To link a label print log to a label, first create the label format. In the Label Settings dialog box
in the Label Design module, enter the name of the label print log in the Label Print Log text box.
Then, create the label print log based on the fields in the label format. When that label or any
other labels that specify the label print log are printed, the system updates the label print log with
the print information.
For example, a label may include a query. If the label field name that contains the query is
included in the label print log, the log will list all of the records that were printed for the print run.

NOTE: Unless you have enabled the label print log option in Configuration, the system
will not update the label print log.
To create a label print log, use the following procedure.
1.
Create the label format. In the Label Settings dialog box in the Label Design module, enter
the name of the label print log in the Label Print Log text box.
For information on creating the label format, see Chapter 4, Designing Labels.
2.
As you create the label fields, give descriptive names to the fields that you wish to identify
in the label print log.
Note the field names you want to include in the label print log.
3.
To create the label print log, access the Database Maintenance module.
4.
Create a table using the procedure described in Creating a Database Table in Chapter 3,
Using the Database Maintenance Module.
For the database field names, type the label field names that you want to link to the label
data. The information between the two fields are linked by giving the same name to the
database field and the label field. For the field type, each type should be alphanumeric,
with the number of characters specified that will be in the label field.
For example, if your label contains a field names Product ID, you could create a database
field called Product ID. The database field would be updated at print time with the data in
the label's Product ID field.

NOTE: The field names are not case sensitive.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
9-7
Using the Audit Trail
5.
You can use any of the following system reserved fields, followed by the field type for
each:
Stock Name
A25
Label Name
A8
Date
D
Time
A12
User Name
A24
Total Labels
N
For an explanation of these fields, see Viewing the System Print Log, page 6.
6.
To save the table, select Save from the File Menu.
Remember to use the name specified in the label format. When that label or any other
labels that specify the label print log are printed, the system updates the label print log with
the print information.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
9-8
Configuring Legi
10
9Configuring
Legi
The Configuration module allows you to customize certain aspects of Legi.
This chapter explains how to use the Configuration module to set up Legi for
your site, including specifying default directories, connecting and configuring
printers, implementing audit trail features, and selecting a language file.
Overview
This chapter covers the following topics, listed under the menu from which each is accessed.
Setup Menu

Specify the default directories for database files, label formats, graphics, and language
files. This option makes it easier to quickly select files from these options. For more
information, see page 3.

Select whether to implement audit trail options, including checking label stock, system
print logs and label print logs. For more information, see page 4.

Configure the label printers to use with Legi for all modules except Database Maintenance.
For more information, see page 7.

Customize Legi for use with another language by selecting a different language file. For
more information, see page 5.

Configure the COM port for use with remote input. For more information, see page 24.

Save the configuration.
Fonts Menu

Specify custom fonts to use with Legi printers. For more information, see page 15.

Specify external font cartridges to use with Legi printers. For more information, see page
22.
Help Menu

View online help information.
Chapter 2, Getting Started.
For information on working with help windows, see
Icons
Each of the icon options can be accessed from the Setup Menu.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
10-1
Configuring Legi
Accessing the Configuration Module
To display the Configuration Menu, select the Configuration module from the Main Menu. The
system displays the Configuration Menu.
Configuration Menu
You can access the available options by clicking an icon or by selecting the appropriate option
from the Setup Menu.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
10-2
Configuring Legi
Entering the Default Directories
When opening a file from one of the Legi modules, the File Select dialog box will display the
files in the directory specified as the default. To customize these default directories, use the
following procedure.
1.
From the Configuration Menu, select the Directories option.
The system displays the Default Directories dialog box.
Default Directories Dialog Box
2.
3.
Complete each of the following text boxes:
Database Files
Enter the full path for the default directory for the Database
Maintenance module. The path entered here will be the default when
selecting database files. For example, enter
C:\LEGIWIN\DATABASE.
Label Formats
Enter the full path for the default directory for the Label Design and
Label Print modules. The path entered here will be the default when
selecting label formats. For example, enter C:\LEGIWIN\LABELS.
Graphics
Enter the full path for the default directory for the Graphics module.
The path entered here will be the default when selecting graphic files
to view. For example, enter C:\LEGIWIN\DATA.
Languages
Enter the full path for the default directory for the language database
file. The path entered here will be the default when selecting the
language file to use in the Languages option of Configuration. For
example, enter C:\LEGIWIN\LANGUAGE.
To save the changes, click OK or press (Alt)-(O). To lose the changes and close the dialog
box, click Cancel or press (Alt)-(C).
If you entered a directory that does not exist, the system will display an error message and
not allow the change.

NOTE: Unless these changes are saved to disk, they are saved only for the current session.
To save the configuration to disk, see Saving Configuration Changes, page 26.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
10-3
Configuring Legi
Selecting Legi Options
You have the option of using several audit trail features that Legi provides. For example, Legi
can keep track of the label stock and update the number of labels left after each label print job.
This option allows you to select whether to implement the audit trail features.
1.
From the Configuration Menu, select the Options option.
The system displays the Legi Options dialog box.
Legi Options Dialog Box
2.
In the System Tables group box, select any of the following check boxes that are required.
For example, if you will manually check the label stock, you would not select Update
Label Stock.
Update label
stock
Update the label stock table after printing. If this option is selected, the
system will update the label stock table to reflect current stock
quantities based on how many labels were printed.
Notify low
stock at print
time
Check the label stock table to be notified if the label reorder quantity
has been reached. Because this feature can lengthen the time it takes to
print labels, you may wish to disable this feature and check the label
stock quantities manually.
Update system
print log
Maintain the system print log. This feature updates the audit trail of
the users who have submitted print jobs. For more information on this
option, see Using System Print Logs in Chapter 7, Using the Audit
Trail Option.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
10-4
Configuring Legi
Update label
print logs
Update the label print log when printing. This feature allows you to
use custom label print logs. Labels can then be linked to label print
logs. When the label is printed, the label print information is sent to
the appropriate log. These print logs can contain customized fields
linked to the label. For more information, see Using Label Print Logs
in Chapter 7, Using the Audit Trail Option.
3.
In the Unit of Measure group box, specify the units to use when creating labels, either
inches, centimeters, points, or dots.
4.
In the Application Designer group box, to run the application designer from the Print
Labels button, click the check box and type the application designer file name in the text
box. When you click the Print Labels button, the system will run the application designer
listed here instead of Print Labels.
5.
To save the changes, click OK or press (Alt)-(O). To lose the changes and close the dialog
box, click Cancel or press (Alt)-(C).

NOTE: Unless these changes are saved to disk, they are saved only for the current session.
To save the configuration to disk, see Saving Configuration Changes, page 26.
Changing the Language Selection
This option allows you to select another language database file so that Legi can be used with
other languages. For example, you may have a French language file. If this file is selected, all
dialog box and message text will appear in French.
To change the language file, use the following procedure.
1.
From the Configuration Menu, select the Languages option.
The system displays the Language Selection dialog box.
Language Selection Dialog Box
The Current language file selection display shows the current language file selected.
2.
To select an alternate language file, click the Select button.
The system displays the Table Select dialog box.
3.
In the Drives drop-down list box, select the drive where the file is located.
4.
In the Directories list box, use the scroll bar to scroll through the available directories on
the selected drive. Select the appropriate directory.
5.
To select the language file to use, scroll through the list of files and highlight the file.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
10-5
Configuring Legi
6.
To select the file, click OK or press (§Enter). To cancel the selection, click Cancel or press
(Esc).
The system returns to the Language Selection dialog box with the name of the selected file
in the Current Language File selection display.

7.

NOTE: If the file selected is not a language file, the system displays an error and cancels
the selection.
To save the changes, click OK or press (Alt)-(O). To lose the changes and close the dialog
box, click Cancel or press (Alt)-(C).
NOTE: Unless these changes are saved to disk, they are saved only for the current session.
To save the configuration to disk, see Saving Configuration Changes, page 26.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
10-6
Configuring Legi
Configuring a Printer
This section explains how to configure the label printers for use with Legi. The printers
configured using this option affect the Label Printing and Graphics Print and View modules. This
option does not affect the Database Maintenance module, which uses the Windows printer
configuration because database files do not require a label printer.
To display the Printer Configuration dialog box, select the Printers option on the Configuration
Menu.
Printer Configuration Dialog Box
The Printer list list box displays the printers that Legi supports. The Printer/port connection list
box displays the printers connected to a port. A printer cannot be used unless it has been
connected to a port using the Connect to Port button.
From the Printer Configuration dialog box, you can:

Connect a printer to a port

Change a port connection

Specify line settings for a port connection

Remove a port connection

Add a Windows printer driver

Specify printer options
Connecting a Printer to a Port
This option allows you to connect the supported printers to the appropriate ports. A printer
cannot be used for printing unless it is connected to a port using this option.
1.
From the Configuration Menu, select the Printers option.
The system displays the Printer Configuration dialog box. The Printer/port
connection list box displays the printers already connected to ports.
2.
In the Printer List list box, highlight the printer to connect and select the Connect to
Port button.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
10-7
Configuring Legi
The system displays the Port Connection dialog box.
Port Connection Dialog Box
The printer selected is displayed in the title bar of the dialog box.
3.
Highlight the available port to use.
The port currently highlighted is displayed in the New connection selection display.

4.

NOTE: To specify the line settings for the selected COM port, select the
Settings button. For more information on specifying port line settings, see
Specifying Line Settings, page 9.
To connect the printer to the selected port, click OK or press (Alt)-(O). To cancel the
connection and close the dialog box, click Cancel or press (Alt)-(C).
NOTE: Unless these changes are saved to disk, they are saved only for the current
session. To save the configuration to disk, see Saving Configuration Changes,
page 26.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
10-8
Configuring Legi
Changing a Port
Once a printer is connected, you can change the port it is connected to using the following
procedure.
1.
From the Configuration Menu, select the Printers option.
The system displays the Printer Configuration dialog box. The Printer/port
connection list box displays the printers already connected to ports.
2.
Highlight the printer/port connection to change and select the Change Port button.
The system displays the Port Connection dialog box. The printer selected is
displayed in the title bar of the dialog box.
3.
Highlight the available port to use.
Note that the current port is not available to select. The port currently highlighted is
displayed in the New connection selection display. When you select a different port,
the previous port is displayed in the Previous connection selection display.

4.
NOTE: To specify the line settings for the selected communications (COM)
port, select the Settings button. For more information on specifying port line
settings, see Specifying Line Settings, page 9.
To connect the printer to the selected port, click OK or press (Alt)-(O). To cancel the
connection and close the dialog box, click Cancel or press (Alt)-(C).

NOTE: Unless these changes are saved to disk, they are saved only for the
current session. To save the configuration to disk, see Saving Configuration
Changes, page 26.
Specifying Line Settings
To specify the line settings for a selected communications (COM) port, use the
following procedure.
1.
From the Port Connection dialog box, highlight a COM port to configure and
select the Settings button.
The system displays the Line Settings dialog box.
Line Settings Dialog Box
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
10-9
Configuring Legi
2.
In the Speed group box, select the option button to indicate the port speed.
The default is 9600.
3.
In the Word Length group box, select the option button to indicate the data bit
length.
The default is 8.
4.
In the Stop Bits group box, select the option button to indicate the stop bit
length.
The default is 1.
5.
In the Handshake group box, select the appropriate check boxes.
The default is Xon/Xoff.
6.
In the Parity group box, select the option button to indicate the parity being
used.
The default is none.
7.

To save the changes, click OK or press (Alt)-(O). To lose the changes and
close the dialog box, click Cancel or press (Alt)-(C).
NOTE: Unless these changes are saved to disk, they are saved only for the
current session. To save the configuration to disk, see Saving Configuration
Changes, page 26.
Adding a Windows Printer Driver
This option allows you to add a Windows printer to Legi for Windows.
1.
From the Configuration Menu, select the Printers option.
The system displays the Printer Configuration dialog box. The Printer/port
connection list box displays the printers already connected to ports.
3.
Press the Add Printer pushbutton.
The system displays the Add a Windows Print Driver dialog box.
Add a Windows Print Driver Dialog Box
This window displays the Windows printer drivers already added to your Windows
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
10-10
Configuring Legi
setup.
3.
Select the Windows printer you want to add to Legi from the list of installed
Windows printers.
4.
To add the printer to the Legi printer list, click Add.
5.
When the system displays the Printer Installation Successful message, click OK.
6.
On the Printer Configuration dialog box, highlight the Windows printer that you just
added in the Printer List.
7.
To attach the printer the a COM or LPT port, click the Connect to Port push button.
Continue with the procedure, Connecting a Printer to a Port, page 7.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
10-11
Configuring Legi
Installing a Weber Print Driver
To add a Weber printer to Legi for Windows, use the following procedure. To use this
feature, you must first obtain Weber printer series drivers disks. These are available from
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
1.
From the Configuration Menu, select the Printers option.
The system displays the Printer Configuration dialog box. The Printer/port
connection list box displays the printers already connected to ports.
2.
Click the Add Printer push button.
The system displays the Add a Windows Print Driver dialog box.
Add a Windows Print Driver Dialog Box
This window displays the Windows printer drivers already added to your Windows
setup.
3.
To add the Weber printer to the Legi printer list, click the Install Weber Print
Driver button.
The system displays the Install Printer Driver dialog box.
Install Printer Driver Dialog Box
4.
In the text box Enter drive letter or path where files are located, type the full path
where the printer driver files are located. Often this drive will be the floppy drive,
A:.
5.
Click OK.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
10-12
Configuring Legi
Specifying Options
This option allows you to configure a printer that has been connected to a port.
1.
From the Configuration Menu, select the Printers option.
The system displays the Printer Configuration dialog box. The Printer/port
connection list box displays the printers already connected to ports. You can only
configure a printer that has been connected to a port.
2.
In the Printer/port connection list box, highlight the printer for which you are
specifying options and select the Options button.
The system displays the Printer Options dialog box. This dialog box may vary
depending on the printer selected. Following is an example Printer Options dialog
box.
Sample Printer Options Dialog Box
3.
Select the appropriate check boxes. These check boxes may vary depending on the
printer selected. For specific information for your printer, see Appendix F, Printer
Specific Functions.
4.
To save the changes, click OK or press (Alt)-(O). To lose the changes and close the
dialog box, click Cancel or press (Alt)-(C).

NOTE: Unless these changes are saved to disk, they are saved only for the
current session. To save the configuration to disk, see Saving Configuration
Changes, page 26.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
10-13
Configuring Legi
Removing a Port
To disconnect a printer from a port, use the following procedure.
1.
From the Configuration Menu, select the Printers option.
The system displays the Printer Configuration dialog box. The Printer/port
connection list box displays the printers already connected to ports.
2.
Highlight the printer/port to remove and select the Remove Port button.
The system removes the printer and port from the Printer/port connection list box.

NOTE: Unless these changes are saved to disk, they are saved only for the
current session. To save the configuration to disk, see Saving Configuration
Changes, page 26.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
10-14
Configuring Legi
Using Custom Fonts
Use the Custom Fonts options to define and use different typefaces that would not normally be
available on a particular printer. To use this feature, you must install a font cartridge that contains
the fonts you want to use into the printer you will be printing to. Note that not all printers use
cartridges to store custom fonts; some may use EPROMs or other memory devices. Refer to the
printer manual for the options available for your printer.
Custom fonts have two categories:
Predefined
Predefined fonts are available in font cartridges. These fonts are already
defined, created, and readily available. They are displayed in the Fonts
list box within the Custom Fonts dialog box when any of the following
printers are selected: Allegro, Series 71, 72, 73, 74, or 76.
Non-standard
Non-standard fonts can exist on a variety of memory devices. They may
be custom defined to contain special characters or character sets. They
generally are not stock items, but are created for specific customer
applications. These fonts are not displayed in the list box, instead,
placeholder names such as Custom font 1, Custom font 2... are shown.
These placeholders are replaced with a name of your choosing when you
define the custom font.
To set up custom fonts, use the following procedure.
1.
From the Legitronic Configuration menu, select Custom Fonts.
The system displays the Custom Fonts dialog box.
Custom Fonts Dialog Box
2.
In the Printer list box, select the printer for which you are defining custom fonts.
3.
In the Font list box, the system displays the fonts available. Click the font to define.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
10-15
Configuring Legi
4.
5.
In the Print Characteristics group box, complete the following information:
Printer font description
Displays the default description of the font. You can update
this description. This description will appear in the Custom
Fonts list box in the Font dialog box in Label Design.
Font Id
Font Id is the font identifier that the printer uses for this font.
The only time you can change this number is when you are
editing one of the last twenty fonts in the list for the Series
Allegro, 74, and 76 printers, or the last fourteen fonts in the
list for the Series 71 and 72.
Enable font
Select this check box to have the font appear in the Custom
Fonts list box in Label Design so it can be selected and used
on a label.
Height/Width
Select the height and width available in the Common Sizes
list box in the Font dialog box in Label Design. For a
magnifiable font (you can select magnifiable or scalable font
using the Attributes button as described below), all the
common sizes are integer multiples of the height and width.
For a scalable font, the height and width give the only
common size shown, but these numbers are only a default
and any common size can be specified by typing the size into
the Width and Height text boxes in the Text Size area.
Features
Display the Font Features dialog box to specify font features
that can be selected in Label Design. For example, some
fonts can be italicized or underlined, and some fonts can be
displayed in a variety of orientations. For more information
on this option, see the following procedure, Setting Font
Features.
Attributes
Display the Default Font Attributes dialog box to specify
permanent features of the font. For example, some fonts are
scalable, which means that they can be displayed and printed
in a variety of sizes, smoothly enlarged. Some fonts are
magnifiable, which means they can be sized; however, they
retain their original shape. The larger the size, the more
blocky they will display and print. For more information on
this option, see the procedure Setting Font Attributes.
In the Display Characteristics group box, complete the following information:
Use these options to specify which font will be used to display the font on the monitor in
Label Design and Label Preview before printing.
Display font
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
Select the Windows font that will be used to draw the font
on screen.
10-16
Configuring Legi
Create height
Select the height of the font which will be used for drawing
the custom font on the screen. For scalable fonts, the create
height and create width represent percentages. If you enter
100, Windows will draw the font at 100% of the size you
specify in the Text Size edit boxes in the Font dialog box in
Label Design.
Create width
Select the width of the font that will be used to draw the
custom font on the screen.
Intercharacter gap
Select the width of the font including the intercharacter gap.
This option will be used to specify the width of the font
which will be used for size calculations for magnifiable,
non-proportional fonts, and for the intercharacter gap when
printing to Series 40, 40S, and 41S printers.
Do not use the intercharacter gap for scalable and
proportional fonts.
6.
7.
Select the unit of measure to use when entering font dimensions.
Inches
Enter measurements in inches.
Centimeters
Enter measurements in centimeters.
Points
Enter measurements in points.
Dots
Enter measurements in dots.
To save the font changes to disk, click the Save to disk button. To discard all changes
since the last save, click the Discard changes button.
Setting Custom Font Features
When you select font features, you are indicating what options are available when the font
is used. To specify the custom font features, use the following procedure.
1.
From the Custom Fonts dialog box, select the font for which you are selecting
features, then click the Features button.
The system displays the Font Features Adjustable in Label Design dialog box.
Font Features Adjustable in Label Design Dialog Box
2.
In the Weight list box, select the weight that can be selected for the font.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
10-17
Configuring Legi
3.
Select other features as needed for this font.
Features that are selected using this option indicate that the feature can be used for
the font, but it is not mandatory. For example, if you select underline, the font can
be underlined.

4.
Note: Notice that both the Features and Attributes dialog boxes contain Italic,
Underline, and Strikeout check boxes. However, these dialog boxes have
different uses. When you check Italic in the Features dialog box, it indicates
that the font can be italicized. When you check Italic in the Attributes dialog
box, it means that the font is an Italic font; it always displays and prints
italicized.
To save the changes and return to the Custom Fonts dialog box, click the OK button.
Setting Custom Font Attributes
When you select font attributes, you are selecting the attributes that the font will have
permanently. For example, if you select italic, the font will always be italic. To specify
the custom font attributes, use the following procedure.
1.
From the Custom Fonts dialog box, select the font for which you are defining
attributes, then click the Attributes button.
The system displays the Default Font Attributes dialog box.
Default Font Attributes Dialog Box
2.
Select either Scalable or Magnifiable to indicate whether the font will be scalable or
magnifiable.
Scalable fonts can be displayed and printed in a variety of sizes, smoothly enlarged.
The height and width give the common size shown, but these numbers are only a
default and any common size can be specified by typing the size into the Width and
Height text boxes in the Text Size area.
Magnifiable fonts can be sized; however, they retain their original shape. The larger
the size, the more blocky they will display and print. All the common sizes are
integer multiples of the height and width.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
10-18
Configuring Legi
3.
Select other attributes as required for this font.
Attributes that are selected using this option indicate the font appearance. For
example, if you select underline, the font is always underlined.

4.
Note: Notice that both the Features and Attributes dialog boxes contain Italic,
Underline, and Strikeout check boxes. However, these dialog boxes have
different uses. When you check Italic in the Features dialog box, it indicates
that the font can be italicized. When you check Italic in the Attributes dialog
box, it means that the font is an Italic font; it always displays and prints
italicized.
To save the changes and return to the Custom Fonts dialog box, click the OK button.
Custom Fonts Example
To specify a custom font that you will use in Legi for Windows, use the following
procedure as an example. In this example, you are given a PCMCIA memory card
containing a scalable CG Triumvirate Condensed Font. This card has four individual
fonts:
Normal CG Triumvirate Condensed
Italic CG Triumvirate Condensed
Bold CG Triumvirate Condensed
Bold Italic CG Triumvirate Condensed
The characters range in size from 10 to 1500 dots. You have physically installed the
memory card and are ready to tell Legi For Windows about the fonts.
1.
From the Legitronic Configuration menu, select Custom Fonts.
2.
From the printer list, select Series 87.
By default, you will be working with font 1, which is the Normal CG Triumvirate
Condensed font.
3.
In the Printer font description text box, type the name of the font.
The name can be any name you choose, but you will probably want to match the
font name very closely. All font descriptions for a particular printer must be unique.
4
Check the Enable font check box.
5.
Enter the default height and width of the font.
You can enter 10 dots (the smallest size) for both the height and width or some
larger number. By default, you will be working in dots for the unit of measure. If
you want to specify font sizes in some other unit of measure, you may select inches,
centimeters, or points. This size will be the default height and width in system
configuration.
This is a normal weight font without italic, underline, or strikeout and it can be
inversed and printed in all four orientations. Since those are the defaults provided by
the Font Features dialog box, you do not need to click the Features button.
6.
Click the Attributes button and select the Scalable radio button to make the font
scalable. To make the font proportional, check the Proportional check box. To
return to the Custom Fonts dialog box, click the OK button.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
10-19
Configuring Legi
The default display font of WEBER014 is a font that was created to represent a
monospaced printer font. You may want to change it to a font that was created to
represent a scalable font, such as Triumvirate Cond (Zebra), or you may select
another display font.
7.
In the Create height and Create width fields, enter the height and width fields.
Ignore the intercharacter gap for scalable and proportional fonts. For scalable fonts,
the create height and create width represent percentages. If you enter 100, Windows
will draw the font at 100% of the size you specify in the Text Size edit boxes in the
Font dialog box in Label Design. If you do not know what to enter for the create
height and create width, enter 100 for both. After using the font, you may need to
adjust these values so that the displayed font matches what actually prints.
8.
Repeat steps 3 through 7 for the other three fonts on this memory card.

Use Font Id 2 for the Italic font. Because this is a permanent attribute, you
will select italic by using the Attributes button.

Use Font Id 3 for the Bold font. Remember to select Bold for the weight of
the font by using the Features button.

Use Font Id 4 for the Bold Italic font. As in Font Id 3, select Bold using the
Features button. As in Font Id 2, select italic by using the Attributes button.
When you have finished defining all four fonts, the Custom Fonts dialog box should
look like this:
Custom Fonts dialog box After Font Definition
9.
To save the entered information, click Save to disk.
10.
Using the Label Design module, create a label and add a text field.
When in the Font dialog box in Label Design, you should see all four fonts in the
Custom Fonts list. Notice that the fonts are in alphabetical order by the printer font
description. The create height and width you specified when you defined this
custom font is displayed as the only common size. You may type in the Width and
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
10-20
Configuring Legi
Height of the font as you want it to appear on your label in the Text Size box.
Label Design Font Dialog Box
11.
Pick one of the custom fonts. Use a text size that will be big enough for you to
measure the letters easily, but small enough to fit several letters on the label.
A good size is .5" x .5".
12.
Add a box field that surrounds the text as closely as possible.
13.
Do a test print to your Series 87 printer.
On your first attempt you may find that the size of your font does not match the size
displayed on the screen. The text that filled the box on the screen will either be too
small to fill the box when printed or it will overflow the box. You will have to go
back to Custom Fonts and adjust the create height and create width so that they do
display correctly.
For example, suppose your box measures 4.267 inches wide, but the text is only 1.85
inches wide. 1.85 divided by 4.267 times 100 equals 43.36. In the Custom Font
dialog, find the Display characteristics groupbox. Enter 44 for the create width in the
Create width edit box. Because Custom Fonts only allows integers, you must enter
43 or 44. The size 43 is closer, but if you plan to inverse print this font, you may
want to enter 44.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
10-21
Configuring Legi
Using Font Cartridges
Font cartridges are available for the Allegro, 71, 72, 73, 74, and 76 series printers. You can
examine information about these fonts using the custom font program described in Custom Fonts
(see page 15), however, you can only change items in the Display characteristics group box. For
example, you cannot set the Enable font check box in the Custom Fonts dialog box for these
fonts. Note that the Enabled/Disabled status you set in this dialog will automatically be reflected
by the Enable font check box when you examine the font in the Custom Fonts dialog.
To set up font cartridges, use the following procedure.
1.
From the Legitronic Configuration menu, select the Font Cartridges option.
Font Cartridges Dialog Box
The following list gives a brief description of the various settings in the font cartridges
dialog box.
Printer
Displays your printer selection. The printers displayed currently
support font cartridges. Select the printer where you have installed a
font cartridge.
Cartridge
Displays a list of the available cartridges for the printer selected.
Enable
Enables the currently highlighted font cartridge. When enabled, you
will see and be able to select the font in Label Design. In addition,
the Enable font check box will be checked in Custom Fonts.
Disable
Disables the currently highlighted font cartridge. The font will no
longer appear in Label Design.
Save to disk
Saves your changes to disk.
Discard changes
Discards all changes made.
To use custom font cartridges, first make sure you have a custom font cartridge and that it
is installed correctly in the printer. Refer to the printer manual for the correct location and
installation procedure.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
10-22
Configuring Legi
To use the installed font cartridge in Legi for Windows, use the following procedure:
1.
From the Configuration Menu, click the Font Cartridges button.
The system displays the Font Cartridges dialog box. All printers that support font
cartridges are listed in the Printer list box.
2.
In the Printer list box, highlight the printer series for which you have the font cartridge
installed.
The cartridges shown in the Cartridge list box reflect the available cartridges for the
printers you have selected.
3.
Highlight the cartridge to use.
4.
To enable the font contained in the cartridge, click the Enable button.
The font status will change from Disabled to Enabled. You will now be able to see this font
in the Font box when you use text fields in Label Design.
You can also disable a previously enabled cartridge by click the Disable button. Select this
option if the cartridge has been removed and you don't want the list of fonts showing up
when defining a text field in label design.
5.
Click the Save to disk button.
If you do not want to save the changes you made, click the Discard changes button.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
10-23
Configuring Legi
Configuring Remote Input
Use this dialog box to set up the remote input groups for use with remote input fields in Label
Design. Remote input fields are one kind of supplied data fields whose data source is the
computer’s COM ports. Remote groups allow different users to use different ports for the same
label. For example, you can create a label with remote input received from Remote Group 1. For
you, remote group 1 is assigned to COM1. However, another user can use the label you created,
but that user has assigned remote group 1 to COM2.
You can also configure a COM port for use with Remote Input fields. You can set parameters
such as baud rate, word length, handshake type, etc.
1.
From the Configuration Menu, select the Remote Input option.
The system displays the Remote Input Configuration dialog box.
Remote Input Configuration Dialog Box
2.
In the Remote Groups list box, highlight the group to which you are assigning a port.
3.
In the Available ports list box, highlight the port you want to use for remote input for the
highlighted group.
4.
Click the <<Assign button.
The system assigns the port to the selected group.
5.
Repeat these steps for as many groups as you want to assign.
6.
To remove a port from a group, highlight a remote group with a port assigned and click the
Remove>> button.
7.
To configure the settings for a port, click the Port Settings button.
The system displays the Remote Input Ports dialog box.
Remote Input Ports Dialog Box
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
10-24
Configuring Legi
8.
In the Available ports list box, highlight the port to configure, and click the Settings
button.
The system displays the Line Settings dialog box.

9.
Note: The Line Settings dialog box for Remote Input is almost identical to the Line
Settings dialog for printers. The only difference is that there is no printer name displayed.
You can use the procedure described in Specifying Line Settings, page 9.
To save the line setting changes, click OK. To discard the changes, click the Cancel
button.
The dialog box closes and the Remote Input Configuration dialog is displayed.
10.
Repeat steps 7-8 for any additional ports you want to configure.
You may configure more than one COM port at a time. However, you cannot receive
remote input data from more than one port during a print job.
11.
To save the COM port settings made, click OK. To discard all the changes made, click the
Cancel button.
12.
To save the remote groups configuration, click OK. To discard all changes made, click the
Cancel button.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
10-25
Configuring Legi
Saving Configuration Changes
After making the appropriate configuration changes to the default directories, Legi options,
language file, or printer setup, the changes are only saved temporarily for the current Legi
session. Use the following procedures to save the changes to disk.
Saving within the Configuration Option
To save changes while still within the Configuration option, use the following procedure.
1.
Make any necessary changes to the Default Directories, Language Selection, Legi
Options, or Printers.
2.
On the Configuration Menu, from the Setup menu, select Save.
The system saves the changes.
Saving when Exiting Configuration
If you have not saved the changes, Legi will also prompt you to save when you exit.

1.
NOTE: If you only made changes to Printer Options, Legi will not prompt you to
save upon exiting. You must select Save from the Setup Menu to save the changes.
On the Configuration Menu, from the Setup menu, select Exit.
The system displays the following prompt: Save changes to disk?
2.
To save the changes and close Configuration, select Yes. To lose the changes and
close Configuration, select No. To return to Configuration, click Cancel or press
(Esc).
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
10-26
Network and Turnkey Installation
A
10Network and
Turnkey Installation
This chapter explains how to install Legi for Windows for both network
installations and turnkey installations. A network installation involves
installing Legi on a PC attached to a Local Area Network (LAN). A turnkey
installation allows a user to only run Legi and Legi functions. Other programs that are stored on
the computer cannot be accessed.
Overview
For a step by step procedure on performing a Legi for Windows installation, see Chapter 2,
Getting Started.
Network Installation
Legi for Windows is a flexible application that can operate in a variety of network configurations.
To accomodate this, Legi for Windows Setup includes three kinds of Installation Types:
Standalone
Choose this option if you plan to install Legi on a single, standalone
computer. All Legi program and data files will be copied to the hard disk
of this computer. If you want to share labels, database tables, audit trail
files or any other Legi files with others on a network, you would not
select this option.
Network
Choose this option if you have a network and want to install Legi so that
users connected to the network can access the same Legi for Windows
files. This option permits sharing of tables, labels, security files, audit
trail files and Legi for Windows executables (program files). This option
installs the proper Legi files to the network server and is run from a
workstation connected to the server. Note that Legi must then be
installed to each individual workstation by selecting the Workstation
option.
Workstation
Choose this option if you are planning to use a network and are going to
run Legi on computers connected to that network. You must first install
Legi to the network by selecting the Network option previously
described. Next you install Legi on each workstation that will be running
Legi. This option creates work directories and copies the configuration
file to the locations specified in the installation dialog box.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
A-1
Network and Turnkey Installation
Legi for Windows Installation
There are four directories that are used during the different installation types:
Executables
Specify where the program files are stored. On a standalone
installation, this path will point to a directory on your hard disk.
On a network installation, the program files would typically be
stored on the network server, so that all workstations connected to
the network could access them. During individual workstation
installations, the program files usually already exist on the network
server. This directory should then point to that location on the
server.
System Data Path
Specify where the configuration file is placed. The configuration
file contains information about printer/port connections and update
options for print and label stock logs. It also holds default
directory and language table selections. Usually this file is not
shared on the network; each workstation may have different
printers and ports attached, making it necessary for the workstation
to have its own configuration file. This selection is not active
during a Network installation.
Network Data Path
Specify where security files, various tables and internal system
files are kept. On a network installation, this directory, like the
Executables directory, is usually on the network server. This
configuration allows all users connected to the network to access
the same password, user, and group files. All users will also update
the same system print log and label stock tables during label
printing activity.
Legi Workstation Directory
This directory indicates where working directories should be
created and sample data files copied. Legi for Windows installation
creates a main directory (default: C:\LEGIWIN) and several
subdirectories (DATABASE, LABELS, LANGUAGE,
GRAPHICS). These directories are used for storing database
tables, labels and graphics that you create or use while running
Legi. Usually, each workstation should have a unique directory for
working with Legi data files. Even on a network where labels and
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
A-2
Network and Turnkey Installation
database tables may be shared, it is important to have a separate
directory where these Legi files can be created or edited. Note that
the Legi Workstation Directory is not used during Standalone
installation. During that type of installation, the working
directories are created based on the Executables directory entry.
Note also that the Legi Workstation Directory is not needed during
a Network installation.
Local Area Networks fall into two major categories. The first is Peer to Peer networks such as
Workgroups for Windows. The second is Client/Server networks such as Novell. To
successfully run Legi for Windows on a network, the network must be able to access the network
drive where Legi is stored as a drive letter A-Z. Thus, the Windows File Manager should be able
to recognize the drive letter and display any files contained on that drive.
In a network setup, the directories where Legi looks for certain files are very important. The
LEGI.INI file specifies where Legi will look for program, data, and system files. LEGI.INI is an
ASCII file, similar to the WIN.INI file that Windows uses. LEGI.INI contains various entries
Legi uses to run the various modules that make up Legi for Windows. Like WIN.INI, it exists in
the Windows directory. This file is automatically created by the Legi installation program.
The file contains these entries:
[Data Paths]
Sys Data Path=c:\legiwin\data
Net Data Path=h:\legiwin\data
Database Directory=c:\legiwin\data
Label Directory=c:\legiwin\data
Graphic Directory=c:\legiwin\data
Language Directory=c:\legiwin\data
The path names in italics are sample paths and will vary according to individual installations.
Legi looks for all system files in the Net Data Path, including the following files:

Security files

Printer directory

Printer configuration files

Printer barcode tables

Label stock table

System print log table

Tracking serial number table

Default language table
Legi looks for the configuration file in the Sys Data Path. This file contains information about
printer/port connections and update options for print and label stock logs. It also holds default
directory and language table selections.
The remaining entries in the LEGI.INI file specify where certain default directories are.
Network Printing
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
A-3
Network and Turnkey Installation
You cannot use a printer that is attached to a network server because Legi must receive
status information from the printer to operate properly. This information can only be
received from a printer that is attached to a serial port on a local computer.
Security Module
Each computer that is used to print labels must have a security module attached to a
parallel port, whether you have a network or local installation of Legi for Windows.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
A-4
Network and Turnkey Installation
Turnkey Installation
Legi for Windows runs as an application within the Microsoft Windows operating environment.
While Legi is running, the user can run any other Windows application, such as File Manager or
Notepad. File Manager, Legi, and any other Windows applications on a computer system are
managed by a program called Program Manager. Program Manager displays icons associated
with each Windows application and lets you run each of the programs.
In some Legi installations, the customer may not want Legi users to have access to other
Windows applications for any of the following reasons:
1.
The users may not need access and will only run Legi.
Manager and other applications would be confusing.
Having access to Program
2.
It may be an issue of security. If a user can open File Manager, then they are able to scan
any directory and possibly delete or move files. Legi for Windows' built-in Data Security
feature has no effect outside of Legi.
Running Legi for Windows as a turnkey system requires you to start Windows as follows:
win c:\legiwin\legimain.exe -T
where c:\legiwin is the location of your Legi application file.
This command can be placed in your AUTOEXEC.BAT file or typed in from the DOS command
line. The -T option indicates a turnkey system.
After sign-on, if the user has Access to Windows function security enabled, Program Manager will
be automatically started. This security item can allow a particular user access to Windows in a
turnkey installation. If the user signs off Legi, Program Manager will close. However, if the user
exits Legi and does not sign off, Program Manager will still be active.
If a user does not have Access to Windows security, that user can only see and run the Legi for
Windows application. The user cannot exit Legi except to sign-out.

Note: Turnkey mode only works if you are using Program Manager. It will not work if you
are using a Program Manager replacement such as Norton Desktop.
For information on setting up the Access to Windows security, see the section Defining Function
Security for a Group in Chapter 6, Setting up Security.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
A-5
Network and Turnkey Installation
This page intentionally left blank.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
A-6
Glossary
B
11Glossary
Answer Table
Special database table that holds the results of a database operation, such
as a query.
Audit Trail
Legi option that records print job information in three different tables:
label stock log, system print log, and label print log.
Data Expression
For a label format, a user-defined expression that supplies the data for a
label field.
Data Security
Assigned at the group level, data security limits access to selected
directories.
Database
A Legi module that allows you to view and maintain database files in a
table format.
Destination Table
In Database Maintenance, the table to which data will be sent as a result of
an import, export, or merge operation.
Field
In a database file, one piece of information in a record, such as a customer
number.
In a label format, refers to a label element, such as a barcode or constant
text.
Edit Line
In Database Maintenance, the line below the push button bar which allows
you edit the fields in a table.
Field Type
In a database table, each database field is coded to accept a certain type of
data. The valid field types are:
A
N
S
$
D
Alphanumeric
Numeric
Short (numbers without decimal digits)
Currency
Date
In a label format, field types refer to one of the following:






Text
Barcode
Graphic
Line
Box
Raw
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
B-1
Glossary
Function Security
Assigned at the group level, function security controls which Legi options
the members of a group can access.
Grid
In Label Design, intersecting horizontal and vertical lines that do not print.
They are used to help place and align label fields.
Group
Part of Legi security, function level and data level security is assigned at
the group level. Users are then assigned to one or more groups based on
the type of security each should have.
Key Field
In a database table, a key field is maintained to avoid duplicate records
within the table. For example, in an employee database, the employee ID
field may be designated as a key field so that no employee is assigned a
duplicate ID. A table can have one or more key fields. A key field is
indicated by an asterisk following the field type code.
If you enter additional records into a keyed table, when you save it, Legi
automatically sorts the entries according to the key field so they are in
order.
Keyed Table
A table with one or more key fields.
Label Print Log
A user-defined database table that is linked to one or more label formats.
The label print log records information for selected label fields that are
linked to the database fields using the label field names.
Language Table
A special database table that can be customized to allow Legi to be used in
other languages.
Numeric Precision
In Database Maintenance, the number of digits that will appear to the right
of the decimal point in figures.
Supplied Data
Part of a label format, supplied data is designated in a label field and
allows data to be entered for the label run at various times during the
printing process.
Operators
For database tables, to create queries you use the following operators:
=
Equal to
>
Greater than
<
Less than
>=
Greater than or equal to
<=
Less than or equal to
..
Any number of characters, including blank spaces
@
Any single character
NOT
Does not match
BLANK No value
OR
Either condition can be true
,
And (both conditions must be true)
In Label Design, when building a data expression, you can use the
following operators (listed in order of precedence):
Multiple, division, and modulo arithmetic (*, /, %)
Relational operations (=, >, <, <>, <=, >=) (The operators are equal,
greater than, less than, not equal, less than or equal, greater than or equal.)
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
B-2
Glossary
Orientation
The alignment of the paper when printing. The orientation can either be
portrait or landscape.
In Label Design, this term is used to indicate the orientation of a field:




Left to Right
Top to Bottom
Right to Left
Bottom to Top
Print Job
A print job holds all of the specifications for printing a label, including the
number of copies, any print queries, and operator data.
Print Manager
The Print Manager window allows you to manipulate the print jobs in a
queue, as well as the queue itself. The Print Manager is activated
whenever you submit a print job or print graphics using the Graphics Print
and View module, and runs in the background. It closes automatically
when you exit Legi.
Print Mode
The mode the printer is set to when printing labels. The print mode is set
in Label Design and should not be changed once a label has been
designed.
Printer Options
The options available for various printers. For example, the selected
printer may have a cutter installed. If it does, you can select the cutter as a
printer option.
Problem Table
In Database Maintenance, a special database table that holds the records
that did not match or were duplicated as a result of an operation, such as
importing or merging.
Record
A line (or row) of data in a table.
Queried Print
When designing labels, a label format may include a database query.
When the job is printed, it will only print labels that match the database
query. The print query is specified within the Print Labels module.
Query
A query allows you to create a subset of the records in a table based on
limits and conditions that you specify. Queries can also be used in
conjunction with printing labels to limit the number of labels printed based
on a database table.
Queue
A holding place in Print Manager for print jobs. Print Manager holds
submitted print jobs here until the printer is ready to receive data. The
queue also lists the status of any print jobs sent to a selected printer.
System Print Log
A special database table that keeps track of all print jobs. Every time a
print job is submitted, the system captures the print run information and
stores it in the system print log.
Reference Fields
A field on a label that references another field's data on the label.
Selection Box
In Label Design, the black box that is drawn around selected label fields.
Serial Run
A print job that incorporates a label field that uses a serial number.
Source Table
In Database Maintenance, the table from which data is being sent.
Table
A database file displayed in table format.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
B-3
Glossary
Tracking Serial
Numbers
Serial numbers that are given a name. When a print job is run which uses
a particular serial number, the system updates the next number to be used
based on the number of labels printed with that serial number.
Zoom In
In Label Design, displays a selected part of the label in a magnified view.
Zoom Out
In Label Design, displays the entire label within the current window size.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
B-4
Data Expression Functions
C
12Data Expression
Functions
The Data Expression dialog box in Label Design incorporates a data
expression builder to allow you to build data expressions. Following is a list
of each function followed by a brief explanation of what each function
requires. For information on building a data expression, see Building a Data Expression in
Chapter 5, Label Design.
Overview
Data expression functions are the various commands within the Data Expression Builder. These
functions in general accept 1 or more parameters, or none, as input and return a result. Functions
can be combined by using a function as an input to another function. For example,
abs(fld("quantity")) returns the absolute value of the number stored in the quantity field on the
label. If the value in the quantity field was -50, fld("quantity") would return a value of -50,
which would be the input parameter for the abs function. The function abs(-50) would then
return a value of 50.
Constant parameters such as quantity are generally put in quotes as shown above. This ensures
that characters such as commas and math signs are interpreted correctly by the function. For
example, cat("Conner, Inc. part #",fld("part number") combines the constant information
Conner, Inc. part # and the value held in the part number field into one string. If the quotes had
been left off around Conner, Inc. part # the comma would have been interpreted as part of the
command, and therefore would have generated an error.
In an expression such as format_time(value,format[,separator[,am[,pm]]]), the parameters that
appear between the [] are optional. If you do choose to include them, do not type in the []
characters as part of the expression. They are only used to indicate that the parameters are not
required in this particular data expression function.
The operator precedence is:
Multiple, division, and modulo arithmetic (*, /, %)
Addition and subtraction (+, -)
Relational operations (=, >, <, <>, <=, >=) (The operators are equal, greater than, less than, not
equal, less than or equal, greater than or equal.)
abort()
Returns message at print time that the printing has been aborted. Use in conjunction with
computer repetition and if statement to conditionally stop the print job.
Parameters: None.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
C-1
Data Expression Functions
See also:
if
abs(number)
Returns absolute value of number.
Parameters: Number.
Example: abs(-100)
Result: 100
See also:
precision
sgn
as400_keyQuery(ret_fld_name)
Reads a keyed AS/400 file and library and returns the values matching the query. To create the
query, when printing the label, select the Query menu/Specify query option from the Print Job
window.
Parameters: Return field name
Example: as400_keyQuery("custname")
Result: The result will be returned when the query is completed.
See also:
as400_pfQuery
as400_pfSrch
as400_srchKey
as400_pfSrch(system,lib/file,retField,key1,keyVal1[,key2,keyVal2]...)
Reads an AS/400 file and library and returns the values based on the search field entered.
Parameters: The system name, the library and file name, the return field, the field being searched,
and the value being searched for. Optionally, you can enter, additional fields and field values.
See also:
as400_keyQuery
as400_pfQuery
as400_srchKey
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
C-2
Data Expression Functions
as400_pfQuery(ret_fld_name)
Reads an AS/400 library and file and returns the values matching the query.
Parameters: The return field name.
Example: as400_pfQuery(CustName)
Result: Returns the value in the CustName field.
See also:
as400_keyQuery
as400_pfSrch
as400_srchKey
as400_srchKey(system,lib/file(member),retField,keyVal1[,keyVal2]...)
Reads a keyed AS/400 table and returns the values based on the search field entered.
Parameters: The system name, the library and file name, the return field, and the key value being
searched for. If the file has more than one key, all must be specified.
See also:
as400_keyQuery
as400_pfQuery
as400_pfSrch
asc(char)
Returns numeric equivalent of ASCII character.
Parameters: ASCII character
NOTE: If a character string is given for the parameter, only the first character is used.
Example: asc("!")
Result: 33
See also:
chr
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
C-3
Data Expression Functions
auto_identical(identical_count)
Equivalent to the Auto Identical check box on the Data Expression dialog box. Prints number of
identical labels specified. This number can be overridden at print time.
Parameters: Number of identical labels.
Example: auto_identical(10)
Result: Ten identical labels.
See also:
auto_serial
auto_tracking_serial
get_identical_count
auto_serial(serial_count)
Equivalent to the Auto Serial check box on the Data Expression dialog box. If a serial number is
on the label, increments the serial number the number of times specified. This number can be
overridden at print time.
Parameters: Number of times to increment the serial number.
Example: auto_serial(10)
Result: The serial number will increment ten times.
See also:
auto_identical
auto_tracking_serial
get_serial_count
serial
auto_tracking_serial
Allows you to combine the auto serial and the serial number tracking options on the Data
Expression dialog box.
The tracking serial option creates a tracking serial number field based on the parameters entered.
The auto serial option increments a serial number the number of times specified.
See also:
auto_serial
tracking_serial
blank()
Returns a null character which has a length of zero.
Parameters: None.
Example: blank()
See also:
isblank
cat(string1,string2,...)
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
C-4
Data Expression Functions
Concatenates strings.
Parameters: String 1, string 2, etc. (variable number of strings).
Example: cat("Weber ","Marking ","Systems")
Result: Weber Marking Systems
See also:
left
len
mid
pad_left
pad_right
right
checksum(type,string)
Generates a checksum of type type for the given string.
Parameters: Type, string.
Type codes are:
1
HIBCC (Mod 43)
2
UCC (Mod 10)
Example: checksum(2,1234567890)
Result: 5
chr(ascii_code)
Returns the ASCII equivalent of a number.
Parameters: ASCII code.
Example: chr(33)
Result: !
See also:
asc
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
C-5
Data Expression Functions
db_query(ret_fld_name)
Returns the data from a field out of a database to be queried. The actual query is entered from
within the Print Labels option.
Parameters: Field name within the queried table to return.
Example: db_query("Stock #")
Result: The Stock # database field will be returned in the label field.
See also:
db_recnum
db_srch
db_srch_key
db_update
db_update_key
db_update_recnum
get_query_count
get_query_rec
db_recnum(tbl_name,record_number,ret_fld_name)
Returns the specified field from a specific record number from a database table.
Parameters: table name, record number, return field name.
Example: db_recnum("c:\legiwin\dbase\products.db",1,"Stock #")
Result: The data in the Stock # field for the first record of the products database table.
See also:
db_query
db_recnum
db_srch
db_srch_key
db_update
db_update_key
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
C-6
Data Expression Functions
db_srch(tbl_name,key_fld_name,key_fld_value,ret_fld_name)
Returns the value for a specified field based on specifying the database file name, the database
key field, and the key value.
Parameters: Table name, key field name, key field value, return field name.
Example: db_srch("c:\legiwin\dbase\products.db","Product number",23,"Product name")
Result: The data in the Product name field for Product number 23 in the Products database table.
See also:
db_query
db_recnum
db_srch_key
db_update
db_update_key
db_update_recnum
db_srch_key(tbl_name,ret_fld_name,key_fld_value1[,key_fld_value2]...)
Returns the value for a field based on specifying the database file name and the key field values.
This function differs from db_srch() in that tbl_name must be a keyed table, and the
key_fld_values are values in that table's key. The key may be made up of more than 1 field. You
would specify all the field values that make up the key for a table.
Parameters: Table name, return field name, first key field value, second key field value...
Example: db_srch_key("c:\legiwin\database\stock.db","Quantity","Air Hose","10 ft.")
Result: The data in the Quantity field for the record with a key value of Air Hose 10ft. in the
Stock database table.
Alternate Usage:
db_srch_key can also be used to return the record number instead of the field. This may be
preferable if you need to retrieve more than one other field in the record - you would get the
record number once, and then use db_recnum to return additional fields. To return the record
number rather than a field, substitute a blank() for the return field name.
Example: db_srch_key("c:\legiwin\database\stock.db",CHR(0),"Air Hose","10 ft.")
Result: The record number for the record with a key value of Air Hose 10ft. in the Stock database
table.
See also:
db_query
db_recnum
db_srch
db_update
db_update_key
db_update_recnum
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
C-7
Data Expression Functions
db_update(table_name, key_name, key_value, put_name, put_value)
Updates a field in the selected Paradox table with the specified value based on the field name and
value being searched on.
Parameters: Table name, key field name, key field value, put field name, put field value
Example: db_update("c:\legiwin\dbase\products.db","Product number",23,"Product
name",bolt)
Result: The Product name field for Product number 23 in the Products database table will be
updated with the name bolt.
See also:
db_query
db_recnum
db_srch
db_srch_key
db_update_key
db_update_recnum
db_update_key(table_name, put_name, put_value, key_value1[,key_value2]...)
Updates a field in the selected keyed Paradox table with the specified value based on the key field
value.
Parameters: Table name, put field name, put field value, first key field value, second key field
value...
Example: db_update_key("c:\legiwin\dbase\products.db","Product number",23,ID12346)
Result: The first key field (for example, product ID number) matching ID12346 will insert 23 in
the Product number field in the Products database table.
See also:
db_query
db_recnum
db_srch
db_srch_key
db_update
db_update_recnum
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
C-8
Data Expression Functions
db_update_recnum(table_name, record_number, put_fld_name, put_fld_value)
Updates the field in the selected Paradox table with the specified value based on the record
number selected.
Parameters: Table name, record number, put field name, put field value
Example: db_update_recnum("c:\legiwin\dbase\products.db",56,"Product number",23)
Result: For record number 23, the Product number field in the Products database table will be
updated with the number 23.
See also:
db_query
db_recnum
db_srch
db_srch_key
db_update
db_update_key
dll(library_name, function_name,[string1,[string2,[string3,[string4,[string5]]]]])
The function allows calling into an external program called a DLL or Dynamic Link Library.
This is provided to allow customization of the software and requires a custom DLL to be written
by a programmer. For proper use of this function contact Weber Marking Systems.
Example: dll("custdll.dll","Mod87","123422234");
Result: 1234222349
Note: This example would require that a DLL be written and be called custdll.dll. It would need
to have an entry point within it called Mod87 which accepts a single string parameter.
false()
Synonymous with 0. True is synonymous with non-zero values.
Parameters: None.
See also:
if
true
first_label()
Indicates whether a label is the first label in the print job. Returns 1 if the label is the first label in
the print job. Returns 0 if not the first label.
Parameters: None.
See also:
last_label
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
C-9
Data Expression Functions
fld(fld_name)
Returns the value of a specified field in the label format.
Parameters: Label field name.
Example: fld("Product number")
Result: The data in the label field named Product number.
format_date(date_value,format[,separator])
Returns a date value in the format specified. A date value is a number that Legi uses to store
dates internally (the number of days passed since a certain date).
Parameters: Date value, date format code, and the separator desired (optional). The default
separator is /.
Date format codes are:
1
2
3
4
MM/DD/YY
DD/MM/YY
YY/MM/DD
YYDDD
Example: format_date(727753,1,"/")
Result: 07/09/93
See also
format_time
get_current_date
get_date_value
get_day
get_day_of_week
get_job_start_date
get_job_submit_date
get_julian_day
get_month
get_week_of_year
get_year
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
C-10
Data Expression Functions
format_time(value,format[,separator[,am[,pm]]])
Returns a time value in the format specified. A time value is the number of seconds passed since
midnight for a specified time.
Parameters: Time value, time format code, separator (optional), am (optional) and pm (optional).
The default separator is : and the default for am is a and for pm is p.
Time format code:
1
12-hour clock
2
24-hour clock
Example: format_time(43260,1,":","am","pm")
Result: 12:01:00pm
See also:
format_date
get_current_time
get_hour
get_job_start_time
get_job_submit_time
get_minute
get_second
get_time_value
isam
ispm
get_current_date()
Returns the current date in numeric format. Use this option with format_date to produce a
readable date.
Parameters: None.
Example: format_date(get_current_date(),1,"/")
Result: The current system date formatted in MM/DD/YY format. For example, on January 15,
1996, the result would be 01/15/96.
See also
format_date
get_current_time
get_date_value
get_day
get_day_of_week
get_job_start_date
get_job_submit_date
get_julian_day
get_month
get_week_of_year
get_year
get_current_label_in_run()
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
C-11
Data Expression Functions
Returns the number of unique labels that have printed.
Parameters: None.
get_current_time()
Returns the current system time in numeric format. Use this option with format_time to produce
a readable time.
Parameters: None.
Example: get_current_time()
Result: 43260
See also:
format_time
get_current_date
get_hour
get_job_start_time
get_job_submit_time
get_minute
get_second
get_time_value
isam
ispm
get_date_value(month,day,year)
Returns the date value for a specified date. A date value is a number that Legi uses to store dates
internally (the number of days passed since a certain date).
Parameters: Month, day, and year.
Example: get_date_value(07,09,93)
Result: 727753
See also:
format_date
get_current_date
get_day
get_day_of_week
get_job_start_date
get_job_submit_date
get_julian_day
get_month
get_time_value
get_week_of_year
get_year
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
C-12
Data Expression Functions
get_day(date_value)
Returns the day of the month for a date value. A date value is a number that Legi uses to store
dates internally (the number of days passed since a certain date).
Parameters: Date value.
Example: get_day(727753)
Result: 9

NOTE: The date value 727753 is July 9, 1993.
See also:
format_date
get_current_date
get_date_value
get_day_of_week
get_job_start_date
get_job_submit_date
get_julian_day
get_month
get_week_of_year
get_year
get_day_of_week(date_value)
Returns a day of week number between 1 and 7 (1 is Sunday, 7 is Saturday) based on the date
value entered. A date value is a number that Legi uses to store dates internally (the number of
days passed since a certain date).
Parameters: Date value.
Example: get_day_of_week(727753)
Result: 6

NOTE: The date value 727753 is Friday, July 9, 1993.
See also:
format_date
get_current_date
get_date_value
get_day
get_job_start_date
get_job_submit_date
get_julian_day
get_month
get_week_of_year
get_year
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
C-13
Data Expression Functions
get_hour(time_value)
Returns the hour of the day between 0 and 23 for a specified time value. A time value is the
number of seconds passed since midnight for a specified time.
Parameters: Time value.
Example: get_hour(43260)
Result: 12

NOTE: The time value 43260 is 12:01 pm.
See also:
format_time
get_current_time
get_job_start_time
get_job_submit_time
get_minute
get_second
get_time_value
isam
ispm
get_identical_count()
Returns the current settings for the number of identical labels executed at print time. This
function cannot be used in conjunction with auto_identical.
Parameters: None.
See also:
auto_identical
get_serial_count
get_query_count
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
C-14
Data Expression Functions
get_job_start_date()
Returns the date value for the job start date. This function can be used in conjunction with
format_date to make the date value human readable. The job start date or time is the time that the
print job actually began printing. The job submit date or time is the time when the print job was
submitted to the print manager.
Parameters: None.
See also:
format_date
get_current_date
get_date_value
get_day
get_day_of_week
get_job_start_time
get_job_submit_date
get_julian_day
get_month
get_week_of_year
get_year
get_job_start_time()
Returns the time value for the job start time. This function can be used in conjunction with
format_time to make the time value human readable. The job start date or time is the time that
the print job actually began printing. The job submit date or time is the time when the print job
was submitted to the print manager.
Parameters: None.
See also:
format_time
get_current_time
get_hour
get_job_start_date
get_job_submit_time
get_minute
get_second
get_time_value
isam
ispm
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
C-15
Data Expression Functions
get_job_submit_date()
Returns the date value for the job submit date. This function can be used in conjunction with
format_date to make the date value human readable. The job start date or time is the time that the
print job actually began printing. The job submit date or time is the time when the print job was
submitted to the print manager.
Parameters: None.
See also:
format_date
get_current_date
get_date_value
get_day
get_day_of_week
get_job_start_date
get_job_submit_time
get_julian_day
get_month
get_week_of_year
get_year
get_job_submit_time()
Returns the time value for the job submit time. This function can be used in conjunction with
format_time to make the time value human readable. The job submit time is the time the job was
submitted to print manager, not the time it printed. The job start date or time is the time that the
print job actually began printing. The job submit date or time is the time when the print job was
submitted to the print manager.
Parameters: None.
See also:
format_time
get_current_time
get_hour
get_job_start_time
get_job_submit_date
get_minute
get_second
get_time_value
isam
ispm
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
C-16
Data Expression Functions
get_julian_day(date_value)
Returns the julian calendar day value. The julian calendar day is the number of days since
January 1 of the current year.
Parameters: Date value.
Example: get_julian_day(727753)
Result: 190

NOTE: The date value 727753 is July 9, 1993.
See also:
format_date
get_current_date
get_date_value
get_day
get_day_of_week
get_job_start_date
get_job_submit_date
get_month
get_week_of_year
get_year
get_label_name()
Returns the file name for the label format.
Parameters: None.
See also:
get_label_stock
get_user_name
label_version
get_label_stock()
Returns the name of the label stock selected for the label format.
Parameters: None.
See also:
get_label_name
get_user_name
label_version
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
C-17
Data Expression Functions
get_minute(time_value)
Returns the minute for a specified time value. A time value is the number of seconds passed
since midnight for a specified time.
Parameters: Time value.
Example: get_minute(43260)
Result: 1

NOTE: The time value 43260 is 12:01 pm.
See also:
format_time
get_current_time
get_hour
get_job_start_time
get_job_submit_time
get_second
get_time_value
isam
ispm
get_month(date_value)
Returns the month number for a specified date value. A date value is a number that Legi uses to
store dates internally (the number of days passed since a certain date).
Parameters: Date value.
Example: get_month(727753)
Result: 7

NOTE: The date value 727753 is July 9, 1993.
See also:
format_date
get_current_date
get_date_value
get_day
get_day_of_week
get_job_start_date
get_job_submit_date
get_julian_day
get_week_of_year
get_year
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
C-18
Data Expression Functions
get_query_count()
Returns the number of records found during a queried label print run.
Parameters: None.
See also:
db_query
get_identical_count
get_query_rec
get_serial_count
get_query_rec()
Returns the number of the current record being printed during a queried label print run. This
value will be between 1 and the values returned by get_query_count.
Parameters: None.
See also:
db_query
get_query_count
get_second(time_value)
Returns the number of seconds for a specified time value. A time value is the number of seconds
passed since midnight for a specified time.
Parameters: Time value.
Example: get_second(43270)
Result: 10

NOTE: The time value 43270 is 12:01:10 pm.
See also:
format_time
get_current_time
get_hour
get_job_start_time
get_job_submit_time
get_minute
get_time_value
isam
ispm
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
C-19
Data Expression Functions
get_serial_count()
Returns the current setting for the number of times the serial number will increment during a
serial run. This function cannot be used in conjunction with auto_serial.
Parameters: None.
See also:
auto_serial
get_identical_count
get_query_count
serial
get_time_value(hour,min,sec)
Returns the time value for a specified time. The time value is the number of seconds passed since
midnight.
Parameters: Hour, minute, second.
Example: get_time_value(12,01,00)
Result: 43260
See also:
format_time
get_current_time
get_date_value
get_hour
get_job_start_time
get_job_submit_time
get_minute
get_second
isam
ispm
get_user_name()
Returns the current user name logged into the system.
Parameters: None.
See also:
get_label_name
get_label_stock
label_version
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
C-20
Data Expression Functions
get_week_of_year(value)
Returns the number of the current week in the year. Note that the first Sunday of the year starts
week 1. If the first Sunday is not January 1, all days prior to the first Sunday of the year are part
of the last week of the prior year.
Parameters: Date value.
Example: get_week_of_year(727753)
Result: 27

NOTE: The date value 727753 is July 9, 1993.
See also:
format_date
get_current_date
get_date_value
get_day
get_day_of_week
get_job_start_date
get_job_submit_date
get_julian_day
get_month
get_year
get_year(date_value)
Returns the year for a specified date value. A date value is a number that Legi uses to store dates
internally (the number of days passed since a certain date).
Parameters: Date value.
Example: get_year(727753)
Result: 1993

NOTE: The date value 727753 is July 9, 1993.
See also:
format_date
get_current_date
get_date_value
get_day
get_day_of_week
get_job_start_date
get_job_submit_date
get_julian_day
get_month
get_week_of_year
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
C-21
Data Expression Functions
if(test_value,true_value,false_value)
Returns a value based on the test value entered. True is not equal to zero, and false is equal to
zero.
Parameters: Test value, value if true, value if false.
Example: if(2<1,"TRUE!","FALSE!")
Result: FALSE!
See also:
false
isam
isblank
isnumber
ispm
isstring
true
index(index,value_if_1[,value_if_2]...)
Returns the value according to the index value. An index value of 1 returns the first value, an
index value of 2 returns the second value, and so on.
Parameters: index, value_if_1, value_if_2, etc.
Example: index(1,one,two,three)
Result: one
isam(time_value)
Based on the time value entered, returns true (1) if the time is an AM time, returns false (0) if the
time entered is not an AM time.
Parameters: Time value.
Example: isam(43260)
Result: 0

NOTE: The time value 43260 is 12:01 pm.
See also:
format_time
get_current_time
get_hour
get_job_start_time
get_job_submit_time
get_minute
get_second
get_time_value
if
ispm
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
C-22
Data Expression Functions
isblank(value)
Returns true (1) or false (0) based on whether the value of the parameter is blank.
Parameters: Value.
Example: isblank(blank())
Result: 1
See also:
blank
if
isnumber
isstring.
isnumber(value)
Returns true (1) or false (0) based whether the value of the parameter is numeric (1) or alpha (0).
Parameters: Value.
Example: isnumber("abc")
Result: 0
See also:
if
isblank
isstring.
ispm(time_value)
Based on the time value entered, returns true (1) if the time is a PM time, returns false (0) if the
time entered is not a PM time.
Parameters: Time value.
Example: ispm(43260)
Result: 1

NOTE: The time value 43260 is 12:01 pm.
See also:
format_time
get_current_time
get_hour
get_job_start_time
get_job_submit_time
get_minute
get_second
get_time_value
if
isam
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
C-23
Data Expression Functions
isstring(value)
Returns true (1) or false (0) based whether the value of the parameter is numeric (0) or alpha (1).
Parameters: Value.
Example: isstring("abc")
Result: 1
See also:
if
isblank
isnumber
label_version()
Returns the number of times the label has been saved. Each time you save the label, a counter is
increased in the label format.
Parameters: None.
See also:
get_label_name
get_label_stock
get_user_name
last_label()
Indicates whether a label is the last label in the print job. Returns 1 if the label is the last label in
the print job. Returns 0 if not the last label.
Parameters: None.
See also:
first_label
left(string,len)
Returns characters specified beginning from the left of the string.
Parameters: String, number of characters.
Example: left("ABCDEFGHIJK",5)
Result: ABCDE
See also:
cat
len
mid
pad_left
pad_right
right
len(string)
Returns the number of characters in a string.
Parameters: String.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
C-24
Data Expression Functions
Example: len("ABCDEFGHIJK")
Result: 11
See also:
cat
left
mid
pad_left
pad_right
right
lower(string)
Forces a specified string to lower case.
Parameters: String.
Example: lower("ABCDE")
Result: abcde
See also:
upper
mid(string,pos,len)
Returns the characters in a string based on the starting position and length. The first position in
the string is 1.
Parameters: String, starting position, length.
Example: mid("ABCDEFGHIJK",3,3)
Result: CDE
See also:
cat
left
len
pad_left
pad_right
right
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
C-25
Data Expression Functions
ODBC_query(fld_name)
Reads the data from an ODBC table and allows you to set up an ODBC query. Before using this
data expression, the ODBC drivers must be installed and configured using the ODBC option from
the Legi for Windows program group.
Parameters: Field name.
Example: ODBC_query(ProdName)
Result: No result is produced until the query is completed using the Specify query option in Print
Labels.
See also:
ODBC_srch
ODBC_srch(data_source,[user_name],[user_pswd],table_name,ret_fld_name,
srch_fld_name1,srch_fld_value1[,srch_fld_name2,srch_fld_value2])
Read the data from an ODBC-supported table format and return the values that match the search
criteria. Before using this data expression, the ODBC drivers must be installed and configured
using the ODBC option from the Legi for Windows program group.
Parameters: Data source, user name (optional), user password (optional), the table name, the
name of the return field, the search field name and the search field value. Up to 32 search field
names and values can be entered.
See also:
ODBC_query
pad_left(string,len,fill)
Returns the characters left-aligned based on the length and the fill character.
Parameters: String, length, fill character.
Example: pad_left("ABCDEFGHIJK",14,"@")
Result: @@@ABCDEFGHIJK
See also:
cat
left
len
mid
pad_right
right
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
C-26
Data Expression Functions
pad_right(string,len,fill)
Returns the characters right-aligned based on the length and the fill character.
Parameters: String, length, fill character.
Example: pad_right("ABCDEFGHIJK",14,"@")
Result: ABCDEFGHIJK@@@
See also:
cat
left
len
mid
pad_left
right
precision(number,places,zeros_flag)
Returns the number specified with the number of decimals specified. Includes zeroes if specified.
This function does not round.
Parameters: Number, number of decimal places, zero flag.
Zero flag values:
0
Do not remove the zeroes (zero suppression false)
1
Remove the zeroes (zero suppression true)
Example: precision(55,3,0)
Result: 55.000
See also:
abs
sgn
right(string,len)
Returns characters specified beginning from the right of the string.
Parameters: String, number of characters.
Example: right("ABCDEFGHIJK",5)
Result: GHIJK
See also:
cat
left
len
mid
pad_left
pad_right
serial(base[,increment[,length[,fill[,persistant]]]])
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
C-27
Data Expression Functions
Equivalent to the serial Yes radio button on the Data Expression dialog box. Creates a serial
number field based on the parameters entered.
Parameters: Starting number, increment number (optional), length (optional), fill character
(optional). The increment defaults to 1, the length defaults to zero (all), and the fill defaults to
spaces.
Example: serial("25",5,10,"0")
Result: The serial number will begin at 25, will increment by 5, and will be 10 characters long. If
it is not 10 characters long, the 0 symbol will fill in the extra spaces. The first serial number will
be 0000000025. Due to printer limitations any character other than a space or a zero as the fill
character requires computer repetition.
See also:
auto_serial
auto_tracking_serial
get_serial_count
tracking_serial
sgn(number)
If the number specified is positive, returns 1. If the number specified is negative, returns -1. If
the number specified is 0, returns 0.
Parameters: Number.
Example: sgn(-23)
Result: -1
See also:
abs
precision
textfile(filename)
Equivalent to the Text File radio button on the Data Expression dialog box. Returns the contents
of the text file specified.
Parameters: File name.
Example: textfile("c:\config.sys")
Result: Contents of config.sys file.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
C-28
Data Expression Functions
tracking_serial(key[,increment[,length[,fill]]])
Equivalent to the Serial Number Tracking radio button on the Data Expression dialog box.
Creates a tracking serial number field based on the parameters entered. See also serial.
Parameters: Serial number name, increment number (optional), length (optional), fill character
(optional). The increment defaults to 1, the length defaults to zero (all), and the fill defaults to
spaces.
Example: tracking_serial("serial 1",5,10,"0")
Result: The tracking serial number will be serial 1, the numbers will increment by 5, and be 10
characters long. If the number is not 10 characters long, the 0 symbol will fill in the extra spaces.
Due to printer limitations any character other than a space or a zero as the fill character requires
computer repetition.
See also:
auto_serial
serial
true()
Synonymous with 1. False is synonymous with 0.
Parameters: None.
See also:
auto_tracking_serial
false
get_serial_count
if
upper(string)
Forces a specified string to upper case.
Parameters: String.
Example: upper("abcde")
Result: ABCDE
See also:
lower
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
C-29
Data Expression Functions
This page intentionally left blank.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
C-30
Printer Specific Functions
D
13Printer Specific
Functions
This appendix covers functions that specific printers support. Because printer
options vary between the Legi modules, this appendix will cover the different
printer option dialog boxes that may appear depending on the printer selected
in the Legi Configuration module. This information is arranged according to printer type.
Overview
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
D-1
Printer Specific Functions
Series 20, 21, and 22 Options
This section lists the dialog boxes that appear in four different Legi modules when you have
Printer 20, 21, or 22 selected. The following text uses type 20 to refer to both the Series 20, Series
21, and the Series 22 printers.
Configuration
When configuring printer type 20 using the Configuration module, highlight Series 20 in
the Printer/port connection group box and select the Options button. Legi displays the
following dialog box.
Printer Options Dialog Box - Configuration Module
Use this dialog box to indicate whether you are using the following options on your printer:
Cutter installed
Select this check box if the printer you are using has a cutter
installed.
Status checking off
Select this check box to turn status checking off. If this check box is
not selected, Legi will check the printer status before attempting to
send any print jobs to the printer. For example, if a hardware printer
buffer is used, check this box.
To save the options selected, click OK. To eliminate the changes entered, click Cancel.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
D-2
Printer Specific Functions
Print Labels
When creating print jobs using the Print Labels module, set the options for printer type 20
by selecting the Printer Options button. Legi displays the following dialog box.
Print Options Dialog Box - Print Labels Module
Use this dialog box to indicate whether you are using the following options on your printer:
Computer repetition If this check box is selected and you are printing more than one
copy, the computer will send the label information for each copy. If
this check box is not selected, the printer will repeat the information
it already received for each label.
The default is printer repetition because the printing is faster.
However, if the label being printed has queried fields, fields that
reference a serialized field, or a barcode serial number field, you
must use computer repetition in order to print the labels correctly.
Cut during print
If the selected printer has a cutter installed, select to use this option
during the label printing. If the selected printer does not have a
cutter installed, this option will be shaded out. To configure printers
for Legi, see Chapter 10, Configuring Legi.
Cut count
Enter the number of labels after which the printer will cut. For
example, if this field displays 5, the printer will cut the labels after
every five labels are printed.
Pause count
Select this check box to pause after the number of labels displayed in
this field are printed. For example, if this field displays 3, after three
labels are printed, the printer will pause. To continue the print job,
you must press the Pause button on the printer.
To save the options selected, click OK. To eliminate the changes entered, click Cancel.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
D-3
Printer Specific Functions
Label Design
When creating label formats using the Label Design module, set the options for printer
type 20 by selecting the Printer Options button from the Label Settings dialog box. Legi
displays the following dialog box.
Print Options Dialog Box - Label Design
Use this dialog box to indicate whether you are using the following options on your printer:
Label rotation
Select the amount to rotate the label when it prints. To
display the label rotations available for the current printer,
click on the down arrow or press the (£) or (¥). For
example, selecting 180 degrees would cause the label to
print upside down.
Printer speed (inches/second) To increase the speed of the printer, click the down arrow
or press the (£) or (¥) arrow keys to scroll through the
increases available for the current printer. The faster the
speed selected, the more the print quality decreases.
Label top adjustment
Enter the position in printer dots where the top of the label
format will begin printing. You can enter from -64 to +64
printer dots.
Tear off adjustment
Indicate how far out from the print head the label feeds
after printing.
Darkness
This number indicates how dark the label will print. A
higher number means the label will print darker.
To save the options selected, click OK. To eliminate the changes entered, click Cancel.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
D-4
Printer Specific Functions
Graphics Print and View
The options for Graphics Print and View can be selected from two areas:
From
the Print menu, select Printer options. Legi displays the same window as the
Configuration option, noted above.
From
the Configuration dialog box, select the Options button. Legi displays the same
window as the Label Design option, noted above.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
D-5
Printer Specific Functions
Series 23 Options
This section lists the dialog boxes that appear in four different Legi modules when you have
Printer Series 23 selected.
Configuration
When configuring printer type 23 using the Configuration module, highlight Series 23 in
the Printer/port connection group box and select the Options button. Legi displays the
following dialog box.
Printer Options Dialog Box - Configuration Module
Use this dialog box to indicate whether you are using the following options on your printer:
Cutter installed
Select this check box if the printer you are using has a cutter
installed.
Status checking off
Select this check box to turn status checking off. If this check box is
not selected, Legi will check the printer status before attempting to
send any print jobs to the printer. For example, if a hardware printer
buffer is used, check this box.
Module designator
Type the code for the memory options installed on this printer. For
additional information, see the user manual for the printer.
Module size in bytes Type the size in bytes of the memory option.
To save the options selected, click OK. To eliminate the changes entered, click Cancel.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
D-6
Printer Specific Functions
Print Labels
When creating print jobs using the Print Labels module, set the options for printer type 23
by selecting the Printer Options button. Legi displays the following dialog box.
Print Options Dialog Box - Print Labels Module
Use this dialog box to indicate whether you are using the following options on your printer:
Computer repetition If this check box is selected and you are printing more than one
copy, the computer will send the label information for each copy. If
this check box is not selected, the printer will repeat the information
it already received for each label.
The default is printer repetition because the printing is faster.
However, if the label being printed has queried fields, fields that
reference a serialized field, or a barcode serial number field, you
must use computer repetition in order to print the labels correctly.
Cut count
Enter the number of labels after which the printer will cut. For
example, if this field displays 5, the printer will cut the labels after
every five labels are printed.
To save the options selected, click OK. To eliminate the changes entered, click Cancel.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
D-7
Printer Specific Functions
Label Design
When creating label formats using the Label Design module, set the options for printer
type 23 by selecting the Printer Options button from the Label Settings dialog box. Legi
displays the following dialog box.
Print Options Dialog Box - Label Design
Use this dialog box to indicate whether you are using the following options on your printer:
Printer speed (inches/second) To increase the speed of the printer, click the down arrow
or press the (£) or (¥) arrow keys to scroll through the
increases available for the current printer. The faster the
speed selected, the more the print quality decreases.
Cutter delay
Enter the amount of time to wait before cutting a label that
has just printed. Time is represented in units of 24 µsecs;
i.e., entering 1 would set a 24 µsec delay, 2 a 48 µsec
delay, etc.
Contrast
Indicate the level of contrast between the black and white
areas of the label. This number sets how heavy the ink
will be, with choices ranging from 1 (the lightest) to 20
(the heaviest).
Tear off
Set the number of inches used to align the label stock with
the tear off bar.
Backfeed
Set the adjustment in inches used to move the label stock
back underneath the print head after the label stock has
been fed out to tear it off.
Label stock continuous
Select this check box if you are using continuous feed
label stock.
Label sensor reflective
If the label stock you are using has "black strip" media
sensing for end of label detection, select this check box.
This setting tells the printer to sense the end of the label
with a transmissive sensor or a reflective sensor.
Independent ribbon control
Select this check box if you want to use the ribbon saving
feature.
To save the options selected, click OK. To eliminate the changes entered, click Cancel.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
D-8
Printer Specific Functions
Graphics Print and View
The options for Graphics Print and View can be selected from two areas:
From
the Print menu, select Printer options. Legi displays the same window as the
Configuration option, noted above.
From
the Configuration dialog box, select the Options button. Legi displays the same
window as the Label Design option, noted above.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
D-9
Printer Specific Functions
Series 24 Options
This section lists the dialog boxes that appear in four different Legi modules when you have
Printer Series 24 selected.
Configuration
When configuring printer type 24 using the Configuration module, highlight Series 24 in
the Printer/port connection group box and select the Options button. Legi displays the
following dialog box.
Printer Options Dialog Box - Configuration Module
Use this dialog box to indicate whether you are using the following options on your printer:
Status checking off
Select this check box to turn status checking off. If this check box is
not selected, Legi will check the printer status before attempting to
send any print jobs to the printer. For example, if a hardware printer
buffer is used, check this box.
Cutter installed
Select this check box if the printer you are using has a cutter
installed.
To save the options selected, click OK. To eliminate the changes entered, click Cancel.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
D-10
Printer Specific Functions
Print Labels
When creating print jobs using the Print Labels module, set the options for printer type 24
by selecting the Printer Options button. Legi displays the following dialog box.
Print Options Dialog Box - Print Labels Module
Use this dialog box to indicate whether you are using the following options on your printer:
Computer repetition If this check box is selected and you are printing more than one
copy, the computer will send the label information for each copy. If
this check box is not selected, the printer will repeat the information
it already received for each label.
The default is printer repetition because the printing is faster.
However, if the label being printed has queried fields, fields that
reference a serialized field, or a barcode serial number field, you
must use computer repetition in order to print the labels correctly.
Cut during print
If the selected printer has a cutter installed, select to use this option
during the label printing. If the selected printer does not have a
cutter installed, this option will be shaded out. To configure printers
for Legi, see Chapter 10, Configuring Legi.
Cut count
Enter the number of labels after which the printer will cut. For
example, if this field displays 5, the printer will cut the labels after
every five labels are printed.
Pause count
Select this check box to pause after the number of labels displayed in
this field are printed. For example, if this field displays 3, after three
labels are printed, the printer will pause. To continue the print job,
you must press the Pause button on the printer.
To save the options selected, click OK. To eliminate the changes entered, click Cancel.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
D-11
Printer Specific Functions
Label Design
When creating label formats using the Label Design module, set the options for printer
type 24 by selecting the Printer Options button from the Label Settings dialog box. Legi
displays the following dialog box.
Print Options Dialog Box - Label Design
Use this dialog box to indicate whether you are using the following options on your printer:
Label rotation
Select the amount to rotate the label when it prints. To
display the label rotations available for the current printer,
click on the down arrow or press the (£) or (¥). For
example, selecting 180 degrees would cause the label to
print upside down.
Printer speed (inches/second) To increase the speed of the printer, click the down arrow
or press the (£) or (¥) arrow keys to scroll through the
increases available for the current printer. The faster the
speed selected, the more the print quality decreases.
Label top adjustment
Enter the position in printer dots where the top of the label
format will begin printing. You can enter from -64 to +64
printer dots.
Media darkness
This number indicates how dark the label will print. A
higher number means the label will print darker.
Media tracking
Select the appropriate option button to indicate whether the
label stock you are using is continuous or non-continuous.
Print mode
Select one of the following options to indicate the print
mode:
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
Tear off
Select this option button if the labels
will print and be torn off manually.
Peel off
Select this option if the printer will
separate the backing from the label.
This setting requires that your printer
have the backing only rewind assembly
installed.
D-12
Printer Specific Functions
External rewind Select this option to have the label stock
wound onto the external rewind spool.
You can only select this option if your
printer is equipped with the optional
external rewind assembly.
Cutter
Select this option if the printer you are
using has a cutter installed and will cut
between labels.
To save the options selected, click OK. To eliminate the changes entered, click Cancel.
Graphics Print and View
The options for Graphics Print and View can be selected from two areas:
From
the Print menu, select Printer options. Legi displays the same window as the
Configuration option, noted above.
From
the Configuration dialog box, select the Options button. Legi displays the same
window as the Label Design option, noted above.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
D-13
Printer Specific Functions
Printer 40 and 40S Options
This section lists the dialog boxes that appear in four different Legi modules when you have
Printer 40 or 40S selected. The following text uses type 40 to refer to both the Series 40 and the
Series 40S printers.
Configuration
When configuring printer type 40 using the Configuration module, highlight Series 40 in
the Printer/port connection group box and select the Options button. Legi displays the
following dialog box.
Printer Options Dialog Box - Configuration Module
Use this dialog box to indicate whether you are using the following options on your printer:
Cutter installed
Select this check box if the printer you are using has a cutter
installed.
Status checking off
Select this check box to turn status checking off. If this check box is
not selected, Legi will check the printer status before attempting to
send any print jobs to the printer. For example, if a hardware printer
buffer is used, check this box.
To save the options selected, click OK. To eliminate the changes entered, click Cancel.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
D-14
Printer Specific Functions
Print Labels
When creating print jobs using the Print Labels module, set the options for printer type 40
by selecting the Printer Options button. Legi displays the following dialog box.
Print Options Dialog Box - Print Labels Module
Use this dialog box to indicate whether you are using the following options on your printer:
Computer repetition If this check box is selected and you are printing more than one
copy, the computer will send the label information for each copy. If
this check box is not selected, the printer will repeat the information
it already received for each label.
The default is printer repetition because the printing is faster.
However, if the label being printed has queried fields, fields that
reference a serialized field, or a barcode serial number field, you
must use computer repetition in order to print the labels correctly.
Cut during print
If the selected printer has a cutter installed, select to use this option
during the label printing. If the selected printer does not have a
cutter installed, this option will be shaded out. To configure printers
for Legi, see Chapter 10, Configuring Legi.
Cut count
Enter the number of labels after which the printer will cut. For
example, if this field displays 5, the printer will cut the labels after
every five labels are printed.
Pause count
Select this check box to pause after the number of labels displayed in
this field are printed. For example, if this field displays 3, after three
labels are printed, the printer will pause. To continue the print job,
you must press the Pause button on the printer.
To save the options selected, click OK. To eliminate the changes entered, click Cancel.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
D-15
Printer Specific Functions
Label Design
When creating label formats using the Label Design module, set the options for printer
type 40 by selecting the Printer Options button from the Label Settings dialog box. Legi
displays the following dialog box.
Print Options Dialog Box - Label Design
Use this dialog box to indicate whether you are using the following options on your printer:
Printer speed (inches/second) To increase the speed of the printer, click the down arrow
or press the (£) or (¥) arrow keys to scroll through the
increases available for the current printer. The faster the
speed selected, the more the print quality decreases.
Media darkness
This number indicates how dark the label will print. A
higher number means the label will print darker.
To save the options selected, click OK. To eliminate the changes entered, click Cancel.
Graphics Print and View
The options for Graphics Print and View can be selected from two areas:
From
the Print menu, select Printer options. Legi displays the same window as the
Configuration option, noted above.
From
the Configuration dialog box, select the Options button. Legi displays the same
window as the Label Design option, noted above.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
D-16
Printer Specific Functions
Series 40D Options
This section lists the dialog boxes that appear in four different Legi modules when you have
Printer Series 40D selected.
Configuration
When configuring printer type 40D using the Configuration module, highlight Series 40D
in the Printer/port connection group box and select the Options button. Legi displays the
following dialog box.
Printer Options Dialog Box - Configuration Module
Use this dialog box to indicate whether you are using the following options on your printer:
Cutter installed
Select this check box if the printer you are using has a cutter
installed.
Status checking off
Select this check box to turn status checking off. If this check box is
not selected, Legi will check the printer status before attempting to
send any print jobs to the printer. For example, if a hardware printer
buffer is used, check this box.
Module designator
Type the code for the module designator.
Module size in bytes Type the size of the module in bytes.
To save the options selected, click OK. To eliminate the changes entered, click Cancel.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
D-17
Printer Specific Functions
Print Labels
When creating print jobs using the Print Labels module, set the options for printer type
40D by selecting the Printer Options button. Legi displays the following dialog box.
Print Options Dialog Box - Print Labels Module
Use this dialog box to indicate whether you are using the following options on your printer:
Computer repetition If this check box is selected and you are printing more than one
copy, the computer will send the label information for each copy. If
this check box is not selected, the printer will repeat the information
it already received for each label.
The default is printer repetition because the printing is faster.
However, if the label being printed has queried fields, fields that
reference a serialized field, or a barcode serial number field, you
must use computer repetition in order to print the labels correctly.
Cut count
Enter the number of labels after which the printer will cut. For
example, if this field displays 5, the printer will cut the labels after
every five labels are printed.
To save the options selected, click OK. To eliminate the changes entered, click Cancel.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
D-18
Printer Specific Functions
Label Design
When creating label formats using the Label Design module, set the options for printer
type 40D by selecting the Printer Options button from the Label Settings dialog box.
Legi displays the following dialog box.
Print Options Dialog Box - Label Design
Use this dialog box to indicate whether you are using the following options on your printer:
Printer speed (inches/second) To increase the speed of the printer, click the down arrow
or press the (£) or (¥) arrow keys to scroll through the
increases available for the current printer. The faster the
speed selected, the more the print quality decreases.
Cutter delay
Enter the amount of time to wait before cutting a label that
has just printed. Time is represented in units of 24 µsecs;
i.e., entering 1 would set a 24 µsec delay, 2 a 48 µsec
delay, etc.
Contrast
Indicate the level of contrast between the black and white
areas of the label. This number sets how heavy the ink
will be, with choices ranging from 1 (the lightest) to 20
(the heaviest).
Tear off
Set the number of inches used to align the label stock with
the tear off bar.
Backfeed
Set the adjustment in inches used to move the label stock
back underneath the print head after the label stock has
been fed out to tear it off.
Label stock continuous
Select this check box if you are using continuous feed
label stock.
Label sensor reflective
If the label stock you are using has "black strip" media
sensing for end of label detection, select this check box.
This setting tells the printer to sense the end of the label
with a transmissive sensor or a reflective sensor.
Independent ribbon control
Select this check box if you want to use the ribbon saving
feature.
To save the options selected, click OK. To eliminate the changes entered, click Cancel.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
D-19
Printer Specific Functions
Graphics Print and View
The options for Graphics Print and View can be selected from two areas:
From
the Print menu, select Printer options. Legi displays the same window as the
Configuration option, noted above.
From
the Configuration dialog box, select the Options button. Legi displays the same
window as the Label Design option, noted above.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
D-20
Printer Specific Functions
Series 40Z, 40ZL2, 40ZL3, and 40ZR3 Options
This section lists the dialog boxes that appear in four different Legi modules when you have
Printer 40Z selected. The following text uses type 40Z to refer to the series 40ZL2, 40ZL3, and
40ZR3 printers.
Configuration
When configuring printer type 40Z using the Configuration module, highlight Series 40Z
in the Printer/port connection group box and select the Options button. Legi displays the
following dialog box.
Printer Options Dialog Box - Configuration Module
Use this dialog box to indicate whether you are using the following options on your printer:
Cutter installed
Select this check box if the printer you are using has a cutter
installed.
Status checking off
Select this check box to turn status checking off. If this check box is
not selected, Legi will check the printer status before attempting to
send any print jobs to the printer. For example, if a hardware printer
buffer is used, check this box.
To save the options selected, click OK. To eliminate the changes entered, click Cancel.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
D-21
Printer Specific Functions
Print Labels
When creating print jobs using the Print Labels module, set the options for printer type 40Z
by selecting the Printer Options button. Legi displays the following dialog box.
Print Options Dialog Box - Print Labels Module
Use this dialog box to indicate whether you are using the following options on your printer:
Computer repetition If this check box is selected and you are printing more than one
copy, the computer will send the label information for each copy. If
this check box is not selected, the printer will repeat the information
it already received for each label.
The default is printer repetition because the printing is faster.
However, if the label being printed has queried fields, fields that
reference a serialized field, or a barcode serial number field, you
must use computer repetition in order to print the labels correctly.
Cut during print
If the selected printer has a cutter installed, select to use this option
during the label printing. If the selected printer does not have a
cutter installed, this option will be shaded out. To configure printers
for Legi, see Chapter 10, Configuring Legi.
Cut count
Enter the number of labels after which the printer will cut. For
example, if this field displays 5, the printer will cut the labels after
every five labels are printed.
Pause count
Select this check box to pause after the number of labels displayed in
this field are printed. For example, if this field displays 3, after three
labels are printed, the printer will pause. To continue the print job,
you must press the Pause button on the printer.
To save the options selected, click OK. To eliminate the changes entered, click Cancel.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
D-22
Printer Specific Functions
Label Design
When creating label formats using the Label Design module, set the options for printer
type 40Z by selecting the Printer Options button from the Label Settings dialog box.
Legi displays the following dialog box.
Print Options Dialog Box - Label Design
Use this dialog box to indicate whether you are using the following options on your printer:
Label rotation
Select the amount to rotate the label when it prints. To
display the label rotations available for the current printer,
click on the down arrow or press the (£) or (¥). For
example, selecting 180 degrees would cause the label to
print upside down.
Printer speed (inches/second) To increase the speed of the printer, click the down arrow
or press the (£) or (¥) arrow keys to scroll through the
increases available for the current printer. The faster the
speed selected, the more the print quality decreases.
Label top adjustment
Enter the position in printer dots where the top of the label
format will begin printing. You can enter from -64 to +64
printer dots.
Tear off adjustment
Indicate how far out from the print head the label feeds
after printing.
Darkness
This number indicates how dark the label will print. A
higher number means the label will print darker.
To save the options selected, click OK. To eliminate the changes entered, click Cancel.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
D-23
Printer Specific Functions
Graphics Print and View
The options for Graphics Print and View can be selected from two areas:
From
the Print menu, select Printer options. Legi displays the same window as the
Configuration option, noted above.
From
the Configuration dialog box, select the Options button. Legi displays the same
window as the Label Design option, noted above.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
D-24
Printer Specific Functions
Series 41S Options
This section lists the dialog boxes that appear in four different Legi modules when you have
Printer 41S selected.
Configuration
When configuring printer type 41S using the Configuration module, highlight Series 41S in
the Printer/port connection group box and select the Options button. Legi displays the
following dialog box.
Print Options dialog Box - Configuration Module
Use this dialog box to indicate whether you are using the following options on your printer:
Cutter installed
Select this check box if the printer you are using has a cutter
installed.
Status checking off
Select this check box to turn status checking off. If this check box is
not selected, Legi will check the printer status before attempting to
send any print jobs to the printer. For example, if a hardware printer
buffer is used, check this box.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
D-25
Printer Specific Functions
Print Labels
When creating print jobs using the Print Labels module, set the options for printer type 41S
by selecting the Printer Options button. Legi displays the following dialog box.
Printer Options Dialog Box - Print Labels Module
Use this dialog box to indicate whether you are using the following options on your printer:
Computer repetition If this check box is selected and you are printing more than one
copy, the computer will send the label information for each copy. If
this check box is not selected, the printer will repeat the information
it already received for each label. The default is printer repetition
because the printing is faster. However, if the label being printed has
queried fields or fields that reference a serialized field, you must use
computer repetition in order to print the labels correctly.
Cut during print
If you are using a printer with cutter installed, and you want the
cutter to cut labels, check this check box.
Cut count
If you have the cut during print box checked, enter the number of
labels after which the printer will cut. For example, if this field
displays 5, the printer will cut after every five labels are printed.
To save the options selected, click OK. To eliminate the changes entered, click Cancel.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
D-26
Printer Specific Functions
Label Design
When creating formats using the Label Design module, set the options for printer type 41S
by selecting the Printer Options button from the Label Settings dialog box. Legi displays
the following dialog box.
Print Options Dialog Box - Label Design
Use this dialog box to adjust the following options on your printer:
Media darkness
The higher the number, the darker the print on the label
will be. The range is from 1 to 3.
Printer speed (inches/second) To increase the speed of the printer, click the down arrow
or press the (¥) arrow key to scroll through the increases
available for the current printer. The faster the speed
selected, the more the print quality decreases.
To save the options selected, click OK. To eliminate the changes entered, click Cancel.
Graphics Print and View
The options for Graphics Print and View can be selected from two areas:
From
the Print menu, select Printer options. Legi displays the same window as the
Configuration option, noted above.
From
the Configuration dialog box, select the Options button. Legi displays the same
window as the Label Design option, noted above.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
D-27
Printer Specific Functions
Printer 50,62-68,90 Options
This section lists the dialog boxes that appear in two different Legi modules when you have
Printer 50, Printers 62-68 or Printer 90 selected. Note that all of the references in the following
text will be generic references to printer type 60.
Configuration
When configuring printer type 60 using the Configuration module, highlight Series 50,
Series 62-68, or Series 90 in the Printer/port connection group box and select the Options
button. Legi displays the following dialog box.
Printer Options Dialog Box - Configuration Module
Use this dialog box to indicate how to set the following options on your printer:
Lines per inch
Select the number of lines per inch you want the printer to print.
QMS command character Some non-Weber printers may require a different command
character to print properly. Specify the alternate command
character here if the Weber default is not used.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
D-28
Printer Specific Functions
Print Labels
When creating print jobs using the Print Labels module, set the options for printer type 60
by selecting the Printer Options button. Legi displays the following dialog box.
Computer repetition If this check box is selected and you are printing more than one
copy, the computer will send the label information for each copy. If
this check box is not selected, the printer will repeat the information
it already received for each label.
The default is printer repetition because the printing is faster.
However, if the label being printed has queried fields, fields that
reference a serialized field, or a barcode serial number field, you
must use computer repetition in order to print the labels correctly.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
D-29
Printer Specific Functions
Series 71 Options
This section lists the dialog boxes that appear in four different Legi modules when you have
Printer 71 selected.
Configuration
When configuring printer type 71 using the Configuration module, highlight Series 71 in
the Printer/port connection group box and select the Options button. Legi displays the
following dialog box.
Printer Options dialog Box - Configuration Module
Use this dialog box to indicate whether you are using the following options on your printer:
Cutter installed
Select this check box if the printer you are using has a cutter
installed.
Status checking off
Select this check box to turn status checking off. If this check
box is not selected, Legi will check the printer status before
attempting to send any print jobs to the printer. For example, if
a hardware printer buffer is used, check this box.
Installed memory module There are two selections here: RAM or FLASH module installed
and RAM or FLASH module not installed. Check the
appropriate radio button.
To save the options selected, click OK. To eliminate the changes entered, click Cancel.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
D-30
Printer Specific Functions
Print Labels
When creating print jobs using the Print Labels module, set the options for printer type 71
by selecting the Printer Options button. Legi displays the following dialog box.
Print Options Dialog Box - Print Labels Module
Use this dialog box to indicate whether you are using the following options on your printer:
Computer repetition If this check box is selected and you are printing more than one
copy, the computer will send the label information for each copy. If
this check box is not selected, the printer will repeat the information
it already received for each label. The default is printer repetition
because the printing is faster. However, if the label being printed has
queried fields or fields that reference a serialized field, you must use
computer repetition in order to print the labels correctly.
Cut count
If you have the cut during print box checked, enter the number of
labels after which the printer will cut. For example, if this field
displays 5, the printer will cut after every five labels are printed.
To save the options selected, click OK. To eliminate the changes entered, click Cancel.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
D-31
Printer Specific Functions
Label Design
When creating formats using the Label Design module, set the options for printer type 71
by selecting the Printer Options button from the Label Settings dialog box. Legi displays
the following dialog box.
Print Options Dialog Box - Label Design
Use this dialog box to adjust the following options on your printer:
Printer speed (inches/second) To increase the speed of the printer, click the down arrow
or press the (£) or (¥) arrow keys to scroll through the
increases available for the current printer. The faster the
speed selected, the more the print quality decreases.
Tear off
Indicate how far out from the print head the label feeds after
printing.
Backfeed
Indicate how much the label stock backs up into the printer
before printing a label.
Contrast
Indicate the level of contrast between the black and white
areas of the label. This number sets how heavy the print
will be, with choices ranging from 1 (the lightest) to 20 (the
darkest).
Select edge sensor
Select this radio button if you are using die cut stock and
you want transmissive sensing of the label edge.
Label sensor reflective
Select this radio button if you are using die cut stock with a
reflective label edge sensor.
Select continuous stock
Select this radio button if you are using continuous stock to
print this label.
To save the options selected, click OK. To eliminate the changes entered, click Cancel.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
D-32
Printer Specific Functions
Graphics Print and View
The options for Graphics Print and View can be selected from two areas:
From
the Print menu, select Printer options. Legi displays the same window as the
Configuration option, noted above.
From
the Configuration dialog box, select the Options button. Legi displays the same
window as the Label Design option, noted above.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
D-33
Printer Specific Functions
Series 72 Options
This section lists the dialog boxes that appear in four different Legi modules when you have
Printer 72 selected.
Configuration
When configuring printer type 72 using the Configuration module, highlight Series 72 in
the Printer/port connection group box and select the Options button. Legi displays the
following dialog box.
Printer Options Dialog Box - Configuration Module
Use this dialog box to indicate whether you are using the following options on your printer:
Cutter installed
Select this check box if the printer you are using has a cutter
installed.
Status checking off
Select this check box to turn status checking off. If this check
box is not selected, Legi will check the printer status before
attempting to send any print jobs to the printer. For example,
if a hardware printer buffer is used, check this box.
Installed graphics module Highlight the radio button indicating the location of the
module installed and its size.
To save the options selected, click OK. To eliminate the changes entered, click Cancel.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
D-34
Printer Specific Functions
Print Labels
When creating print jobs using the Print Labels module, set the options for printer type 72
by selecting the Printer Options button. Legi displays the following dialog box.
Print Options dialog box - Print Labels Module
Use this dialog box to indicate whether you are using the following options on your printer:
Computer repetition If this check box is selected and you are printing more than one
copy, the computer will send the label information for each copy. If
this check box is not selected, the printer will repeat the information
it already received for each label. The default is printer repetition
because the printing is faster. However, if the label being printed has
queried fields or fields that reference a serialized field, you must use
computer repetition in order to print the labels correctly.
Cut count
If you have the cut during print box checked, enter the number of
labels after which the printer will cut. For example, if this field
displays 5, the printer will cut after every five labels are printed.
To save the options selected, click OK. To eliminate the changes entered, click Cancel.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
D-35
Printer Specific Functions
Label Design
When creating formats using the Label Design module, set the options for printer type 72
by selecting the Printer Options button from the Label Settings dialog box. Legi displays
the following dialog box.
Print Options Dialog Box - Label Design
Use this dialog box to adjust the following options on your printer:
Printer speed (inches/second) To increase the speed of the printer, click the down arrow
or press the (£) or (¥) arrow keys to scroll through the
increases available for the current printer. The faster the
speed selected, the more the print quality decreases.
Tear off
Indicate how far out from the print head the label feeds
after printing.
Backfeed
Indicate how much the label stock backs up into the printer
before printing a label.
Contrast
Indicate the level of contrast between the black and white
areas of the label. This number sets how heavy the print
will be, with choices ranging from 1 (the lightest) to 20
(the darkest).
Select edge sensor
Select this radio button if you are using die cut stock and
you want transmissive sensing of the label edge.
Label sensor reflective
Select this radio button if you are using die cut stock with
a reflective label edge sensor.
Select continuous stock
Select this radio button if you are using continuous stock
to print this label.
To save the options selected, click OK. To eliminate the changes entered, click Cancel.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
D-36
Printer Specific Functions
Graphics Print and View
The options for Graphics Print and View can be selected from two areas:
From
the Print menu, select Printer options. Legi displays the same window as the
Configuration option, noted above.
From
the Configuration dialog box, select the Options button. Legi displays the same
window as the Label Design option, noted above.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
D-37
Printer Specific Functions
Series 73 Options
This section lists the dialog boxes that appear in four different Legi modules when you have
Printer Series 73 selected.
Configuration
When configuring printer type 73 using the Configuration module, highlight Series 73 in
the Printer/port connection group box and select the Options button. Legi displays the
following dialog box.
Printer Options Dialog Box - Configuration Module
Use this dialog box to indicate whether you are using the following options on your printer:
Cutter installed
Select this check box if the printer you are using has a cutter
installed.
Status checking off
Select this check box to turn status checking off. If this check
box is not selected, Legi will check the printer status before
attempting to send any print jobs to the printer. For example,
if a hardware printer buffer is used, check this box.
Installed graphics module
Select the type of memory option installed on the printer, then
type the size in 4K units. For additional information, see the
user manual for the printer.
To save the options selected, click OK. To eliminate the changes entered, click Cancel.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
D-38
Printer Specific Functions
Print Labels
When creating print jobs using the Print Labels module, set the options for printer type 73
by selecting the Printer Options button. Legi displays the following dialog box.
Print Options Dialog Box - Print Labels Module
Use this dialog box to indicate whether you are using the following options on your printer:
Computer repetition If this check box is selected and you are printing more than one
copy, the computer will send the label information for each copy. If
this check box is not selected, the printer will repeat the information
it already received for each label.
The default is printer repetition because the printing is faster.
However, if the label being printed has queried fields, fields that
reference a serialized field, or a barcode serial number field, you
must use computer repetition in order to print the labels correctly.
Cut count
Enter the number of labels after which the printer will cut. For
example, if this field displays 5, the printer will cut the labels after
every five labels are printed.
To save the options selected, click OK. To eliminate the changes entered, click Cancel.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
D-39
Printer Specific Functions
Label Design
When creating label formats using the Label Design module, set the options for printer
type 73 by selecting the Printer Options button from the Label Settings dialog box. Legi
displays the following dialog box.
Print Options Dialog Box - Label Design
Use this dialog box to indicate whether you are using the following options on your printer:
Printer speed (inches/second) To increase the speed of the printer, click the down arrow
or press the (£) or (¥) arrow keys to scroll through the
increases available for the current printer. The faster the
speed selected, the more the print quality decreases.
Contrast
Indicate the level of contrast between the black and white
areas of the label. This number sets how heavy the ink
will be, with choices ranging from 1 (the lightest) to 20
(the heaviest).
Tear off
Set the number of inches used to align the label stock with
the tear off bar.
Backfeed
Set the adjustment in inches used to move the label stock
back underneath the print head after the label stock has
been fed out to tear it off.
Select edge sensor
Select this radio button if you are using die cut stock and
you want transmissive sensing of the label edge.
Label sensor reflective
If the label stock you are using has "black strip" media
sensing for end of label detection, select this check box.
This setting tells the printer to sense the end of the label
with a transmissive sensor or a reflective sensor.
Select continuous stock
Select this check box if you are using continuous feed
label stock.
To save the options selected, click OK. To eliminate the changes entered, click Cancel.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
D-40
Printer Specific Functions
Graphics Print and View
The options for Graphics Print and View can be selected from two areas:
From
the Print menu, select Printer options. Legi displays the same window as the
Configuration option, noted above.
From
the Configuration dialog box, select the Options button. Legi displays the same
window as the Label Design option, noted above.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
D-41
Printer Specific Functions
Printer 74/76 Options
This section lists the dialog boxes that appear in four different Legi modules when you have
Printer 74 or Printer 76 selected. All references in the following text will be to Printer 76.
Configuration
When configuring printer type 76 using the Configuration module, highlight Series 76 in
the Printer/port connection group box and select the Options button. Legi displays the
following dialog box.
Printer Options Dialog Box - Configuration Module
Use this dialog box to indicate whether you are using the following options on your printer:
Cutter installed
Select this check box if the printer you are using has a cutter
installed.
Status checking off
Select this check box to turn status checking off. If this check box is
not selected, Legi will check the printer status before attempting to
send any print jobs to the printer. For example, if a hardware printer
buffer is used, check this box.
Installed memory
Click anywhere in this check box or press (¥) to display the list of
valid memory sizes for the printer. Select the appropriate memory
size.
To save the options selected, click OK. To eliminate the changes entered, click Cancel.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
D-42
Printer Specific Functions
Print Labels
When creating print jobs using the Print Labels module, set the options for printer type 76
by selecting the Printer Options button. Legi displays the following dialog box.
Print Options Dialog Box - Print Labels Module
Use this dialog box to indicate whether you are using the following options on your printer:
Computer repetition If this check box is selected and you are printing more than one
copy, the computer will send the label information for each copy. If
this check box is not selected, the printer will repeat the information
it already received for each label.
The default is printer repetition because the printing is faster.
However, if the label being printed has queried fields or fields that
reference a serialized field, you must use computer repetition in
order to print the labels correctly.
Cut count
If you are using a printer with a cutter installed, enter the number of
labels after which the printer will cut. For example, if this field
displays 5, the printer will cut the labels after every five labels are
printed.
To save the options selected, click OK. To eliminate the changes entered, click Cancel.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
D-43
Printer Specific Functions
Label Design
When creating label formats using the Label Design module, set the options for printer
type 76 by selecting the Printer Options button from the Label Settings dialog box. Legi
displays the following dialog box.
Print Options Dialog Box - Label Design
Use this dialog box to indicate whether you are using the following options on your printer:
Label rotation
Select the amount to rotate the label when it prints. To
display the label rotations available for the current printer,
click on the down arrow or press the (£) or (¥). For
example, selecting 180 degrees would cause the label to
print upside down.
Printer speed (inches/second) To increase the speed of the printer, click the down arrow
or press the (£) or (¥) key to scroll through the increases
available for the current printer. The faster the speed
selected, the more the print quality decreases.
Cutter delay
Enter the amount of time to wait before cutting a label that
has just printed. Time is represented in units of 24 µsecs;
i.e., entering 1 would set a 24 µsec delay, 2 a 48 µsec
delay, etc.
Contrast
Indicate the level of contrast between the black and white
areas of the label. This number sets how heavy the ink
will be, with choices ranging from 1 (the lightest) to 20
(the heaviest).
Tear off
Set the number of inches used to align the label stock with
the tear off bar.
Backfeed
Set the adjustment in inches used to move the label stock
back underneath the print head after the label stock has
been fed out to tear it off.
Label stock continuous
Select this check box if you are using continuous feed
label stock.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
D-44
Printer Specific Functions
Label sensor reflective
If the label stock you are using has "black strip" media
sensing for end of label detection, select this check box.
This setting tells the printer to sense the end of the label
with a transmissive sensor or a reflective sensor.
Independent ribbon control
Select this check box if you want to use the ribbon saving
feature.
To save the options selected, click OK. To eliminate the changes entered, click Cancel.
Graphics Print and View
The options for Graphics Print and View can be selected from two areas:
From
the Print menu, select Printer options. Legi displays the same window as the
Configuration option, noted above.
From
the Configuration dialog box, select the Options button. Legi displays the same
window as the Label Design option, noted above.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
D-45
Printer Specific Functions
Series 77 Options
This section lists the dialog boxes that appear in four different Legi modules when you have
Printer Series 77 selected.
Configuration
When configuring printer type 77 using the Configuration module, highlight Series 77 in
the Printer/port connection group box and select the Options button. Legi displays the
following dialog box.
Printer Options Dialog Box - Configuration Module
Use this dialog box to indicate whether you are using the following options on your printer:
Cutter installed
Select this check box if the printer you are using has a cutter
installed.
Status checking off
Select this check box to turn status checking off. If this check box is
not selected, Legi will check the printer status before attempting to
send any print jobs to the printer. For example, if a hardware printer
buffer is used, check this box.
Module designator
Type the code for the module designator.
Module size in bytes Type the size of the module in bytes.
To save the options selected, click OK. To eliminate the changes entered, click Cancel.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
D-46
Printer Specific Functions
Print Labels
When creating print jobs using the Print Labels module, set the options for printer type 77
by selecting the Printer Options button. Legi displays the following dialog box.
Print Options Dialog Box - Print Labels Module
Use this dialog box to indicate whether you are using the following options on your printer:
Computer repetition If this check box is selected and you are printing more than one
copy, the computer will send the label information for each copy. If
this check box is not selected, the printer will repeat the information
it already received for each label.
The default is printer repetition because the printing is faster.
However, if the label being printed has queried fields, fields that
reference a serialized field, or a barcode serial number field, you
must use computer repetition in order to print the labels correctly.
Cut count
Enter the number of labels after which the printer will cut. For
example, if this field displays 5, the printer will cut the labels after
every five labels are printed.
To save the options selected, click OK. To eliminate the changes entered, click Cancel.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
D-47
Printer Specific Functions
Label Design
When creating label formats using the Label Design module, set the options for printer
type 77 by selecting the Printer Options button from the Label Settings dialog box. Legi
displays the following dialog box.
Print Options Dialog Box - Label Design
Use this dialog box to indicate whether you are using the following options on your printer:
Printer speed (inches/second) To increase the speed of the printer, click the down arrow
or press the (£) or (¥) arrow keys to scroll through the
increases available for the current printer. The faster the
speed selected, the more the print quality decreases.
Cutter delay
Enter the amount of time to wait before cutting a label that
has just printed. Time is represented in units of 24 µsecs;
i.e., entering 1 would set a 24 µsec delay, 2 a 48 µsec
delay, etc.
Contrast
Indicate the level of contrast between the black and white
areas of the label. This number sets how heavy the ink
will be, with choices ranging from 1 (the lightest) to 20
(the heaviest).
Tear off
Set the number of inches used to align the label stock with
the tear off bar.
Backfeed
Set the adjustment in inches used to move the label stock
back underneath the print head after the label stock has
been fed out to tear it off.
Label stock continuous
Select this check box if you are using continuous feed
label stock.
Label sensor reflective
If the label stock you are using has "black strip" media
sensing for end of label detection, select this check box.
This setting tells the printer to sense the end of the label
with a transmissive sensor or a reflective sensor.
Independent ribbon control
Select this check box if you want to use the ribbon saving
feature.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
D-48
Printer Specific Functions
To save the options selected, click OK. To eliminate the changes entered, click Cancel.
Graphics Print and View
The options for Graphics Print and View can be selected from two areas:
From
the Print menu, select Printer options. Legi displays the same window as the
Configuration option, noted above.
From
the Configuration dialog box, select the Options button. Legi displays the same
window as the Label Design option, noted above.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
D-49
Printer Specific Functions
Printer 81/88 Options
This section lists the dialog boxes that appear in four different Legi modules when you have
Printer 81 or Printer 88 selected. All references in the following text will be to Printer 81.
Configuration
When configuring printer type 81 using the Configuration module, highlight Series 81 in
the Printer/port connection group box and select the Options button. Legi displays the
following dialog box.
Printer Options Dialog Box - Configuration Module
Use this dialog box to indicate whether you are using the following options on your printer:
Cutter installed
Select this check box if the printer you are using has a cutter
installed. Cutters are usually used for label stock that is not pre-cut.
Status checking off
Select this check box to turn status checking off. If this check box is
not selected, Legi will check the printer status before attempting to
send any print jobs to the printer. For example, if a hardware printer
buffer is used, check this box.
To save the options selected, click OK. To eliminate the changes entered, click Cancel.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
D-50
Printer Specific Functions
Print Labels
When creating print jobs using the Print Labels module, set the options for printer type 81
by selecting the Printer Options button. Legi displays the following dialog box.
Print Options Dialog Box - Print Labels Module
Use this dialog box to indicate whether you are using the following options on your printer:
Computer repetition If this check box is selected and you are printing more than one
copy, the computer will send the label information for each copy. If
this check box is not selected, the printer will repeat the information
it already received for each label.
The default is printer repetition because the printing is faster.
However, if the label being printed has queried fields, fields that
reference a serialized field, or a barcode serial number field, you
must use computer repetition in order to print the labels correctly.
Cut during print
If the selected printer has a cutter installed, select to use this option
during the label printing. If the selected printer does not have a
cutter installed, this option will be shaded out. To configure printers
for Legi, see Chapter 10, Configuring Legi.
Cut count
Enter the number of labels after which the printer will cut. For
example, if this field displays 5, the printer will cut the labels after
every five labels are printed.
Pause count
Select this check box to pause after the number of labels displayed in
this field are printed. For example, if this field displays 3, after three
labels are printed, the printer will pause. To continue the print job,
you must press the Pause button on the printer.
To save the options selected, click OK. To eliminate the changes entered, click Cancel.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
D-51
Printer Specific Functions
Label Design
When creating label formats using the Label Design module, set the options for printer
type 81 by selecting the Printer Options button from the Label Settings dialog box. Legi
displays the following dialog box.
Printer Options Dialog Box - Label Design Module
Use this dialog box to indicate whether you are using the following options on your printer:
Label rotation
Select the level to rotate the design when it prints. To display
the label rotations available for the current printer, click on the
down arrow or press the (£) or (¥). For example, selecting 180
degrees would cause the label to print upside down.
Printer speed increase
To increase the speed of the printer, click the down arrow or
press the (£) or (¥) key to scroll through the increases available
for the current printer. The faster the speed selected, the more
the print quality decreases.
To save the options selected, click OK. To eliminate the changes entered, click Cancel.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
D-52
Printer Specific Functions
Graphics Print and View
The options for Graphics Print and View can be selected from two areas:
From
the Print menu, select Printer options. Legi displays the same window as the
Configuration option, noted above.
From
the Configuration dialog box, select the Options button. Legi displays the same
window as the Label Design option, noted above.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
D-53
Printer Specific Functions
Printer 82 Options
This section lists the dialog boxes that appear in four different Legi modules when you have
Printer 82 selected.
Configuration
When configuring printer type 82 using the Configuration module, highlight Series 82 in
the Printer/port connection group box and select the Options button. Legi displays the
following dialog box.
Printer Options Dialog Box - Configuration Module
Use this dialog box to indicate whether you are using the following option on your printer:
Status checking off
Select this check box to turn status checking off. If this check box is
not selected, Legi will check the printer status before attempting to
send any print jobs to the printer. For example, if a hardware printer
buffer is used, check this box.
To save the options selected, click OK. To eliminate the changes entered, click Cancel.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
D-54
Printer Specific Functions
Print Labels
When creating print jobs using the Print Labels module, set the options for printer type 82
by selecting the Printer Options button. Legi displays the following dialog box.
Print Options Dialog Box - Print Labels Module
Use this dialog box to indicate whether you are using the following options on your printer:
Computer repetition If this check box is selected and you are printing more than one
copy, the computer will send the label information for each copy. If
this check box is not selected, the printer will repeat the information
it already received for each label.
The default is printer repetition because the printing is faster.
However, if the label being printed has queried fields, fields that
reference a serialized field, or a barcode serial number field, you
must use computer repetition in order to print the labels correctly.
Pause count
Select this check box to pause after the number of labels displayed in
this field are printed. For example, if this field displays 3, after three
labels are printed, the printer will pause. To continue the print job,
you must press the Pause button on the printer.
To save the options selected, click OK. To eliminate the changes entered, click Cancel.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
D-55
Printer Specific Functions
Label Design
When creating label formats using the Label Design module, set the options for printer
type 82 by selecting the Printer Options button from the Label Settings dialog box. Legi
displays the following dialog box.
Printer Options Dialog Box - Label Design Module
Use this dialog box to indicate whether you are using the following options on your printer:
Label rotation
Select the level to rotate the design when it prints. To display
the label rotations available for the current printer, click on the
down arrow or press the (£) or (¥). For example, selecting 180
degrees would cause the label to print upside down.
Printer speed increase
To increase the speed of the printer, click the down arrow or
press the (£) or (¥) key to scroll through the increases available
for the current printer. The faster the speed selected, the more
the print quality decreases.
To save the options selected, click OK. To eliminate the changes entered, click Cancel.
Graphics Print and View
The options for Graphics Print and View can be selected from two areas:
From
the Print menu, select Printer options. Legi displays the same window as the
Configuration option, noted above.
From
the Configuration dialog box, select the Options button. Legi displays the same
window as the Label Design option, noted above.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
D-56
Printer Specific Functions
Printer 83/89 Options
This section lists the dialog boxes that appear in four different Legi modules when you have
Printer 83 or 89 selected.
Configuration
When configuring printer type 83 or 89 using the Configuration module, highlight Series
83 or 89 in the Printer/port connection group box and select the Options button. Legi
displays the following dialog box.
Printer Options Dialog Box - Configuration Module
Use this dialog box to indicate whether you are using the following options on your printer:
Status checking off
Select this check box to turn status checking off. If this check box is
not selected, Legi will check the printer status before attempting to
send any print jobs to the printer. For example, if a hardware printer
buffer is used, check this box.
To save the options selected, click OK. To eliminate the changes entered, click Cancel.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
D-57
Printer Specific Functions
Print Labels
When creating print jobs using the Print Labels module, set the options for printer type 83
or 89 by selecting the Printer Options button. Legi displays the following dialog box.
Print Options dialog box - Print Labels Module
Use this dialog box to indicate whether you are using the following options on your printer:
Computer repetition If this check box is selected and you are printing more than one
copy, the computer will send the label information for each copy. If
this check box is not selected, the printer will repeat the information
it already received for each label.
The default is printer repetition because the printing is faster.
However, if the label being printed has queried fields or fields that
reference a serialized field, you must use computer repetition in
order to print the labels correctly.
Pause count
Select this check box to pause after the number of labels displayed in
this field are printed. For example, if this field displays 3, after three
labels are printed, the printer will pause. To continue the print job,
you must press the Pause button on the printer.
To save the options selected, click OK. To eliminate the changes entered, click Cancel.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
D-58
Printer Specific Functions
Label Design
When creating label formats using the Label Design module, set the options for printer
type 83 or 89 by selecting the Printer Options button from the Label Settings dialog box.
Legi displays the following dialog box.
Print Options Dialog Box - Label Design Module
Use this dialog box to indicate whether you are using the following options on your printer:
Label rotation
Select the level to rotate the design when it prints. To
display the label rotations available for the current printer,
click on the down arrow or press the (£) or (¥). For
example, selecting 180 degrees would cause the label to
print upside down.
Printer speed (inches/second) To increase the speed of the printer, click the down arrow
or press the (£) or (¥) key to scroll through the increases
available. The faster the speed selected, the more the print
quality decreases.
Label top
Enter the position in printer dots where the top of the label
format will begin printing. You can enter from -64 to +64
printer dots.
Media darkness
Indicate the level of contrast between the black and white
areas of the label. This number sets how heavy the print
will be, with choices ranging from -30 (the lightest) to 30
(the darkest).
Media tracking
Select the appropriate option button to indicate whether the
label stock you are using is continuous or non-continuous.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
D-59
Printer Specific Functions
Print mode
Select one of the following options to indicate the print
mode:
Tear off
Select this option button if the labels
will print and be torn off manually.
Peel off
Select this option if the printer will
separate the backing from the label.
This setting requires that your printer
have the backing only rewind assembly
installed.
External rewind Select this option to have the label stock
wound onto the external rewind spool.
You can only select this option if your
printer is equipped with the optional
external rewind assembly.
To save the options selected, click OK. To eliminate the changes entered, click Cancel.
Graphics Print and View
The options for Graphics Print and View can be selected from two areas:
From
the Print menu, select Printer options. Legi displays the same window as the
Configuration option, noted above.
From
the Configuration dialog box, select the Options button. Legi displays the same
window as the Label Design option, noted above.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
D-60
Printer Specific Functions
Printer 86 Options
This section lists the dialog boxes that appear in four different Legi modules when you have
Printer 86 selected.
Configuration
When configuring printer type 86 using the Configuration module, highlight Series 86 in
the Printer/port connection group box and select the Options button. Legi displays the
following dialog box.
Printer Options Dialog Box - Configuration Module
Use this dialog box to indicate whether you are using the following options on your printer:
Cutter installed
Select this check box if the printer you are using has a cutter
installed. Cutters are usually used for label stock that is not pre-cut.
Status checking off
Select this check box to turn status checking off. If this check box is
not selected, Legi will check the printer status before attempting to
send any print jobs to the printer. For example, if a hardware printer
buffer is used, check this box.
To save the options selected, click OK. To eliminate the changes entered, click Cancel.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
D-61
Printer Specific Functions
Print Labels
When creating print jobs using the Print Labels module, set the options for printer type 86
by selecting the Printer Options button. Legi displays the following dialog box.
Print Options Dialog Box - Print Labels Module
Use this dialog box to indicate whether you are using the following options on your printer:
Computer repetition If this check box is selected and you are printing more than one
copy, the computer will send the label information for each copy. If
this check box is not selected, the printer will repeat the information
it already received for each label.
The default is printer repetition because the printing is faster.
However, if the label being printed has queried fields, fields that
reference a serialized field, or a barcode serial number field, you
must use computer repetition in order to print the labels correctly.
Cut during print
If the selected printer has a cutter installed, select to use this option
during the label printing. If the selected printer does not have a
cutter installed, this option will be shaded out. To configure printers
for Legi, see Chapter 10, Configuring Legi.
Cut count
Enter the number of labels after which the printer will cut. For
example, if this field displays 5, the printer will cut the labels after
every five labels are printed.
Pause count
Select this check box to pause after the number of labels displayed in
this field are printed. For example, if this field displays 3, after three
labels are printed, the printer will pause. To continue the print job,
you must press the Pause button on the printer.
To save the options selected, click OK. To eliminate the changes entered, click Cancel.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
D-62
Printer Specific Functions
Label Design
When creating label formats using the Label Design module, set the options for printer
type 86 by selecting the Printer Options button from the Label Settings dialog box. Legi
displays the following dialog box.
Printer Options Dialog Box - Label Design Module
Use this dialog box to indicate whether you are using the following options on your printer:
Label rotation
Select the level to rotate the design when it prints. To display
the label rotations available for the current printer, click on the
down arrow or press the (£) or (¥). For example, selecting 180
degrees would cause the label to print upside down.
Printer speed increase
To increase the speed of the printer, click the down arrow or
press the (£) or (¥) key to scroll through the increases available
for the current printer. The faster the speed selected, the more
the print quality decreases.
To save the options selected, click OK. To eliminate the changes entered, click Cancel.
Graphics Print and View
The options for Graphics Print and View can be selected from two areas:
From
the Print menu, select Printer options. Legi displays the same window as the
Configuration option, noted above.
From
the Configuration dialog box, select the Options button. Legi displays the same
window as the Label Design option, noted above.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
D-63
Printer Specific Functions
Printer 87 Options
This section lists the dialog boxes that appear in four different Legi modules when you have
Printer 87 selected.
Configuration
When configuring printer type 87 using the Configuration module, highlight Series 87 in
the Printer/port connection group box and select the Options button. Legi displays the
following dialog box.
Printer Options Dialog Box - Configuration Module
Use this dialog box to indicate whether you are using the following options on your printer:
Cutter installed
Select this check box if the printer you are using has a cutter
installed. Cutters are usually used for label stock that is not pre-cut.
Status checking off
Select this check box to turn status checking off. If this check box is
not selected, Legi will check the printer status before attempting to
send any print jobs to the printer. For example, if a hardware printer
buffer is used, check this box.
To save the options selected, click OK. To eliminate the changes entered, click Cancel.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
D-64
Printer Specific Functions
Print Labels
When creating print jobs using the Print Labels module, set the options for printer type 87
by selecting the Printer Options button. Legi displays the following dialog box.
Print Options Dialog Box - Print Labels Module
Use this dialog box to indicate whether you are using the following options on your printer:
Computer repetition If this check box is selected and you are printing more than one
copy, the computer will send the label information for each copy. If
this check box is not selected, the printer will repeat the information
it already received for each label.
The default is printer repetition because the printing is faster.
However, if the label being printed has queried fields, fields that
reference a serialized field, or a barcode serial number field, you
must use computer repetition in order to print the labels correctly.
Cut during print
If the selected printer has a cutter installed, select to use this option
during the label printing. If the selected printer does not have a
cutter installed, this option will be shaded out. To configure printers
for Legi, see Chapter 10, Configuring Legi.
Cut count
Enter the number of labels after which the printer will cut. For
example, if this field displays 5, the printer will cut the labels after
every five labels are printed.
Pause count
Select this check box to pause after the number of labels displayed in
this field are printed. For example, if this field displays 3, after three
labels are printed, the printer will pause. To continue the print job,
you must press the Pause button on the printer.
To save the options selected, click OK. To eliminate the changes entered, click Cancel.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
D-65
Printer Specific Functions
Label Design
When creating label formats using the Label Design module, set the options for printer
type 87 by selecting the Printer Options button from the Label Settings dialog box. Legi
displays the following dialog box.
Printer Options Dialog Box - Label Design Module
Use this dialog box to indicate whether you are using the following options on your printer:
Label rotation
Select the level to rotate the design when it prints. To display
the label rotations available for the current printer, click on the
down arrow or press the (£) or (¥). For example, selecting 180
degrees would cause the label to print upside down.
Printer speed increase
To increase the speed of the printer, click the down arrow or
press the (£) or (¥) key to scroll through the increases available
for the current printer. The faster the speed selected, the more
the print quality decreases.
Label top
Enter the position in printer dots where the top of the label
format will begin printing. You can enter from -64 to +64
printer dots.
To save the options selected, click OK. To eliminate the changes entered, click Cancel.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
D-66
Printer Specific Functions
Graphics Print and View
The options for Graphics Print and View can be selected from two areas:
From
the Print menu, select Printer options. Legi displays the same window as the
Configuration option, noted above.
From
the Configuration dialog box, select the Options button. Legi displays the same
window as the Label Design option, noted above.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
D-67
Printer Specific Functions
Printer 91 Options
This section lists the dialog boxes that appear in four different Legi modules when you have
Printer 91 selected.
Configuration
When configuring printer type 91 using the Configuration module, highlight Series 91 in
the Printer/port connection group box and select the Options button. Legi displays the
following dialog box.
Printer Options Dialog Box - Configuration Module
Use this dialog box to indicate whether you are using the following options on your printer:
Cutter installed
Select this check box if the printer you are using has a cutter
installed. Cutters are usually used for label stock that is not pre-cut.
Status checking off
Select this check box to turn status checking off. If this check box is
not selected, Legi will check the printer status before attempting to
send any print jobs to the printer. For example, if a hardware printer
buffer is used, check this box.
To save the options selected, click OK. To eliminate the changes entered, click Cancel.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
D-68
Printer Specific Functions
Print Labels
When creating print jobs using the Print Labels module, set the options for printer type 91
by selecting the Printer Options button. Legi displays the following dialog box.
Print Options Dialog Box - Print Labels Module
Use this dialog box to indicate whether you are using the following options on your printer:
Computer repetition If this check box is selected and you are printing more than one
copy, the computer will send the label information for each copy. If
this check box is not selected, the printer will repeat the information
it already received for each label.
The default is printer repetition because the printing is faster.
However, if the label being printed has queried fields, fields that
reference a serialized field, or a barcode serial number field, you
must use computer repetition in order to print the labels correctly.
Cut during print
If the selected printer has a cutter installed, select to use this option
during the label printing. If the selected printer does not have a
cutter installed, this option will be shaded out. To configure printers
for Legi, see Chapter 10, Configuring Legi.
Cut count
Enter the number of labels after which the printer will cut. For
example, if this field displays 5, the printer will cut the labels after
every five labels are printed.
Pause count
Select this check box to pause after the number of labels displayed in
this field are printed. For example, if this field displays 3, after three
labels are printed, the printer will pause. To continue the print job,
you must press the Pause button on the printer.
To save the options selected, click OK. To eliminate the changes entered, click Cancel.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
D-69
Printer Specific Functions
Label Design
When creating label formats using the Label Design module, set the options for printer
type 91 by selecting the Printer Options button from the Label Settings dialog box. Legi
displays the following dialog box.
Printer Options Dialog Box - Label Design Module
Use this dialog box to indicate whether you are using the following options on your printer:
Label rotation
Select the level to rotate the design when it prints. To display
the label rotations available for the current printer, click on the
down arrow or press the (£) or (¥). For example, selecting 180
degrees would cause the label to print upside down.
Printer speed increase
To increase the speed of the printer, click the down arrow or
press the (£) or (¥) key to scroll through the increases available
for the current printer. The faster the speed selected, the more
the print quality decreases.
To save the options selected, click OK. To eliminate the changes entered, click Cancel.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
D-70
Printer Specific Functions
Graphics Print and View
The options for Graphics Print and View can be selected from two areas:
From
the Print menu, select Printer options. Legi displays the same window as the
Configuration option, noted above.
From
the Configuration dialog box, select the Options button. Legi displays the same
window as the Label Design option, noted above.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
D-71
Printer Specific Functions
Series 93 Options
This section lists the dialog boxes that appear in four different Legi modules when you have
Printer 93 selected.
Configuration
When configuring printer type 93 using the Configuration module, highlight Series 93 in
the Printer/port connection group box and select the Options button. Legi displays the
following dialog box.
Printer Options Dialog Box - Configuration Module
Use this dialog box to indicate whether you are using the following options on your printer:
Cutter installed
Select this check box if the printer you are using has a cutter
installed.
Status checking off
Select this check box to turn status checking off. If this check box is
not selected, Legi will check the printer status before attempting to
send any print jobs to the printer. For example, if a hardware printer
buffer is used, check this box.
To save the options selected, click OK. To eliminate the changes entered, click Cancel.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
D-72
Printer Specific Functions
Print Labels
When creating print jobs using the Print Labels module, set the options for printer type 93
by selecting the Printer Options button. Legi displays the following dialog box.
Print Options Dialog Box - Print Labels Module
Use this dialog box to indicate whether you are using the following options on your printer:
Computer repetition If this check box is selected and you are printing more than one
copy, the computer will send the label information for each copy. If
this check box is not selected, the printer will repeat the information
it already received for each label. The default is printer repetition
because the printing is faster. However, if the label being printed has
queried fields or fields that reference a serialized field, you must use
computer repetition in order to print the labels correctly.
Cut during print
If you installed a cutter and you want to activate it for this print job,
check this box.
Cut count
If you have the cut during print box checked, enter the number of
labels after which the printer will cut. For example, if this field
displays 5, the printer will cut after every five labels are printed.
Pause count
Enter the number of labels after which the printer will pause. For
example, if this field displays 5, the printer will pause after every
five labels are printed.
To save the options selected, click OK. To eliminate the changes entered, click Cancel.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
D-73
Printer Specific Functions
Label Design
When creating formats using the Label Design module, set the options for printer type 93
by selecting the Printer Options button from the Label Settings dialog box. Legi displays
the following dialog box.
Print Options Dialog Box - Label Design
Use this dialog box to adjust the following options on your printer:
Label rotation
Select the level to rotate the design when it prints. To display the
label rotations available for the current printer, click on the down
arrow or press the (£) or (¥) arrow keys . For example, selecting
180 degrees would cause the label to print upside down.
Printer speed increase
To increase the speed of the printer, click the down arrow or press
the (£) or (¥) arrow keys to scroll through the increases available
for the current printer. The faster the speed selected, the more the
print quality decreases.
Label top
Enter the position in printer dots where the top of the label format
will begin printing. You can enter from -64 to +64 printer dots.
Media darkness
Indicate level of contrast between the black and white areas of the
label. This number sets how heavy the print will be, with choices
ranging from -30 (the lightest) to 30 (the darkest).
Print mode
Select one of the following options to indicate the print mode.
Tear off
Select this option button if the labels will print and be torn off
manually.
Peel off
Select this option if the printer will separate the backing from the
label. This setting requires that your printer have the backing
only rewind assembly installed.
External rewind
Select this option to have the label stock wound onto the external
rewind spool. You can only use this option if your printer is
equipped with the optional external rewind assembly.
Cutter
Select this option to have the printer print in cut mode.
To save the options selected, click OK. To eliminate the changes entered, click Cancel.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
D-74
Printer Specific Functions
Graphics Print and View
The options for Graphics Print and View can be selected from two areas:
From
the Print menu, select Printer options. Legi displays the same window as the
Configuration option, noted above.
From
the Configuration dialog box, select the Options button. Legi displays the same
window as the Label Design option, noted above.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
D-75
Printer Specific Functions
Printer 94 Options
This section lists the dialog boxes that appear in four different Legi modules when you have
Printer 94 selected.
Configuration
When configuring printer type 94 using the Configuration module, highlight Series 94 in
the Printer/port connection group box and select the Options button. Legi displays the
following dialog box.
Printer Options Dialog Box - Configuration Module
Use this dialog box to indicate whether you are using the following options on your printer:
Status checking off
Select this check box to turn status checking off. If this check box is
not selected, Legi will check the printer status before attempting to
send any print jobs to the printer. For example, if a hardware printer
buffer is used, check this box.
Cutter installed
Select this check box if the printer you are using has a cutter
installed.
To save the options selected, click OK. To eliminate the changes entered, click Cancel.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
D-76
Printer Specific Functions
Print Labels
When creating print jobs using the Print Labels module, set the options for printer type 94
by selecting the Printer Options button. Legi displays the following dialog box.
Print Options dialog box - Print Labels Module
Use this dialog box to indicate whether you are using the following options on your printer:
Computer repetition If this check box is selected and you are printing more than one
copy, the computer will send the label information for each copy. If
this check box is not selected, the printer will repeat the information
it already received for each label.
The default is printer repetition because the printing is faster.
However, if the label being printed has queried fields, fields that
reference a serialized field, or a barcode serial number field, you
must use computer repetition in order to print the labels correctly.
Cut during print
If the selected printer has a cutter installed, select to use this option
during the label printing. If the selected printer does not have a
cutter installed, this option will be shaded out. To configure printers
for Legi, see Chapter 10, Configuring Legi.
Cut count
Enter the number of labels after which the printer will cut. For
example, if this field displays 5, the printer will cut the labels after
every five labels are printed.
Pause count
Select this check box to pause after the number of labels displayed in
this field are printed. For example, if this field displays 3, after three
labels are printed, the printer will pause. To continue the print job,
you must press the Pause button on the printer.
To save the options selected, click OK. To eliminate the changes entered, click Cancel.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
D-77
Printer Specific Functions
Label Design
When creating label formats using the Label Design module, set the options for printer
type 94 by selecting the Printer Options button from the Label Settings dialog box. Legi
displays the following dialog box.
Print Options Dialog Box - Label Design Module
Use this dialog box to indicate whether you are using the following options on your printer:
Label rotation
Select the level to rotate the design when it prints. To
display the label rotations available for the current printer,
click on the down arrow or press the (£) or (¥). For
example, selecting 180 degrees would cause the label to
print upside down.
Printer speed (inches/second) To increase the speed of the printer, click the down arrow
or press the (£) or (¥) key to scroll through the increases
available. The faster the speed selected, the more the print
quality decreases.
Label top adjustment
Enter the position in printer dots where the top of the label
format will begin printing. You can enter from -64 to +64
printer dots.
Media darkness
Indicate the level of contrast between the black and white
areas of the label. This number sets how heavy the print
will be, with choices ranging from -30 (the lightest) to 30
(the darkest).
Media tracking
Select the appropriate option button to indicate whether the
label stock you are using is continuous or non-continuous.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
D-78
Printer Specific Functions
Print mode
Select one of the following options to indicate the print
mode:
Tear off
Select this option button if the labels
will print and be torn off manually.
Peel off
Select this option if the printer will
separate the backing from the label.
This setting requires that your printer
have the backing only rewind assembly
installed.
External rewind Select this option to have the label stock
wound onto the external rewind spool.
You can only select this option if your
printer is equipped with the optional
external rewind assembly.
Cutter
Select this option if the printer you are
using has a cutter installed and will cut
between labels.
To save the options selected, click OK. To eliminate the changes entered, click Cancel.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
D-79
Printer Specific Functions
Graphics Print and View
The options for Graphics Print and View can be selected from two areas:
From
the Print menu, select Printer options. Legi displays the same window as the
Configuration option, noted above.
From
the Configuration dialog box, select the Options button. Legi displays the same
window as the Label Design option, noted above.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
D-80
Printer Specific Functions
Series 96 Options
This section lists the dialog boxes that appear in four different Legi modules when you have
Printer 96 selected.
Configuration
When configuring printer type 96 using the Configuration module, highlight Series 96 in
the Printer/port connection group box and select the Options button. Legi displays the
following dialog box.
Printer Options Dialog Box - Configuration Module
Use this dialog box to indicate whether you are using the following options on your printer:
Cutter installed
Select this check box if the printer you are using has a cutter
installed.
Status checking off
Select this check box to turn status checking off. If this check box is
not selected, Legi will check the printer status before attempting to
send any print jobs to the printer. For example, if a hardware printer
buffer is used, check this box.
To save the options selected, click OK. To eliminate the changes entered, click Cancel.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
D-81
Printer Specific Functions
Print Labels
When creating print jobs using the Print Labels module, set the options for printer type 96
by selecting the Printer Options button. Legi displays the following dialog box.
Print Options Dialog Box - Print Labels Module
Use this dialog box to indicate whether you are using the following options on your printer:
Computer repetition If this check box is selected and you are printing more than one
copy, the computer will send the label information for each copy. If
this check box is not selected, the printer will repeat the information
it already received for each label.
The default is printer repetition because the printing is faster.
However, if the label being printed has queried fields, fields that
reference a serialized field, or a barcode serial number field, you
must use computer repetition in order to print the labels correctly.
Cut during print
If the selected printer has a cutter installed, select to use this option
during the label printing. If the selected printer does not have a
cutter installed, this option will be shaded out. To configure printers
for Legi, see Chapter 10, Configuring Legi.
Cut count
Enter the number of labels after which the printer will cut. For
example, if this field displays 5, the printer will cut the labels after
every five labels are printed.
Pause count
Select this check box to pause after the number of labels displayed in
this field are printed. For example, if this field displays 3, after three
labels are printed, the printer will pause. To continue the print job,
you must press the Pause button on the printer.
To save the options selected, click OK. To eliminate the changes entered, click Cancel.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
D-82
Printer Specific Functions
Label Design
When creating label formats using the Label Design module, set the options for printer
type 96 by selecting the Printer Options button from the Label Settings dialog box. Legi
displays the following dialog box.
Print Options Dialog Box - Label Design
Use this dialog box to indicate whether you are using the following options on your printer:
Label rotation
Select the amount to rotate the label when it prints. To
display the label rotations available for the current printer,
click on the down arrow or press the (£) or (¥). For
example, selecting 180 degrees would cause the label to
print upside down.
Printer speed (inches/second) To increase the speed of the printer, click the down arrow
or press the (£) or (¥) arrow keys to scroll through the
increases available for the current printer. The faster the
speed selected, the more the print quality decreases.
Label top adjustment
Enter the position in printer dots where the top of the label
format will begin printing. You can enter from -64 to +64
printer dots.
Tear off adjustment
Indicate how far out from the print head the label feeds
after printing.
Darkness
This number indicates how dark the label will print. A
higher number means the label will print darker.
To save the options selected, click OK. To eliminate the changes entered, click Cancel.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
D-83
Printer Specific Functions
Graphics Print and View
The options for Graphics Print and View can be selected from two areas:

From the Print menu, select Printer options. Legi displays the same window as the
Configuration option, noted above.

From the Configuration dialog box, select the Options button. Legi displays the
same window as the Label Design option, noted above.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
D-84
International Character Support
E
14International
Character Support
Legi for Windows supports international character sets through the use of
code pages. What you see in different parts of Legi depends on what
code page you have installed. If you want to use international characters
in Legi (characters above 127 decimal), you must use code page 850 in your Windows setup. This
matches the code page that most Legi printers use. Note that the default code page for the USA
version of Windows is code page 437. To view a list of the characters, refer to your DOS
reference manual.
Overview
Before changing code pages in Windows, code page 850 must be specified for DOS.
To set code pages in DOS:
1.
Open the CONFIG.SYS file for editing.
2.
Add the line country=001,850,c:\dos\country.sys
where c:\dos\ is the path of your DOS system files.
To set code pages in Windows:
1.
Change to the directory where Windows is installed.
2.
Type SETUP.
3.
Highlight the code page selection and press (§Enter).
4.
Select the desired code page (850) and follow the instructions to save and exit.
5.
Be sure to save your changes.
Weber Marking Systems
E-1
International Character Support
To enter international characters:
1.
Hold down (Alt) and enter the three-digit decimal character value on the numeric keypad.
2.
Release (Alt).
The international character will appear in the edit box. The character value you enter is the
code page 850 value. If you are in Database Maintenance, be sure NumLock is active
before entering the key sequence.
Following are examples of the characters:
ALT-129 •
ALT-157 •
ALT-181 µ
ALT-189 ½
ALT-225 á
Additional Notes
If you do not wish to install code page 850 in Windows, there is still some support for
international fonts using code page 437. Because of its limitations this method is not
recommended.
Enter the key sequence as described above, but add a 0 before the 3-digit number. The
character will not display correctly in the edit box, but will in Label Design WYSIWYG.
Note that Database Maintenance does not support this alternate method.
Following are examples of the characters:
ALT-0129
•
ALT-0157
•
ALT-0181
µ
ALT-0189
½
ALT-0225
á
Weber Marking Systems
E-2
Application designer
F
15Application
Designer
Legi for Windows supports an alternate method for printing and
manipulating labels called Application Designer. Application Designer
allows you to use Legi for Windows in a non-interactive mode, that is,
without requiring your input each step of the way. This method provides a way to streamline
printing operations; it also simplifies the printing process once the batch file is created.
Application Designer allows data to be placed in an ASCII file either by hand or by another
program and then used to print or manipulate labels.
Overview
Using Application Designer
Application designer requires an input file called a batch file. The batch file is an ASCII file that
contains the commands to tell Legi for Windows certain parameters about the print job. The label
name, port to print to, and identical and serial counts are just a few of the commands that can be
specified in this file.
Instead of running LEGIMAIN.EXE, you will run the file LEGIBCH.EXE. The batch filename is
passed on the command line:
LEGIBCH filename
where filename is the name and full path of the ASCII file that contains the application designer
commands.
NOTE: If you pass a label format or print job as the filename parameter, this format or job will be
printed. This is useful when printing labels where the data or number of labels to print does not
change, or when the data comes from database tables and label expressions.
A Program Manager icon can be setup to run the batch file.
You can run Application Designer in Legi for Windows in two ways:
1.
Instead of running LEGIMAIN.EXE, you can run the file LEGIBCH.EXE. The batch
filename is passed on the command line:
LEGIBCH filename
where filename is the name and full path of the ASCII file that contains the application
designer commands.
2.
The batch filename can be set under Configuration, in the Options dialog box of Legi for
Windows. If the name is set and the checkbox selected, the Print Label button will be
redefined to run the Application Designer batch file.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
F-1
Application designer
Application Designer Syntax
Lines beginning with a “:” are goto labels.
The name of a variable must start with $. Anywhere a value can be used a variable can be
used in place of it.
The value can be a numeric or string value. A string value should be surrounded by quotes
if there is whitespace in it.
$ERRORCODE and $DLGITEMID are predefined variables which will be updated by
commands.
Performance Notes
Running Application Designer from another application such as a Visual Basic program
can be very disk intensive. To improve performance make sure the hard disk drive is
cached. Smart Drive is a hard disk drive cache program which is included with Windows.
Set your cache size to at least 1024KB.
The Application Designer application designer program remains in memory even after the
batch has been processed. This allows for much faster processing of additional batches.
Legi for Windows can be run while Application Designer is running. To close Application
Designer, click on the Legi Batch icon and choose Close.
To automatically close Application Designer in batch processing applications, place the
line “LEGIBCH BATCH.END” at the end of the file. This command removes Application
Designer from memory.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
F-2
Application designer
Application Designer Syntax
The following rules apply when creating a application designer file:

One command per line.

White space (space and tabs) is ignored except in field and expression data

Blank lines are ignored.

Lines beginning with a "*" (asterisk) are ignored.

Keywords MUST be uppercase.

Field data is referenced by field name.

Non-operator fields can accept any data expression.

Non-operator constant data for fields should be surrounded by quotes.

The full path, filename and extension MUST be supplied for all files.

Field names that are referenced cannot be keywords.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
F-3
Application designer
Application Designer Commands
FORMAT
Value:
Default:
Notes
Select a label format to print with
=drive:path\filename.LBL
=none
If drive and path are not supplied the value set in SETDIRECTORY is used.
JOB
Value:
Default:
Notes
Select a print job to print with
=drive:path\filename.JOB
=none
If drive and path are not supplied the value set in SETDIRECTORY is used.
PORT
Value:
Default:
Notes:
Specify a communication port
=COM(n) where n is 1 - 9 or LPT(n) where n is 1 - 3, or FILE
=COM1
ALTERNATE-AUTO-COUNTS
Specify method of computing alternate automatic and identical
label counts for a queried print job
=YES or NO
=none
If YES, as the field that specifies automatic or identical label
counts is reevaluated during a label run, the identical and serial
counts are also reevaluated. If NO, even though the field that
specifies automatic or identical counts changes across several
different records of a queried run, the automatic identical and
automatic serial counts do not change.
Value:
Default:
Notes:
SUPPLIED-PORT
Value:
Default:
Notes:
FLD-OP-REMOTE-ID1
Value:
Default:
Notes:
FLD-OP-REMOTE-ID2
Value:
Default:
Notes:
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
Specify remote group 1 as communication port to receive serial
supplied data
=COM(n) where n is 1 - 9
=none
same as FLD-OP-REMOTE-ID1
Specify remote group 1 as communication port to receive serial
supplied data
=COM(n) where n is 1 - 9
=none
same as SUPPLIED-PORT
Specify remote group 2 as communication port to receive serial
supplied data
=COM(n) where n is 1 - 9
=none
F-4
Application designer
FLD-OP-REMOTE-ID3
Value:
Default:
Notes:
FLD-OP-REMOTE-ID4
Value:
Default:
Notes:
Specify remote group 3 as communication port to receive serial
supplied data
=COM(n) where n is 1 - 9
=none
Specify remote group 4 as communication port to receive serial
supplied data
=COM(n) where n is 1 - 9
=none
OUTPUT-FILE
Value:
Default:
Notes
The output file name when FILE is set for PORT
=drive:path\filename.ext
=none
If drive and path are not supplied the value set in SETDIRECTORY is used.
SERIAL-COUNT
Value:
Default:
Notes:
Number of serialized labels to print
=0-9999 (0=auto serial)
=1
IDENTICAL-COUNT
Value:
Default:
Notes:
Number of identical labels to print.
=0-9999 (0=auto identical)
=1
BEGIN
Value:
Default:
Notes:
Begin accepting field data
none
none
END
Value:
Default:
Notes:
Stop accepting field data
none
none
TEST-PRINT
Value:
Default:
Notes:
Test print the current format or job
none
none
PRINT
Value:
Default:
Notes:
Print the current format or job
none
none
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
F-5
Application designer
DELETE-BATCH
Value:
Default:
Notes:
When the batch file is totally processed delete it.
none
none
SAVE-FORMAT
Value:
Default:
Notes:
Save a label format to disk
=drive:path\filename.LBL
none
File name and extension must be included. If drive and path are
not supplied the value set in SET-DIRECTORY is used.
SAVE-JOB
Value:
Default:
Notes:
Save a label job to disk
=drive:path\filename.JOB
none
Job name and extension must be included. If drive and path are
not supplied the value set in SET-DIRECTORY is used.
ERROR-ACTION
Value:
Default:
Notes:
Specify error handling method
=ABORT - abort batch, IGNORE - ignore error and continue
=IGNORE
ERROR-LOG
Value:
Default:
Notes
Specify where to direct an error
=drive:path\filename.ext, DISPLAY - to display, or NONE
=DISPLAY
If drive and path are not supplied the value set in SETDIRECTORY is used.
AS400-KEY-QUERY-SYSTEM
Specify the system name for an AS/400 keyed query
=eight character AS/400 system name
=none
Value:
Default:
Notes:
AS400-KEY-QUERY-LIBFILEMBR Specify the file, library,
Value:
Default:
Notes:
and member for an AS/400 keyed query
=library/file(member)
=none
AS400-KEY-QUERY-START-KEY-VALUES Specify the
Value:
Default:
Notes:
Example:
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
start key for an AS/400 query
=key number,key value
=none
All numeric keys must be signed
To specify 100 for the primary start key AS400-KEY-QUERYSTART-KEY-VALUES=1,+100
F-6
Application designer
AS400-KEY-QUERY-END-KEY-VALUES
Value:
Default:
Notes:
Example:
Specify the end key for an AS/400 query
=key number,key value
=none
All numeric keys must be signed
To specify 100 for the primary ending key:
AS400-KEY-QUERY-END-KEY-VALUES=1,+100
AS400-QUERY-SYSTEM
Value:
Default:
Notes:
Specify the system name for an AS/400 query
=eight character AS/400 system name
=none
AS400-QUERY-LIBFILE
Value:
Default:
Notes:
Specify the file and library for an AS/400 query
=library/file
=none
AS400-QUERY-SIMPLE-SELECT
Specify whether to use simple select or string builder for an
AS/400 query
=YES or NO
=none
YES means use simple select
NO means use string builder
Value:
Default:
Notes:
AS400-QUERY-WHERE-CLAUSE
Value:
Defalut:
Notes:
Specify the 'where clause' for an AS/400 query
=the 'where clause'
=none
AS400-QUERY-KEY
Value:
Default:
Notes:
Specify the key field for an AS/400 query
=the AS/400 field name
=none
AS400-QUERY-START-VALUE
Specify the lowest value for the key field to an AS/400 query
=the field value
=none
No lower limit will be used if this statement is not used
Value:
Default:
Notes:
AS400-QUERY-END-VALUE
Value:
Default:
Notes:
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
Specify the greatest value for the key field to an AS/400 query
=the field value
=none
No upper limit will be used if this statement is not used
F-7
Application designer
ODBC-QUERY-DATA-SOURCE
Value:
Default:
Notes:
Specify the data source for an ODBC query
=the data source
=none
ODBC-QUERY-USER-NAME Specify the user name for an ODBC query
Value:
=the user name
Default:
=none
Notes:
ODBC-QUERY-PASSWORD Specify the password for an ODBC query
Value:
=the password
Default:
=none
Notes:
ODBC-QUERY-TABLE
Value:
Default:
Notes:
Specify the table for an ODBC query
=the table name
=none
ODBC-QUERY-SEARCF-FIELD
Specify the key field for the ODBC query
=the field name
=none
Value:
Default:
Notes:
ODBC-QUERY-START-VALUE
Value:
Default:
Notes:
Specify the start value for the ODBC query
=the start value of the field for the query
=none
ODBC-QUERY-END-VALUE Specify the end value for the ODBC query
Value:
=the ending value of the field for the query
Default:
=none
Notes:
ODBC-QUERY-USE-SQL-EXPRESSION
Value:
Defalut:
Notes:
ODBC-QUERY-SQL-EXPRESSION
Value:
Default:
Notes:
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
Specifies that the ODBC SQL expression will be used
for the ODBC query
=YES or NO
=none
SQL expression is not used for the query if this statement is
ommited
Specify the SQL expression for the ODBC query
=the SQL expression
=none
F-8
Application designer
QUERY-TABLE
Value:
Default:
Notes:
Database table name to query
=drive:path\filename.ext
=none
QUERY-FIELD
Value:
Default:
Notes:
Field in the database table to query
=field name
=none
Field must be spelled. Field name is case sensitive
QUERY-EXPRESSION
Value:
Default:
Notes:
The query expression
=the query expression
=none
USER-NAME
Value:
Default:
Notes:
User name for Legi Login
=User name
=none
Used to set a user name for print logs.
SET-DIRECTORY
Value:
Default:
Notes:
Set the default directory to use for when one is not supplied
=Drive:path
=none
Do not supply the trailing backslash.
CLEAR-BUFFER
Value:
Default:
Notes:
Clear current job from the printer when this job starts
=YES or NO
=none
AUTO-REPEAT
Value:
Default:
Notes:
Will automatically repeat this job in an endless loop
=YES or NO
=none
DISABLE-AUTO-PRINT
Value:
Default:
Notes:
On last supplied determines whether job will auto print
=YES or NO
=none
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
F-9
Application designer
Advanced Commands
JOB-DESCRIPTION
Value:
Default:
Notes:
The description of a print job
=Print job description
=none
PRINT-SUSPENDED
Value:
Default:
Notes:
Start a print already suspended in the Print Manager
=YES or NO
=NO
FMT-DESCRIPTION
Value:
Default:
Notes:
The description for a Label format
=Label format description
=none
FMT-STOCK
Value:
Default:
Notes:
The label format stock name
=Label format stock name
=none
FMT-PRINTLOG
Value:
Default:
Notes:
The label format print log table name
=[drive:][path\]filename[.ext]
=none
Path is optional here. If no path is supplied Legi default is used.
FMT-HEIGHT
Value:
Default:
Notes:
The height of the label format
=Height in inches
=none
Will change the vertical interval if less then height
FMT-WIDTH
Value:
Default:
Notes:
The width of the label format
=Width in inches
=none
Will change the horizontal interval if less then width
FMT-HINTERVAL
Value:
Default:
Notes:
The horizontal interval for the label format
=Horizontal interval in inches
=none
FMT-VINTERVAL
Value:
Default:
Notes:
The vertical interval for the label format
=Vertical interval in inches
=none
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
F-10
Application designer
FMT-HCOUNT
Value:
Default:
Notes:
The horizontal count for the label format
=The horizontal count
=none
FMT-ROTATION
Value:
Default:
Notes:
The rotation for the label format
=ROTATE0, ROTATE90, ROTATE180, or ROTATE270
=none
FMT-MARGIN
Value:
Default:
Notes:
The label format margin
=Margin in inches
=none
FIELD
Value:
Default:
Notes:
Select a field for processing
=Field name
=none
All commands with the FLD prefix will process the field that is
selected with this command.
FLD-NAME
Value:
Default:
Notes:
The field name
=Field name
=none
FLD-OP-PROMPT
Value:
Default:
Notes:
Operator field prompt
=The prompt for the operator field
=none
FLD-OP-DATA
Value:
Default:
Notes:
The default data for the operator data
=Default data
=none
FLD-OP-LENGTH
Value:
Default:
Notes:
The maximum length for the operator data
=Length
=none
FLD-OP-SOURCE-KEYBOARD
Allow operator data from the keyboard
Value:
=YES or NO
Default:
=none
Notes:
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
F-11
Application designer
FLD-OP-SOURCE-SERIAL
Value:
Default:
Notes:
Allow operator data from the serial port
=YES or NO
=none
FLD-OP-SOURCE-DDE
Value:
Default:
Notes:
Allow operator data from a DDE server application
=YES or NO
=none
FLD-OP-SOURCE-LOOKUP Allow operator data from a database lookup
Value:
=YES or NO
Default:
=none
Notes:
FLD-OP-TIME-PRINTLABELS
Allow operator data at print labels time
Value:
=YES or NO
Default:
=none
Notes:
FLD-OP-TIME-PRINTSTART Allow operator data at print start time
Value:
=YES or NO
Default:
=none
Notes:
FLD-OP-TIME-EACHQUERIED
Allow operator data at each queried label
Value:
=YES or NO
Default:
=none
Notes:
FLD-OP-TIME-EACHSERIAL Allow operator data at computer serialized label
Value:
=YES or NO
Default:
=none
Notes:
FLD-OP-FLAG-REQUIRED
Value:
Default:
Notes:
Operator data can not be blank for this field
=YES or NO
=none
FLD-OP-TYPE
Value:
Default:
Notes:
Type of data allowed for this field
=ALPHANUM, ALPHA, NUMERIC, CUSTOM
=none
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
F-12
Application designer
FLD-OP-FILTER
Value:
Default:
Notes:
Define the custom input filter for the current field
=custom filter string
=none
FLD-OP-LOOKUP-DESC-FIELD
The table field to use as the prompt when doing a table
lookup
Value
=Field name in the database
Default:
=none
Notes:
FLD-OP-LOOKUP-TABLE
Value:
Default:
Notes:
The database lookup table name
=[drive:][path\]filename[.ext]
=none
FLD-OP-LOOKUP-FIELD
Value:
Default:
Notes:
The database lookup table field name
=Field name in the database table
=none
FLD-OP-REMOTE1
Value:
Default:
Notes:
Specify that remote input group 1 is valid for remote input
=YES or NO
=none
FLD-OP-REMOTE2
Value:
Default:
Notes:
Specify that remote input group 2 is valid for remote input
=YES or NO
=none
FLD-OP-REMOTE3
Value:
Default:
Notes:
Specify that remote input group 3 is valid for remote input
=YES or NO
=none
FLD-OP-REMOTE4
Value:
Default:
Notes:
Specify that remote input group 4 is valid for remote input
=YES or NO
=none
FLD-HEIGHT
Value:
Default:
Notes:
The height of the field
=Height in inches
=none
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
F-13
Application designer
FLD-WIDTH
Value:
Default:
Notes:
The width of the field
=Width in inches
=none
FLD-HPOSITION
Value:
Default:
Notes:
The horizontal position of the field
=Horizontal position in inches
=none
FLD-VPOSITION
Value:
Default:
Notes:
The vertical position of the field
=Vertical position in inches
=none
FLD-ORIENTATION
Value:
Default:
Notes:
The orientation of the field
=LEFTRIGHT, TOPBOTTOM, RIGHTLEFT or BOTTOMTOP
=none
FLD-HJUSTIFY
Value:
Default:
Notes:
The horizontal justification of the field
=LEFT, RIGHT, HORIZONTAL, and LEFT-AND-RIGHT
=none
LEFT-AND-RIGHT is valid for text fields only.
FLD-VJUSTIFY
Value:
Default:
Notes:
The vertical justification of the field
=TOP, BOTTOM, or VERTICAL
=none
FLD-DISPLAY
Value:
Default:
Notes:
The display flag of the field
=YES or NO
=none
FLD-PRINT
Value:
Default:
Notes:
The print flag of the field
=YES or NO
=none
FLD-DATA
Value:
Default:
Notes:
Set field data.
=Data expression or supplied field result.
=none
Functionally the same as the BEGIN and END functions but uses
the current field select with the FIELD or NEW-FIELD
commands.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
F-14
Application designer
FLD-DDE-SERVICE
Value:
Default:
Notes:
The DDE service name for a field accepting DDE data
=DDE service name
=none
FLD-DDE-TOPIC
Value:
Default:
Notes:
The DDE topic name for a field accepting DDE data
=DDE topic name
=none
FLD-DDE-ITEM
Value:
Default:
Notes:
The DDE item name for a field accepting DDE data
=DDE item name
=none
FLD-DDE-LINKTYPE
Value:
Default:
Notes:
The DDE link type for a field accepting DDE data
=COLD or HOT
=none
GDI-PRINT
Value:
Default:
Notes:
Print a non-GDI format to a GDI printer.
=none
=none
All fields will be fully resolved and graphics will print. The
print to a Windows printer feature must be enabled for this
feature to work.
It is possible that barcodes may not be scannable on the printed
label when using this feature. This problem is more likely to
happen with low resolution Windows printers because Legi for
Windows resizes each field on the label to get it to print at the
same size that it would be if printed on the labeling printer.
IMPORTANT NOTE:
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
F-15
Application designer
Creation Commands
These commands are intended for use by Weber technical personal only.
NEW-FORMAT
Value:
Default:
Notes:
Create a new label format
=none
=none
FMT-PRINTER must follow this command
FMT-PRINTER
Value:
Default:
Notes:
Select a printer for the label format
=Name of the printer series (i.e. Series 40) or GDI
=none
For backwards compatibility, the old style of naming printers
(i.e. SERIES40) is also supported.
FMT-PRINTMODE
Value:
Default:
Notes:
The print mode for the label format
=0 - 3
=none
This value corresponds to a selection in the print mode list box in
the Label Settings dialog box.
FMT-GDIPRINTERNAME
Value:
Default:
Notes:
NEW-FIELD
Value:
Default:
Notes:
=Name of Windows printer (i.e. “HP LaserJet 4 Plus/4M Plus”)
as it appears in Print Manager
=none
The printer name must match exactly.
Create a new field
=TEXT, BARCODE, GRAPHIC, BOX, LINE, RAW
=none
All commands with the FLD prefix will process the field that is
created with this command.
FLD-TEXT-INTFACENAME Select the font face name
Value:
=String which matches the string in the Font Select dialog in
Label Design exactly.
Default:
=none
Notes:
FLD-TEXT-DISFACENAME Select the typetype face name to use
Value:
=String which matches the true type face name which is used to
represent the font for current field. The face name can be found
in the fonts.h file for the printer driver.
Default:
=none
Notes:
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
F-16
Application designer
FLD-TEXT-WIDTH
Value:
Default:
Notes:
Scalable font width
=Font width in inches.
=none
For scalable fonts only.
FLD-TEXT-HEIGHT
Value:
Default:
Notes:
Scalable font height
=Font height in inches.
=none
For scalable fonts only.
FLD-TEXT-MAGWIDTH
Value:
Default:
Notes:
Magnification level for font width.
=Magnification level.
=none
=For magnifiable fonts only.
FLD-TEXT-MAGHEIGHT
Value:
Default:
Notes:
Magnification level for font height.
=Magnification level.
=none
=For magnifiable fonts only.
FLD-TEXT-INVWIDTH
Value:
Default:
Notes:
Width of the inverse overhang
=Inverse overhang width in inches.
=none
Attribute must have INVERSE selected.
FLD-TEXT-INVHEIGHT
Value:
Default:
Notes:
Height of the inverse overhang
=Inverse overhang height in inches.
=none
FLD-TEXT-FONTATTRIB
Value:
Attribute for the font.
=FLD-TEXT-FA-SOFT, FLD-TEXT-FA-INVERSE,
=FLD-TEXT-FA-ITALIC, FLD-TEXT-FA-UNDERLINE,
=FLD-TEXT-FA-STRIKEOUT, FLD-TEXT-FA-HALFTONE,
=FLD-TEXT-FA-SHADOW
=none
Default:
Notes:
FLD-TEXT-AUTOWRAP
Value:
Default:
Notes:
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
Enable auto word wrap for the field.
=YES or NO
=none
F-17
Application designer
FLD-TEXT-DYNAMIC-FIT
Value:
Default:
Notes:
Enable Dynamic Fit for the field
=YES or NO
=none
FLD-BARCODE-NAME
Value:
Name of the barcode symbology.
=String which matches the barcode name as it appears in the
barcode select list box in Label Design.
=none
Default:
Notes:
FLD-BARCODE-NBE
Value:
Default:
Notes:
FLD-BARCODE-RMC
Value:
Default:
Notes:
FLD-BARCODE-HRI
Value:
Default:
Notes:
Narrow bar element size
=NBE value which matches an NBE for the selected symbology
as it apprears in the barcode table.
=none
Ratio, Magnification, CPI.
=Ratio, magnification or CPI value for the selected symbology
as it apprears in the barcode table.
=none
Human readable information.
=YES or NO.
=YES
FLD-GRAPHIC-MAGWIDTH Width magnification of the graphic field.
Value:
=Magnification level
Default:
=none
Notes:
FLD-GRAPHIC-MAGHEIGHT Height magnification of the graphic field.
Value:
=Magnification level
Default:
=none
Notes:
FLD-BOX-HORZTHICKNESS Horizontal line thickness for a box.
Value:
=Line thickness in inches.
Default:
=none
Notes:
FLD-BOX-VERTTHICKNESS Vertical line thickness for a box.
Value:
=Line thickness in inches.
Default:
=none
Notes:
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
F-18
Application designer
FLD-SUPPLIED
Value:
Default:
Notes:
Set field to be a supplied field
=YES or NO
=none
FMT-LBLVIEW-PRINTLABELS
Show label preview when job is submitted.
=YES or NO
=none
Value:
Default:
Notes:
FMT-LBLVIEW-PRINTSTART
Value:
Default:
Notes:
FMT-LBLVIEW-EACHQUERIED
Value:
Default:
Notes:
FMT-LBLVIEW-EACHSERIAL
Value
Default:
Notes:
Show label preview when job is started.
=YES or NO
=none
Show label preview for each queried label.
=YES or NO
=none
Show label preview for each serial label.
=YES or NO
=none
Assignment Statement
Syntax:
Remark:
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
$var = value
Assign the value to $var.
F-19
Application designer
Goto and Conditional Goto Commands
GOTO
Syntax:
Remark:
Make a jump to a label
GOTO = label
The syntax defining a label is :label
IF-EQUAL
IF-NOT-EQUAL
IF-GREATERTHAN
IF-NOT-GREATERTHAN
IF-LESSTHAN
IF-NOT-LESSTHAN
Syntax:
Remark:
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
IF-EQUAL = para1, para2, label.
The syntax is similar for other IF commands
These commands perform a jump if the para1 is =, ¹, >, £, <, or ³
para2 respectively.
F-20
Application designer
String Commands
ANSI-CHAR
Syntax:
Remark:
Converts an integer to an ANSI character
ANSI-CHAR = ansicode, $char
$char will hold the ANSI character whose ANSI code is
ansicode.
STRING-CAT
Syntax:
Remark:
Concatenate strings
STRING-CAT = string1, string2, ..., $result
Concatenate string1, string2, ... . The concatenated string will
be saved to $result.
STRING-FIND
Syntax:
Remark:
Scan a string for the occurrence of a given substring
STRING-FIND = string1, string2, $index
$index holds the character position of the first occurrence of the
string2 in string1. The $index is 0 if string2 is not in string1.
STRING-LEN
Syntax:
Remark:
Gets the length of the string
STRING-LEN = string, $length
STRING-MID
Syntax:
Remark:
Gets a substring
STRING-MID = string, index, count, $result
$result stores count characters from string, starting at character
index.
The index parameter is zero-based, i.e. index = 0 references the
first character in the string.
STRING-LOWER
Syntax:
Remark:
Converts uppercase letters in a string to lowercase
STRING-LOWER = $string
STRING-UPPER
Syntax:
Remark:
Converts lowercase letters in a string to uppercase
STRING-UPPER = $string
STRING-PARSE
Syntax:
Remark:
Parse one string.
STRING-PARSE = string, delimiter, N, $result
Get the N’th token from string where the string delimiter is used
as the delimiter. The selected token will be in ‘$result’.
$ERRORCODE is 1 if end of string is reached. Otherwise, 0.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
F-21
Application designer
Math Commands
MATF-ABS
Syntax:
Remark:
Replace the value of a variable by its absolute value.
MATF-ABS = $var
MATF-ADD
MATF-SUB
MATF-MUL
MATF-DIV
MATF-MOD
Syntax:
Remark:
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
MATF-ADD = para1, para2, $result
The syntax is similar for other MATH commands.
These commands perform mathematics operation on para1 and
para2. The result will be stored in $result.
F-22
Application designer
Screen I/O Commands
When using screen I/O commands to define a dialog box and its controls, you may want to make
sure that the definitions are only executed once. One good place to define them is at the
beginning of the batch file.
$DLGITEMID is a predefined variable that holds the id of the dialog control item just defined.
$DLGITEMID will be overwritten by most of the dialog commands. If it will be needed, it should
be saved to another variable right after the dialog command. If more than one pusF-button is
defined, you should save the ids of pusF-button controls to compare with the $button_id of the
DIALOG command. You should also save those control items on the dialog box that will use the
DIALOG-SETTEXT.
DIALOG
Syntax:
Remark:
Define a dialog box
DIALOG = DlgName, title, x, y, width, height, $button_id
DlgName is the name of the dialog box, which will be used in
DIALOG-SHOW command.
x is the x-coordinate(in pixels) of dialog box’s upper-left corner
in screen coordinates.
y is the y-coordinate(in pixels) of dialog box’s upper-left corner
in screen coordinates.
width is the dialog box width(in pixels) and height is the height.
$button_id is the id of the pusF-button been clicked.
DIALOG-FRAME
Syntax:
Remark:
Defines a box with specified frame style in the latest dialog box
DIALOG-FRAME = framestyle, x, y, width, height
framestyle must be one of the following: BLACKFRAME,
GRAYFRAME, and WHITEFRAME.
DIALOG-TEXT
Syntax:
Remark:
Defines a text field in the latest dialog box
DIALOG-TEXT = text, x, y, width, height
DIALOG-EDIT
Syntax:
Remark:
Defines an edit box control in the latest dialog box
DIALOG-EDIT = x, y, width, height, $EditText [,PASSWORD]
If the $EditText is assigned a value before the DIALOG-SHOW,
its value at that moment of executing DIALOG-SHOW will be
the initail value of the edit box.
After a pusF-button is clicked, the edited text will be stored to
$EditText.
If the keyword PASSWORD is specified, Legi displays all
characters as an asterisk (*) as they are typed into the edit
control.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
F-23
Application designer
DIALOG-LIST
Syntax:
Remark:
Defines a list box control in the latest dialog box
DIALOG-LIST = x, y, width, height, $ListText
If the $ListText is assigned a value before the DIALOG-SHOW,
its value at that moment of executing DIALOG-SHOW will be
highlighted if the value is in the list box.
After a pusF-button is clicked, $ListText will have the text of
the selected item.
DIALOG-LIST-ITEM
Syntax:
Remark:
Adds a string to the latest list box
DIALOG-LIST-ITEM = string
Empty or duplicate string will not be added to the list.
This command must be placed immediately after DIALOGLIST.
DIALOG-COMBOBOX
Syntax:
Remark:
Defines a combobox control in the latest dialog box
DIALOG-COMBOBOX = style, x,y,width,height, $ComboText
The style can be one of the following: SIMPLE, DROPDOWN,
and DROPDOWNLIST.
If the $ComboText is assigned a value before the DIALOGSHOW, its value at that moment of executing DIALOG-SHOW
will be highlighted if the value is in the list.
After a pusF-button is clicked, the selected item will be stored to
$ComboText.
DIALOG-COMBOBOX-ITEM Adds a string to the latest combobox control
Syntax:
DIALOG-COMBOBOX-ITEM = string
Remark:
Empty or duplicate string will not be added to the list.
This command must be placed immediately after DIALOGCOMBOBOX.
DIALOG-LIST-FILES
Syntax:
Remark:
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
Defines a list box control that contains all the specified file
names
DIALOG-LIST-FILES=filename, x, y, width, height, $file
filename can have wildcards.
If drive and path are not supplied in the filename the value set in
SET-DIRECTORY is used.
If the $file is assigned a value before the DIALOG-SHOW, its
value at that moment of executing DIALOG-SHOW will be
highlighted if the value is in the list.
After a pusF-button is clicked, the selected file name, as well as
its drive and path will be saved in $file.
F-24
Application designer
DIALOG-COMBOBOX-FILES Defines a combobox control that contains file names.
Syntax:
DIALOG-COMBOBOX-FILES=filename, style, x, y, w, h, $file
Remark:
filename can have wildcards.
If drive and path are not supplied in the filename the value set in
SET-DIRECTORY is used.
The style can be one of the following: SIMPLE, DROPDOWN
and DROPDOWNLIST.
w is the combobox box width(in pixels) and h is the height.
If the $file is assigned a value before the DIALOG-SHOW, its
value at that moment of executing DIALOG-SHOW will be
highlighted if the value is in the list.
After a pusF-button is clicked, the selected file name, as well as
its drive and path will be saved in $file.
Syntax:
DIALOG-CHECKBOX = text, x, y, width, height, $Status
Remark:
text is the text that follows the check box.
If the $Status is assigned a value before the DIALOG-SHOW,
its value at that moment of executing DIALOG-SHOW will
decide whether the box is checked or not.
After a pusF-button is clicked, the $Status will be 1 if the box is
checked. Otherwise 0.
DIALOG-RADIOBUTTON
Syntax:
Remark:
Defines a radio button in the latest dialog box
DIALOG-RADIOBUTTON = text, x, y, width, height, $Status
text is the text that follows the radio button.
If the $Status is assigned a value before the DIALOG-SHOW,
its value at that moment of executing DIALOG-SHOW will
decide whether the box is checked or not.
After a pusF-button is clicked, the $Status will be 1 if the button
is checked. Otherwise 0.
DIALOG-GROUPBOX
Syntax:
Remark:
Defines a group box control in the latest dialog box
DIALOG-GROUPBOX = title, x, y, width, height
The control is a rectangle that groups other controls together.
The controls between this and DIALOG-GROUP-END will
belong to one group.
DIALOG-GROUP-END
Syntax:
Remark:
Ends a group
DIALOG-GROUP-END
DIALOG-PUSHBUTTON
Syntax:
Remark:
Defines a pusF-button control in the latest dialog box.
DIALOG-PUSHBUTTON = text, x, y, width, height
If no pusF-button is defined, the software will show a default
‘OK’ button.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
F-25
Application designer
DIALOG-SHOW
Syntax:
Remark:
Shows the dialog box and its controls, and pause the batch.
DIALOG-SHOW = DlgName, type
The DlgName is the name of the dialog box to be shown.
The type is AUTOCLOSE or MANUALCLOSE.
AUTOCLOSE - When one of the push buttons is clicked, LEGI
software will update all variables attached to control items,
close the dialog box and unpause the batch.
MANUALCLOSE - The dialog box will stay until DIALOGCLOSE is executed. The LEGI software will update all variable
attached to control items and unpause the batch if user clicks one
of its pusF-buttons, check boxes or radio buttons, moves the
focus off one of its edit box or combo box with style of SIMPLE
or DROPDOWN, or selects another item in the list of a list box
or DROPDOWNLIST combo box. It lets user change the values
of the related controls if the value of one control has been
changed.
If the dialog box is already showing in the case of
MANUALCLOSE, the DIALOG-SHOW will bring itself to the
top and pause the batch. The type will be ignored.
DIALOG-SET-TEXT
Syntax:
Remark:
Sets the title or text of a control item to the specified text
DIALOG-SET-TEXT = $id, text
The command is for MANUALCLOSE dialog box only.
It must be after DIALOG-SHOW and before DIALOG-CLOSE.
$id is the id of a control item, which you saved $DLGITEMID
to.
DIALOG-SHOW-LIST-ITEM Shows a string in the list of a listbox or combobox.
Syntax:
DIALOG-SHOW-LIST-ITEM = $id, text
Remark:
The command is for MANUALCLOSE dialog box only.
It must be after DIALOG-SHOW and before DIALOG-CLOSE.
$id is the id of the control item, which you saved $DLGITEMID
to.
This command only shows the string and does not save it as list
item.
DIALOG-HIDE-LIST-ITEM
Syntax:
Remark:
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
Hides a string from the list of a listbox or combobox.
DIALOG-HIDE-LIST-STRING = $id, text
The command is for MANUALCLOSE dialog box only.
It must be after DIALOG-SHOW and before DIALOG-CLOSE.
$id is the id of the control item, which you saved $DLGITEMID
to.
This command only hides the string and does not delete it from
the list.
F-26
Application designer
DIALOG-CLOSE
Syntax:
Remark:
Close the dialog box and its controls
DIALOG-CLOSE = DlgName
It is for MANUALCLOSE dialog box only.
The DlgName is the name of the dialog box to be closed.
MESSAGE-BOX
Syntax:
Remark:
Show a message on the screen
MESSAGE-BOX = title, text
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
F-27
Application designer
File I/O Commands
FILE-OPEN
Syntax:
Remark:
Opens a DOS text file
FILE-OPEN = filename, access, $filehandle
access has to be one of the following:
RDONLY
Open for reading only
WRONLY Open for writing only. If the file exists, it will be
cleared. Otherwise, it will be created
RDWR
Open for reading and writing
APPEND
Open for reading and writing. The file pointer will
be set to the end of the file prior to each write.
$filehandle is the file handle. On error the $filehandle is -1.
If drive and path are not supplied in the filename the value set in
SET-DIRECTORY is used.
$ERRORCODE
2
No such file or directory
4
Too many open files
5
Permission denied
FILE-READ
Syntax:
Remark:
Read N bytes from the opened text file
FILE-READ = $filehandle, N, $string
FILE-READ attempts to read N bytes from file associated with
$filehandle into $string.
It begins reading at the current file pointer. When the reading is
complete, it increments the file pointer by the number of bytes
read.
$ERRORCODE is set to 1 on end-of-file.
FILE-READ-TOKEN
Read the file for tokens, which are separated by the delimiter
character.
FILE-READ-TOKEN = $filehandle, C, $string
FILE-READ-TOKEN reads from file associated with $filehandle
into $string until it reaches the delimiter character C. The
delimiter is truncated.
The C is limited to one character.
It begins reading at the current file pointer. When the reading is
complete, it increments the file pointer by the number of bytes
read.
$ERRORCODE is set to 1 on end-of-file.
Syntax:
Remark:
FILE-READ-LINE
Syntax:
Remark:
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
Read the current line from the opened text file
FILE-READ-LINE = $filehandle, $line
$line will hold the one line text. The LF is truncated.
The current line changes to the next line when reading is
complete.
$ERRORCODE is 1 when end-of-file is reached.
F-28
Application designer
FILE-WRITE
Syntax:
Remark:
Write a string to the opened text file
FILE-WRITE = $filehandle, text
FILE-WRITE-LINE
Syntax:
Remark:
Write a line to the opened text file
FILE-WRITE-LINE = $filehandle, text
LF will be appended to text before writing.
FILE-CLOSE
Syntax:
Remark:
Close the opened text file
FILE-CLOSE = $filehandle
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
F-29
Application designer
Port I/O Commands
PORT-OPEN
Syntax:
Remark:
Open a communication port
PORT-OPEN = port [, speed, parity, bytesize, stopbits]
port specifies the device in the form of COMn where n is 1-9 or
LPTn where n is 1-3.
The speed, parity, bytesize and stopbits are used to set up the
port for COMn only.
If the port has been opened by Printer Manager, the PORTOPEN will be ignored.
On a successful open, the $ERRORCODE is 0.
PORT-CHECK
Syntax:
Remark:
Return the status of a communication port
PORT-CHECK=port,$status, $inbytes, $outbytes, $JobsInQueue
port is COMn or LPTn.
$status specifies the status of transmission.
$inbytes specifies the number of bytes in the receive queue.
$outbytes specifies the number of bytes in the transmit queue.
$JobsInQueue specifies the number of jobs in the printer
manager queue for this port.
The port must be opened by PORT-OPEN or Printer Manager.
PORT-READ
Syntax:
Remark:
Read bytes from a communication port
PORT-READ = port, nbytes, $data
port is COMn or LPTn.
nbytes specifies number of bytes to read.
‘$data’ is the data read from the port.
The port must be opened by PORT-OPEN or Printer Manager.
PORT-WRITE
Syntax:
Remark:
Write a string to a communication port
PORT-WRITE = port, string
port is COMn or LPTn.
The port must be opened by PORT-OPEN or Printer Manager.
PORT-CLOSE
Syntax:
Remark:
Close an opened communication port
PORT-CLOSE = port
port is COMn or LPTn.
PORT-CLOSE only closes the port opened by PORT-OPEN.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
F-30
Application designer
DataBase I/O Commands
DB-OPEN
Syntax:
Remark:
Open a Database
DB-OPEN = filename, $tblhandle
It returns the table handle in $tblhandle that will be used by other
DB commands.
If drive and path are not supplied in the filename the value set in
SET-DIRECTORY is used.
DB-CLOSE
Syntax:
Remark:
Close a Database
DB-CLOSE = $tbhandle
$tblhandle is the table handle obtained from DB-OPEN
DB-LOCATE-KEY
Syntax:
Remark:
Locate a record by key match
DB-LOCATE-KEY = $tblhandle,name1,value1,name2,value2,...
Search the open table specified by $tblhandle to find the record
that has valueN on key field nameN. If the search is successful,
the record found will be the current record.
$ERRORCODE
error description
31
Argument is out of range
76
Invalid table handle
89
Record is not found
DB-LOCATE-FIELD
Syntax:
Remark:
Locate a record that has the specified field value.
DB-LOCATE-FILED = $tblhandle, fieldname, fieldvalue
Search the table specified by $tblhandle to find the record that
the value of its field fieldname is fieldvalue. If the search is
successful, the record found will be the current record.
$ERRORCODE
error description
60
Cannot search the BLOB field
76
Invalid table handle
89
Record is not found
DB-LOCATE-RECNUM
Syntax:
Remark:
Set current to the specified record
DB-LOCATE-RECNUM = $tblhandle, recnum
The current record will be record #recnum
$ERRORCODE
error description
31
Argument is out of range
76
Invalid table handle
105
Operation on empty table
DB-READ
Syntax:
Remark:
Retrieves the field(s) from the current record
DB-READ = $tblhandle, name1, $value1, name2, $value2, ...
The value of field named nameN will be saved in $valueN
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
F-31
Application designer
DB-READ-NEXT
Syntax:
Remark:
Retrieves the field(s) from the next record
DB-READ-NEXT=$tblhandle,name1,$value1,name2,$value2,...
The value of field named nameN will be saved in $valueN
The current record will be the next record following the current
record of the table.
$ERRORCODE
error description
76
Invalid table handle
101
End of table
105
Operation on empty table
DB-READ-PREV
Syntax:
Remark:
Retrieves the field(s) from the previous record
DB-READ-PREV=$tblhandle,name1,$value1,name2,$value2,...
The value of a field named nameN will be saved in $valueN.
The current record will be the record positioned before the
current record of the table.
$ERRORCODE
error description
76
Invalid table handle
101
End of table
105
Operation on empty table
DB-INSERT
Syntax:
Remark:
Insert a new record to DataBase
DB-INSERT = $tblhandle, name1, value1, name2, value2, ...
Insert a record to the table specified by $tblhandle. The field
nameN of the record is set to valueN.
The inserted record becomes the new current record.
$ERRORCODE
error description
22
Table is write protected
76
Invalid table handle
97
Key violation
119
Table is locked
DB-UPDATE
Syntax:
Remark:
Update current record
DB-UPDATE = $tblhandle, name1, value1, name2, value2, ...
Update the current record of the open table specified by
$tblhandle. The field nameN of the record will be set to valueN.
$ERRORCODE
error description
9
Record is locked
22
Table is write protected
50
Another user deleted record
76
Invalid table handle
97
Key violation
105
Operation on empty table
119
Table is locked
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
F-32
Application designer
Misc Commands
SET-TIME
Syntax:
Remark:
Sets system time
SET-TIME = hour, min, sec, hund
hund is the hundredths of seconds
GET-TIME
Syntax:
Remark:
Gets system time
GET-TIME = $hour, $min, $sec, $hund
SET-DATE
Syntax:
Remark:
Sets system date
SET-DATE = month, day, year
GET-DATE
Syntax:
Remark:
Gets system date
GET-DATE = $month, $day, $year
ENCODE-DATE
Syntax:
Remark:
Converts a calendar date to DB internal date format
ENCODE-DATE = month, day, year, $internal_date
DECODE-DATE
Syntax:
Remark:
Converts DB internal date format to a calendar date
DECODE-DATE = internal_date, $month, $day, $year
SLEEP
Syntax:
Remark:
Suspends the batch for an interval(milliseconds)
SLEEP = msecs
WIN-EXEC
Syntax:
Remark:
runs a specified application
WIN-EXEC = CmdLine
CmdLine is a string that contains the command line (filename
plus optional parameter) for the application to run. If the string
does not contain a path, Windows searches the directories in this
order:
1. The current directory.
2. The Windows directory .
3. The Windows system directory.
4. The directory containing the executable file for the current
task.
5. The directories listed in the PATH environment variable.
6. The directories mapped in a network.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
F-33
Application designer
ADD-BATCH
Syntax:
Remark:
Add a batch to the end of the batch queue.
ADD-BATCH = Batchfilename
Batchfilename is a string that contains the drive, path and name
of the batch file to be added. If drive and path are not supplied in
the filename the value set in SET-DIRECTORY is used.
Sample File
* Select the bolts label for printing.
FORMAT=bolts.lbl
IDENTICAL-COUNT=10
SERIAL-COUNT=2
* Set data values into the fields
BEGIN
0001="Special Bolt design A230-yt1"
0015="Expiration Date: 6/30/95"
END
* Print this format
PRINT
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
F-34
Application designer
This page intentionally left blank.
Weber Marking Systems, Inc.
F-35